Home

Danelec Business System

1. eese 94 NWAVMARING LEE i SELUD AEE E TEET See weather download setup SUDSCTIPHON ssseeeoeeeeeeeeeeseesssssssssseseeerrressssssssesceeeereessssss 85 weather packages cccccccccsssssssssssssesseeececeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 96 dynamic TICeHSI Deos occae Consec aede racine eatem i 32 Ie EI PHP 32 terms Chante sesser ienen i aE crane eiui d 33 a E QU E Nm 33 Easy Mode weather ONO e a E E E EEE 88 cio m 89 echo sounder US PA PUDOR IET 138 OUI e 138 edit manal Update NER T RR ERROR TCU OC 62 edit mariner ODICCIS asesor asa ii an rte bv no eso a3 Ag nieron 66 electronic range and bearing from own ship to mouse pointer seeeeseeeessss 170 electronic range and bearing line between any two POINIS ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 169 fix range and bearing at own ship ssss 169 from own ship to other points eeeeeeeesssssss 169 ENC S 57 data Wp toC MI V MU rr aie ER 38 itistall Updates aossoteessteaisasataniesecseorsasadeniesnatenrinaat r E naei 39 large media SUPPOM vecosssacccicevecersverscussesnedennceriendiaaescagieusens 27 S 63 protection sesseeeeeeeeeee See S 63 protection EDO C TTE ET EEE 39 expired before licenses USt usine aieo vea hn tae 31 export mariner objects to file aures esau m edoceri eto mede beo Pv deci
2. NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS equal to releasing the Start Play Back button in activated condition called Stop Play Back in the Log Book panel The Replay panel will be removed from the screen and in the chart window the current ship s position will be displayed 9 4 Navi Calculator The navigator s calculator is an additional tool designed to help you in performing various geodetic tasks not solved automatically by the ECDIS The Navi Calculator performs the following tasks e inverse geodetic problem e direct geodetic problem e calculating great circle points e converting coordinates from one datum to another To solve the inverse geodetic problem do the following 1 Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Distance Bearing tab Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization 4 E a x Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Distance Bearing Great Circle Datum Transformation Show Clear All Start Point Distance 0 000 NM Y Distance Bearing LAT N 00 00 000 BearingTo 0 000 e Calculate End Point LON E 000 00 000 Bearing From 0 000 9 End Point Mode Great Circle M LAT N 00 00 000 LON E000 00 000 Figure 239 Info gt Navi Calculator tab Distance Bearing tab for direct and inverse geodetic problems 2 Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections To show the line connecting the p
3. Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m DIST TIME 55 18 378 N 013 08 761 E Pilot station 55 21 104 N 013 44 364 E OOhr 30min Establish VHF connection Figure 83 Route gt Route planning tab Edit mode critical points table 3 To plot a critical point in the chart view move the mouse pointer to the critical point location and left click The critical point will be added to the CP table A critical point symbol is an orange circle with a cross inside e The other way to add a critical point is to enter its coordinates to the LAT and LON fields of the CP table To move a critical point to a new position left click on it to capture the point with the mouse pointer move the point to a new position and left click once more to plot it there 6 After the coordinates of the critical point have been set add the following information about the critical point to the CP table e D T Indicate if the system will give alarm when approaching the critical point within a specified time or within a specified distance For distance you should put a tick v sign in the cell and for time a dash sign To select a sign click in the cell and the sign that is now displayed will change to the other Last update December 11 2012 77 NAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS DIST TIME The value of the distance or the time at which the system should notify the mariner about approaching the criti
4. 34 If you change the arrival or departure time date the ETA and ETD for each waypoint are changed accordingly Last update December 11 2012 78 Gm NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 5 To display only named waypoints in the Schedule table check the Only named WP checkbox 6 To save changes press the Save button All changes will be saved and the route edit mode will be switched off 6 4 7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference This chapter explains how to exports routes to and import them from files To export a route to a file do the following 1 Open the Route gt Export Import tab and switch to the From To File tab Start Route _ Route Export 4 milex Voyage Planning Finder Import From To File From To Device ReweName FromPort ALGER ARZEW route Nife ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria ANTOFAGASTA CALDERA ANTOFAGASTA Chil CALDERA Chile NEW VOLUME E KOBENHAVN COPENHAGI KOBENHAVN COPE YSTAD Sweden Refresh devices tree Export Import Figure 85 Route gt Export Import tab From To File tab 2 Select a route to export in the routes table 3 Enter the file name to the field above the folder tree and select the file format INI or RTE WPL in the file formats drop down list e INI Routes are saved in f
5. The navigation mode is off Navig MarObj The mariners objects edit mode is on The route edit mode is on Planning Last update December 11 2012 9 CNAV ARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt Data Display Type indicator has the following states The Data Display Type indicator shows which data display type is currently on see chapter 5 6 2 Display Type The Base display type is on To switch to the Standard display type left click on the indicator In addition to Base display objects chart presentation settings adding elements to the chart view are on the Chart Chart Presentation tab The Standard display type is on To switch to the All other display type left click on the Standard indicator In addition to Standard display objects chart presentation settings adding elements to the chart view are on the Chart Chart Presentation tab C e un F 6n Allother The All other display type is on All cartographic information available from the chart is displayed The Custom display type is on To switch to the Standard display type left click on the indicator a fi er er gt Navigation Info indicator has the following states The Nav Info indicator switches the current display type to Base display turns off chart presentation settings not required for the Base display and removes all additional navigation information radar AIS target
6. Figure 67 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab export import mode Last update December 11 2012 66 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 Create the list of objects to export add mariner objects from the objects list to the Selected Objects list Use the selection buttons C3 Add Object adds a selected object to the Selected Objects list C3 Add All Objects adds all mariner objects to the Selected Objects list EJ Remove Object removes a selected object from the Selected Objects list EJ Remove All Objects removes all objects from the Selected Objects list Select Visible adds mariner objects that are currently displayed in the chart view to the Selected Objects list all previously added objects are removed from the Selected Objects list Select Last Imported adds last imported mariner objects to the Selected Objects list 3 Press the Export button The Export mariner objects dialog will open 4 n the Export mariner objects dialog indicate the folder where the file will be saved change the file name is necessary default file name is mariner_objects dat and press the Export button Objects file will be saved in the specified folder 5 To return to the editor press the Editor button To import a mariner object do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and press the Export Import button to switch to the export import mode uU Te Press the Import button
7. KOBENHAVN COPENHAGEN Denmark PIIR YSTAD Sweden pm DURRES Albania PORTO SAN NICOLO Albania SHENGJIN Albania r S Ka 3 Highlight Ports A Sorted ByCountry v Highlight M Highlight Al Ay Add restriction G2 Remove allrestrict Add waypoints Calculate Overview Save as route Figure 71 Route gt Route finder tab 2 Add waypoints of the route to the waypoints list in the Itinerary tab There are two ways of adding waypoints a add ports from the ports list to the itinerary see the description of the procedure below b add waypoints by selecting them directly in the chart view see the description of the procedure below Edit the waypoints list see the description of the procedure below Calculate the route see the description of the procedure below Apply restrictions to the route calculation in case the calculated route leads through narrows channels or straits you do not want it to There are two ways of applying restrictions a forbid using channels and straits for route calculation by indicating it in the Disabled Passages list see the description of the procedure below Last update December 11 2012 69 6 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS b apply restrictions directly in the chart view see the description of the procedure below Recalculate if necessary and save the route see the description of the procedure below To add a port from the ports list to
8. NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Secondary position source drop down list and press the Swap position sources button The name of the primary position source is displayed in the Position Source indicator see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel 4 To set a positioning device as a secondary position source just select it in the list of available positioning devices in the Position sources tab To display the own ship position in the chart view using the secondary position source check the Show secondary checkbox 5 In case the primary position source fails an alarm is triggered see chapter 7 6 Alarms and the secondary position source becomes the primary source automatically 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning The dead reckoning parameters can be used for the own ship positioning when communication with all other positioning devices is lost To use dead reckoning as position source do the following 1 Open the Navi gt Dead reckoning tab The Position Heading and Speed parameters are automatically set to the values that were last received from external output devices Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data past track and vector Reckoning Position fix Position Heading Speed Drift i Auto Manual iv Auto Manual W Auto Manual Drift direction 000 0 Latitude N 00 00 000 Heading 000 09 Speed 0 0 kn Drift speed 0 0 kn Longitude E000 00 000 Figure 147 Config Dead reckoning tab 2 To change the automatically s
9. Start Route GoTo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Set WP m Checkroute Autopilot ON OFF WPT LAT N42746 285 WPTLON W009 10 631 Dangers Cautions DataSet Z14A81H0 Profession Attributes Depth contour DataSet filename Z14A81H0 C00 amp Depth area Chart Title RIADE MUROS Y NOIA DataSet source type Mon official source identification 415A Figure 185 Route Go to Waypoint tab Dangers and Cautions tabs 8 To view the waypoint in the chart view press the Show button to hide the waypoint outpress the Show button when pressed its name changes to Hide Last update December 11 2012 137 vA User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 8 NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOLS 8 1 Echo Sounder If an echo sounder is registered in the ECDIS in the Config gt Input Output tab the own ship depth data are coming to the system The depth data are displayed in the navigational panel in the DPT line as well as in the Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab The DPT line in the navigational panel contains two values separated by a slash the first value is the depth from the water line to the transducer and the second value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom gt The echo sounder diagram is made up of the following elements 1 Time and depth axes the time axis is the horizontal axis and the depth axis is the vertical axis The time is measured in minutes the depth mea
10. e Own ship coordinates Latitude and longitude of the own ship received from the positioning device The AUTO mark near the coordinates indicates that the position is received from an external Figure 163 positioning device Navigational panel e SOG Speed over ground received from the positioning device e COG Course over ground received from the positioning device The DR cannot be set as a primary heading source this way It is used as a heading source only in case there is no any data available from external devices Last update December 11 2012 125 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS HDG Heading received from the gyrocompass Near the heading value the name of the device providing heading info is indicated If heading is received from dead reckoning the MAN mark is displayed STW Speed through water received from the log DPT Depth received from the echo sounder The first value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom and the second value is the depth from the water line to the transducer The DPT line is not on the panel if no echo sounder is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab Wind Wind speed and direction received from the wind sensor The Wind line is not on the panel if no wind sensor is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab The Disp button opens the Anemometer window where the true and relative wind directions are depicted graphically ROT Ra
11. Attention Use of this criterion is a mere recommendation Consider whether or not it is really applicable to evaluation of navigation safety under the current conditions since there is no guarantee that really dangerous targets will stand higher on the list e Name e MMSI e Meeting time Targets are sorted in an increasing Meeting time order Forward Backward targets Targets ahead back on the route stand higher on the list Attention Targets to which the selected criterion does not apply are typed in grey on the list gt Viewing messages from a target To view messages received from an AIS target do the following 1 Select an AIS target in the targets list If there were any messages from the target the Show Received Messages button becomes active otherwise it s grayed 2 To view messages press the Show Received Messages button The Received Messages window will open where all messages from the AIS target are displayed EN Received Messages Es Figure 192 AIS messages Received 8 2 2 AIS Targets Messages window Display Settings AIS targets can be displayed in the chart view Using the AIS targets display functionality you can evaluate the current situation at one glance To turn the display of AIS targets on or off left click on the AIS indicator If the display of AIS targets is off the AIS indicator is orange L As Ji if the display of AIS targets is on the AIS indicator is green The activation
12. Current speed in knots not processed for gyroscope N for knots not processed for gyroscope Current speed in km h gt VTG Course over ground and ground speed Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 The actual course and speed relative to the ground X X X X VTG x xl T x x M x x Ne x x K a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt X Course over ground degrees true for true Course over ground degrees magnetic M for magnetic Speed over ground knots a X N for knots X X Speed over ground km h K for km h Mode indicator Last update December 11 2012 187 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt WPL Waypoint location Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint S WPL 1111 11 a yyyyy yy a c c hh CR LF ERE GN NN mao Waypoint latitude N S mE wo umm Nonsense ew sw C NN gt ZDA Time and date Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 UTC day month year and local time zone 3 Z2DA hhmmss ss KK XX xxxx xx xx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt ERN NNNM femmes vio mo jmeemwa o mo minora m X X Last update December 11 2012 188 CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS APPENDIX B List of Output Sentences The table below lists sentences which can be transmitted by the ECDIS and devices for which the sentences are intended Route Planner RTE WPL RTE Routes
13. NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS re ee u AIS channel S S Encapsulated ITU R M 1371 radio message EE gt VDO AIS VHF data link own vessel report Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of an AIS unit s broadcast message packet as defined in ITU R M 1371 and as sent out by the AIS unit over the VHF data link VDL using the six bit field type The sentence uses the same structure as the VDM sentence formatter VDO Xl X7 X3 ad S S5 X6 nhsOcR LE Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message 1 to 9 Meme 9 0 s Mm hmmm s MeewemUR ue e ME Number of fill bits O to 5 gt VDR Set and drift Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 The direction towards which a current flows set and speed drift of a current S cVDR X Xly T2 amp x3 M4 X x5 No nh lt CR gt lt LF gt Comments not processed gt VHW Water speed and heading Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 The compass heading to which the vessel points and the speed of the vessel relative to the water S VEW Xxl T2 Kame M4 xX x5b N6 X xX7 BA8 bh CR 2 hb Last update December 11 2012 186 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Heading degrees true not processed for speed log for true not processed for speed log Heading degrees magnetic not processed for speed log M for magnetic not processed for speed log
14. Provides information about water level height predictions for next three days starting from the current day The step of such predictions is one hour 00 0 0 741 00 0 0 47 15 0 1 681 01 0 1 081 01 0 0 83m 16 0 1 671 02 0 1 361 02 0 1 16m 17 0 1 431 03 0 1 581 03 0 1 43m AOAC 1 AO DAA A OA s MAAC A COs Figure 94 Tidal information water levels plan 6 5 2 Tidal Streams Information Information about tides is available in the Info gt Streams Info panel To access tidal streams information do the following 1 Open the Info gt Streams Info panel and set the Switch Tides On Off checkbox to turn on the display of tides and streams information in the chart view Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal stream stations 4 appear on the map the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1 5 000 000 To view information about a tidal stream you should select it To select a stream right click on it in the chart Information about the stream will be immediately displayed in the tab Last update December 11 2012 82 AY NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Echo Sounder i i Synchronization Diagram i Monitor v Switch Tides On Off 10 02 14 04 Pla Time Zone UTC 05 voies eus EM Bh LL LL vin Speed 1 89kn ti as Flood Ebb Flood UTC 2009 10 03 05 43 a 2 0kn Direction 195 00 Results In UTC
15. Update Professional sae Se cem i 214A33l0 e Obstruction Latitude Longitude i4 Added 2 10 2009 0 BH RAE 05 805 N 005 22 432 E Se Obstruction Added 2 10 2009 0 X Deleted 2 10 2009 b Removed from display Figure 61 Chart Manual Update tab adding new object editing metrics 9 Plotting the object in the chart view e To plot a node left click in the chart view To add a next node left click in the chart view once more e To add a node between two nodes move the pointer to the position on the line connecting the two nodes where you want to add a node left click in this position the new node will be created and it will be attached to the pointer so that it will move with it to plot the node left click in the chart view once more e To move a node left click on it to capture it with the mouse pointer move the pointer with the node to a new position and left click e To delete a node right click on it To delete a point object while still in the add object mode just cancel the operation press the Cancel button 10 After the object attributes and metrics have been set press the Save button to save the object or the Cancel button to cancel the operation Last update December 11 2012 60 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 11 The Updated by dialog will open Enter your name to the field it is the name of the author of the update Press the OK button The ob
16. bridge height 5 0 Turn radius port 100 0 m Y d TAH Speed 18 0 Minimal ship width on screen 6 mm ma LED _ Save settings __ Restore settings Figure 10 Config gt Own ship tab Own ship setup tab To set the own ship parameters do the following 1 Open the Config gt Own Ship gt Own ship setup tab 2 Inthe tab enter values of the parameters to the fields corresponding to the parameters e LOA max Length Maximum length of the vessel e B max beam Maximum beam of the vessel e Hm max height Maximum height of the vessel including the mast e Hb bridge height Height of the bridge e Speed Speed in knots e Tmax max draft Maximum draft of the vessel e T current draft Current draft of the vessel e Turn radius starboard Starboard turn radius e Turn radius port Port turn radius e Minimal ship width on screen If the width of the scaled own ship symbol in the scale of the currently displayed chart is less than the parameter value the scaled symbol changes to the point symbol 3 After the parameters have been entered press the Save Settings button enter the password and press OK 4 To restore previously saved settings press the Restore Settings button It is impossible to restore the previous settings after the new settings have been saved To set precise locations of positioning and other devices onboard the own ship do the following 1 Open the Config Own Ship Position of ins
17. destination of the target the location of the ositioning device e Messages the last received message if no messages were received P g the field is not displayed Meeting point information and display On the Meeting point info tab Figure 190 coordinates of the meeting point time to go to the meeting point etc calculated under the assumption that own ship will keep on going along the route are shown for targets within the pre defined corridor around the route see step 12 in AIS Targets Display Settings on page 142 Echo Sounder AIS Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor Toon Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor 213335320 GAZPROMNEFT EAST Position report Static and voyage data Meeting point info C0G 000 0 SOG 0 0 kn type Vessel Meeting point 59 51 474 N 030 29 624 E 273358610 GAZPROMNEFT NORD C0G 221 4 SOG 0 0 kn type Vessel Meeting pointtime 07 09 2012 21 41 12 273999993 GEORGY CHICHERIN 1h37m 48s COG 144 2 SOG 0 0 kn type Vessel Distance mark 1364 3 Km 311009600 GREEN FREEZER Caution area info COG 236 3 SOG 0 0 kn type Vessel Do u b e left cl ick h ere 271043197 GULMAR COG 063 6 SOG 0 0 kn tvne Vessel Acknowledge Acknowledge All Name X Close Displays Goto meeting point Show Received Messages Figure 190 The Meeting point info tab The meeting pont is in blue on the chart Figure 191 The p
18. module performing estimation of collision danger of the own ship and an AIS or ARPA target e ECDIS Input Output module controlling connection of input out devices to the system and processing data coming from the devices Licensing of software modules is performed in the same way as licensing of cartographic data To carry out operations with licenses of software modules in the Data Licensing tab select Software Modules from the Databases drop down list After that all other operations with installing of licenses are identical to the operations for installing data licenses 4 5 ENC Data in S 57 Format 4 5 1 S 63 Protection of ENC Data The ECDIS fully implements the IHO data protection scheme S 63 All elements of the scheme required on the Data Client side are available in the Data Import S57 tab To use ENC data protected with the S 63 scheme you will need to be able to perform the following actions e Send your user permit written in your dongle together with data request to a Data Server to order data e Apply S 63 cell permits to be able to decrypt the data e Apply Scheme Administrator SA certificate to be able to verify data authenticity 14 t is important to note that all existing licenses will be valid after the new version of the database is installed and you will not need to request new licenses Last update December 11 2012 34 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To copy user permit to a
19. 2 Enter the depth values of the contours to the fields corresponding to the contours e Safety contour is the depth contour selected by the user that should not be crossed to avoid grounding the ship The contour is used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between the safe and the unsafe water for generating anti grounding alarms and for checking routes e Safety depth The depth defined by the mariner e g the ship s draft plus under keel clearance to be used by the ECDIS to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this value All soundings that are deeper than the safety depth will be displayed in a light grey color while soundings that are less than or equal to the safety depth will be displayed in black e Shallow contour The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between medium shallow and very shallow waters Medium shallow water area lies between the safety contour and the shallow contour and very shallow water area lies between the shallow contour and the zero meter contour The shallow contour value should be less than that of the safety contour The shallow contour value is not used in other ECDIS functions e Deep contour The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between medium deep and deep waters Medium deep water area lies between the deep and safety contours and the deep water area is all water deeper than the d
20. COG Course Over the Ground CP Control Point CPA Closest point of approach CS Conning Station DGPS Differential Global Positioning System D DIST Distance DPT Depth DR Dead reckoning DTG Distance to Go DWP Distance to Next Waypoint E East ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System ECMWF European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasts Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS ENC Electronic Navigation Chart EP Estimated position ERBL Electronic range and bearing line ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETD Estimated Time of Departure GC Great Circle GMDSS Global maritime distress and safety system GLONASS Global Navigation Satellite System GPS Global Positioning System GRIB GRlIdded Binary HDG Heading HO Hydrographic office IHO International Hydrographic Organization IMO International Maritime Organization LAT Latitude LOC Local Mean Time LON Longitude LOP Line of Position MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identities MOB Man Overboard 202 _ ayMARINe N North N A Not Available NAVTEX Navigational Telex NMEA National Marine Electronics Association NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration RAD Radius RL Rhumb Line RM Relative motion RMS Root Mean Square ROT Rate of turn S south SAR Search and Rescue SENC System Electronic Navigational Chart SOG Speed Over the Ground Last update December 11 201
21. Mi Weather Subscription x Global ECMWF 150 km Global 1 5 degree model from ECMWF Sub center Storm WC alid till 31 mak 2009 available for scheduled download orldwide ubscription limited to area 64800 00 sq degrees Forecasted period up to 10 dayswith 6h step Products Pressure Pressure at sea level Temperature Temperature at sea level Wind Wind strength and direction Precipitation Accumulated total precipitation for the previous period in th Total Waves Primary waves period height and direction QCuiall M uae f Cuiall waves haictht neriad and diractian Request Subscription Figure 102 Weather Subscription window In case you have changed weather data subscription terms you will have to renew weather subscription To renew weather subscription do the following Last update December 11 2012 87 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Subscription option from the drop down menu The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there Press the Request Subscription button Your further actions on sending receiving subscription depend on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters for details see the downloading subscription procedure above 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download The Easy Mode download option is a preset option and allows you downloa
22. Select the permits file and press the Apply cell permit button The cell permits written in the permits file will be applied You can now decrypt the S 57 data and convert them to the CM93v3 format Last update December 11 2012 35 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 4 n case an error occurred during permits application the error message will be displayed in the Message log pane To view all installed S 63 cell permits or uninstall a specified cell permit do the following 1 Open the Data Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button The Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog will open 2 In the Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog press the Installed cell permit button The Installed cell permits dialog will open In the dialog window all installed cell permits together with Data Servers who provided the data and the permits expiration dates are listed Dataserver ID Cell name Expiration date GB100002 2012 12 31 GB100004 2012 12 31 GB100005 2012 12 31 Delete permit Figure 30 Installed cell permits dialog 3 Touninstall a permit select it in the list press the Delete permit button and confirm the operation The permit will be uninstalled 4 n case an error occurred during uninstalling permits the error message will be displayed in the Message log pane To apply a new SA certificate do the following 1 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Apply SA Certificate button The Ap
23. Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Waypoint identifiers listed in order with starting waypoint first for the identified route Two modes of transmission are provided c indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted w indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been reached FROM while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently heading for TO and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route S RTE sx x x a c c c c et Gc hbecB ngse Total number of messages being transmitted Message number e s Additional waypoint identifiers Waypoint n identifier gt WPL Waypoint location Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint S WPL llll ll a yyyyy yy a c c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt ERE NM NN mao Waypoint latitude N S amp j 5 5 S C E 3 yyyyy yy Waypoint longitude E W a Last update December 11 2012 189 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS APPENDIX C Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs Algorithm All measurements are assumed as corrected by systematic device errors device description table allow modification of this corrections All measurements are assumed as containing not correlated random errors Gaussian distribution
24. The settings take effect immediately after they have been set 5 7 Printing Charts The ECDIS provides the possibility to print the chart currently displayed on the screen out To print out the chart do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab and press the Print Chart button The Print preview window will open 2 To renew the chart image to be printed press the Renew Preview button The preview image will display the most recent changes in the chart view 3 To configure the properties of the print out pres the Printer Setup button The standard Print Setup window will open where you can configure the print properties 4 To print the chart out press the Print button The chart image displayed in the Print preview window will be printed out Figure 54 Print preview window Last update December 11 2012 55 Civ mAnINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 6 VOYAGE PREPARATION 6 1 Correcting the Chart The first step in preparing the voyage is making sure that your charts have all the latest updates applied to them You need to correct all applicable charts through the latest Notice to Mariners Local Notice to Mariners and Broadcast Notice to Mariners and ensure charts to be used are the correct edition The ECDIS provides two methods for correcting charts automatic updating and manual updating 6 1 1 Automatic Updating Using the Automatic Updating function you can automatically log on to
25. When the pointer changes to an arrow gt left click and the chart view will move To zoom the chart view in or out use the Chart Scale panel options or the mouse wheel if available With the CTRL key held down you can pan and zoom the chart view in the same way as when in the regular chart view mode to zoom out press and hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys simultaneously gt Inthe Route gt Route Planning tab the following operations with routes are available Edit To open a selected route in the route edit mode select the route in the routes list and press the Edit button Only one route may be edited at a time For more details see chapter 6 4 3 Route Edit Mode Delete To delete a selected route select the route in the routes list press the Delete button and confirm the operation If when editing a route you see that the route is colored red and one of waypoints is marked with a cross it means that the route legs are too close to each other and their deviation corridors XTD are overlapped too much 33 Waypoints are displayed in the chart view beginning with the 1 100 000 scale Last update December 11 2012 73 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Figure 78 Warning about too close route legs position If route legs are situated too close to each other it can cause problems for autopilot use the route legs cannot be checked for dangers and cautions Try to avoid plotting route legs too clo
26. the slider of the time scale Date and time in the Date field change as the slider is being moved To change the date and time to the current date and time value press the Today button 7 To see the weather forecast in dynamics use the animation buttons jump to the beginning of the forecast one step back set the step value in the Step drop down list start stop the forecast animation the forecast is played from the current position to the end one step forward jump to the end of the forecast 6 7 2 Display of Cyclones Tropical cyclones data that are distributed by the World Meteorological Organization are included as a separate weather product to the weather data distributed by Jeppesen IMPORTANT When navigating near a tropical cyclone update cyclone data regularly and study the information very carefully Weather forecast data received from the weather server are compiled for a certain period of time the period is indicated in the data request You can view the data for any time within this period 3 Weather parameters readings were made with a certain time step The time step for the forecast animation is set in the Step drop down list The set step may differ from the actual parameter readings step In this case weather data are interpolated in time To distinguish the interpolated time step from the original time step the font type of interpolated parameters will become italic in the
27. with the conditions and press Open The conditions will be loaded and displayed in the Weather Alarm Area panel To display alarm areas in the chart view do the following 1 Open the Weather Weather Presentation tab 2 Find the Alarm zone entry in the Meteo Parameter column and tick the checkbox to the left from the entry 6 7 6 Comparison of Routes Alarm areas can be used to compare two routes and select the one which is safer To compare routes do the following 1 Create two or more routes see chapter 6 4 Houte Planning and Plotting Display the routes in the chart view Download weather data for the region covering the routes It is important that the time period of the weather forecast cover the time scheduled for navigating along the routes Set alarm conditions in the Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab see chapter 6 7 5 Weather Alarm Area The routes will be colored depending on whether they go inside or outside the alarm areas In the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab in the time setup tool set the time scheduled for navigation along the route A symbol of the own ship will appear on the route in the position where the ship is supposed to be at the indicated time if there are several routes displayed in the chart view the symbol of the own ship will appear on all the routes Weather forecast parameters will be displayed for the indicated time The legs of the routes will be highlighted with red if
28. 2009 00 00 Sunday Go Today Meteo Parameters MES NN D Wind vectors Precipitation Swell waves Total waves LE wir fm 3 Weather Legend Temperature Lid Temperature value label in selected units Sin 45 2 9 8S8 879 OG Inotherms in selected units oe E R R 8 9 Y FEES K amp 85 9 NR V 882222 822 R E Legend gt gt Figure 126 Display of the temperature using the Contour type symbols e Symb point symbols Vector parameters such as wind are displayed using point symbols showing the parameter strength and direction Numeric parameters such as temperature are displayed using the X symbols plotted in the coordinates of the parameter readings Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Date 15 02 2009 00 00 Sunday Go Today Meteo Parameters Meteo Parameter Area Cont Symb Text Pressure Temperature Weather Precipitation Swell waves Total waves Em Weather Alarm Area Time Series Packages 87 01 664 N009 58 571 E 4 amp uex Weather I MW 4 9 Step 1o Weather Legend Mind knots Kn Lebel with wind speed and direction in form of spd dir r e REF eETY F E 0 60 w w 1 kn 10 0 135 20 25 3 5 O 4 i kn 5 10 15 20 25 3 35 40 45 55 Legend Figure 127 Display of the wind strength using the Symbol type symbols e Text point symbols Numeric values of parameters are plotted in the c
29. 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions 1 2 3 Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 2 3 4 Press the Send Request button A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx xml Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder The ECDIS will load the data automatically Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacente
30. Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 12 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 10 Maximum CPA NM 20 TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min Target Vectors _ Apply Parameters 1 163967 x6 1 SHIP 16 51 23 2009 01 28 65 45 775 N 031 12 489 W esoG 14 0 kn ecos 000 0 256 Unk Not for use with position device Figure 218 Speed change by the own ship to avoid collision 4 As the relative distance is decreasing the own ship speed vector length has to be adjusted in order to still be able to judge the collision risk and the potential evasive action The Figure 219 shows that the own ship speed vector length should be decreased below the present 12 minutes by using the Vector Length option oon Alarm ARPA Anti Collision Setup and Sonar Tool 1654 1651 1650 1527 15247 152 151 Own Input Units ship Output andTime v Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 12 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Maximum CPA NM TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min v Target Vectors Apply Parameters 1 133553 x7 5 Figure 219 Adjust the vector length Last update December 11 2012 SHIP 16 56 40 2009 01 28 65 47 508 N 031 12 489 W esos 20 0 ecos 000 0 NE XI NNNM Unk Not for use with position device 163 CNAvwARINED User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 5 The vector length is now decreased to 3 minutes and the OOW can still judge collision risk The collision danger
31. C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e From Low Water Time passed from the last low water event e Current Water Level Shows the water level of the specified Tidal object at the time set in the input time field 6 Detailed information about the tidal object is represented in the Graph High Low Water and Water Levels tabs e Graph Tidal height in meters depends on time and is graphically expressed on the diagram The diagram background consists of three color zones These zones graphically show night time dark grey twilights light grey and daytime white The red vertical line on the graph marks the time entered in the date time field In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram when you move the mouse pointer over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal heights are shown below allowing you to obtain detailed tidal information Graph High Low Water Water Levels TERN im TTT LEN ie 0 211 13 15 17 19 21 23 UTC 2009 10 03 01 51 Water Height 1 3m Figure 92 Tidal information graph e High Low Water Summary information about time and height of high and low water is given High Water Date Low Water Date 1 70m at 2009 1 0 20m at 2009 1 1 65m at 2009 1 0 19m at 2009 1 1 74m at 2009 1 0 19m at 2009 1 1 63m at 2009 1 0 18m at 2009 1 4 UU AAA 4 A Anu na nnn 4 Figure 93 Tidal information high low water schedule e Water Levels
32. Contact Jeppesen Marine and agree on the terms changes or the service termination The changes will be registered on the server 2 To activate the changes send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or in case of a local network from the server computer see chapters 6 1 1 Automatic Updating and 6 1 2 Semi automatic Updating In response the server sends updates for already licensed datasets if there are any and the dynamic licensing initialization answer where the action to be performed terms changes or service termination will be indicated 4 3 Installing New Version of the Database Cartographic data are likely to change often These changes are applied to databases in the form of updates Later the updates are included in the database as regular data and a new version of the database is issued These issues are made regularly and if you are a Jeppesen Marine customer you are provided with the new versions of the CM 93 3 chart database as soon as it is issued To install a new version of the database do the following 1 Open the Data Databases tab 13 You can only view charts of the collections you are subscribed to Last update December 11 2012 33 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 Connect the data storage device with the new version of the database to the system and press the Find databases button Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system All
33. December 11 2012 24 CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Data type type of data that should be synchronized can be Databases Updates Manual Updates Mariners Objects Routes Own Ship Configuration or Chart Data Manual indicates if the task was carried out automatically Manual No or manually Manual Yes Clear metadata indicates if synchronization metadata are to be deleted Yes or not No metadata are deleted if the number of failed attempts to carry out a task has reached ten Echo Sounder Navi Synchronization e n x Diagram Calculator Monitor Computer Info Synchronization Status Computer name N A Synchronization status Stopped Computer role N A Current state Stopped no synchronization is available Synchronization log log Tasks to perform Failed tasks Clearlog Sync OFF Figure 16 Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab Tasks to perform tab e Failed tasks the list of failed synchronization tasks tasks are moved from the Failed tasks table back to the Tasks to perform table after 3 minutes with the number of attempts increased by one after the number of attempts to perform the task reached 5 the task metadata are cleared and the number of attempts is set to zero the task completion tries are continued The Failed tasks table has the following fields Target computer the name of the target computer only computer with the indicated name is sent synchro
34. Figure 80 Route Parameters window not set waypoint symbols are not displayed Default Settings tab Show Speed turns on the display of speed on the leg values in the chart view Show Bearing turns on the display of bearing on the leg values in the chart view Show Named WP only Schedule if the checkbox is set only waypoints that have names are displayed in the Schedule table This allows displaying waypoints that are especially important for the timetable Change settings of several waypoints to change settings of several waypoints at one go press the Parameters button the Route Parameters window will open Switch to the Change Settings tab set the waypoints between which route parameters will be changed set necessary parameters and press the Apply button for the changes to take effect The following route parameters are available in the tab Last update December 11 2012 75 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS From WP To WP in the From WP and To WP drop down lists set the range of waypoints between which route parameters will be changed Change Settings Default Settings SPD kn speed on the leg used by the From WP 1 jo Towe 11 all ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from SPD kn one waypoint to the next one in knots Xp XTD NM allowable deviation from the track RAD NM along the leg from one waypoint to the next in Great Circle nautica
35. Heading Up Route Up Iv True scale ship image Figure 161 Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position Source section 3 You can also set heading sources in the Position Heading and Data sources panel To open the panel left click on the Position Source indicator Open the Heading sources tab This tab is the same as the Heading sources tab in the Navi gt Navigation Data and all actions in one are immediately repeated in the other Last update December 11 2012 124 C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 2000 x50 SHIP 20 11 43 2009 09 11 N Position Heading Data a ae 36 16 636 N sources sources sources AUTO 000 08 253 E esoc 10 0 kn oa 315 0 ME L E Tac MRNA 325 0 Primary heading source Secondary heading source 8 0 kn Kurs 5951 WGS 84 Data not assessed Figure 162 Heading sources tab 4 In case the device you want to set as a primary heading source is already set so there is no need to change anything If this device is not set as a primary position source select it in the Secondary heading source drop down list of available devices and press the Swap heading sources button The name of the primary heading source is displayed in the heading line of the Navigational panel 5 To set a device as a secondary heading source just select it in the Secondary heading source drop down list in the Heading sources tab 6 In case the primary heading sourc
36. Media name UKHO BASE MEDIA 1 of 1 dated 20 NOV 2007 Media contents Ovendew General and Coastal Media location HAS Eag Data Exchange Medias Test Bb MO TXOT Media name UKHO BASE MEDIA dated Q6 JUNE 2007 Media contents Test Base Cell Install Media location Hi 5 63 8 Data Exchange Medias Test Bc BASE MEDIAS MO2XQ2 Media name UKHO Week 37 07 UPDATE MEDIA 1 of 1 dated 13 SEPT 2007 Media contents Test ENC Updating Media location H 8 53 8 Data Exchange Medias Test Ec UPDATE MEDIA MO 1X0 15 Media name UKHO Week 38 07 UPDATE MEDIA 1 af 1 dated 23 NOV 2007 Media contents Test ENC Updating Media location H5 5 83 8 Data Exchange Media Test Bd UPDATE MEDIA MO 1x01 This Media contains Base Exchange Sets which are not imported to the system Exchange set ID Base Exchange Set 1 Overview Cella Issue date of exchange set on media 2007 11 20 Iesus date af exchange set which already Installed Not installed oL eR Lo MERE Figure 33 Install Media window To convert a media to the CM93v3 format select it in the media list and press the Install Media button A CM93v3 database with the specified name see step 2 will be compiled or updated For details on the conversion process see chapter 4 5 3 Import S 57 to CM93v3 To close the Install Media window press the Close button 15 The check of the validity of the SA signature against each ENC signature is done automatically when the ENC data are being
37. Meteo Parameters window 4 The dangerous zone is a 50 mile zone near the current cyclone position and the zones around the forecasted cyclone positions 100 mile zone for a 24 hour forecast 150 mile zone for a 48 hour forecast 200 mile zone for a 72 hour forecast and 250 mile zone for a 96 and more hour forecast Last update December 11 2012 104 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To display cyclones data do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab and press the Cyclones button sn or set the Tropical cyclone checkbox in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab 2 The ECDIS will load the last loaded cyclones file If there was no cyclone files opened or you need to open a different file use the Open Cyclones button press the button select the cyclones file in the Open dialog and press the Open button The cyclones data will be loaded to the ECDIS and displayed in the chart view mm ETROICONINNEUESIN o 077300 eee ds No of qe 1 13438377 xL5 SHIP 18 03 44 2009 10 09 Silent mode 2 36 09 679 N 005 25 220 W esos 10 0 m ecos 000 0 k 000 0 Kus STW 8 0m DPT 5 0m below trans Wind 12 1kn 197 0 Disp ROT 0 0 W 5 WGS 84 Not for use with position device Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather 4 8 a 4 Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages 4 P DI Step 3 Hours Weather Legend Meteo Parameter
38. ORERE 10 SCANS SUAS M 9 source SCANS eistacm mtm sei on enn e Enna E EEEn 9 n EEE tea nd eet A E EE E 11 PAIN NIS E TAE EO AA m M 12 indicators panel eeesesssesseeseeoeeeeeesssssssssseeterreesssssssssseeeeeeee 8 ipit ontput de VICES semestud ice Ms rbe oue ER td b Ee ede PER ERR 16 CVC c MEN NER TT 16 NS Ea e M 18 edit dy O m 17 monitor serial Hines oa tao ro Foret e Uo eb Losada Vote 18 inspect ship position eeeesssssesssseeeeeeeee enne 110 itista ATA DASE ueesecs socesooi bt bun pum rep prioner dinear eod ro 28 instruments position s sccue sue aede eee Fes sb ae Eua ou su Eu DEO ve ne e ibdaicn 19 interface Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS chart scale and quick access buttons panel 12 functional buttons menu eeseeeeee 13 functional panels 22i ie ei ioa toer a Dub daresaveceeradinens 13 TE VG NN ER o m 15 IIdICHlOrs Dalee siena o don ci tcerioa tire pires Fa pco reb EON latins 8 man dicio T a 8 on screen keyboard iiie reete ront anoo orte eatenus 14 inverse geodetic ProbleM cc seseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 175 latge media SUP POT sess ceowsnssurionaniccunapinebarbysdvedanvinsautionatecbebedsuel 37 licenses OREL TELE TONER ETE 32 expired Del OE esce 31 T stall Trom Tesien E 31 list of installed BeetlseS8 eee tende pmo ee npn sucer nte 3 m
39. Past track checkbox The passed track is removed from the display but is not deleted To display the hidden passed track again check the Past track checkbox 5 To delete the old passed track and start drawing the new passed track check the Past track checkbox and press the Reset button The old passed track will be deleted and the new one will start to be drawn 6 To delete the passed track and stop drawing the passed track altogether clear the Past track checkbox and press the Reset button The old passed track will be deleted Last update December 11 2012 114 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS T 10 To display the own ship symbol using the secondary position source do You can also display the own ship secondary passed track the track based on positioning data from the secondary positioning device Settings for the secondary passed track are presented in the Secondary past track section and are the same as the settings for the primary position source passed track To turn on the display of time labels on the own ship passed track check the Time labels checkbox in the Past track section To turn the display of time labels off clear the Time labels checkbox Time labels are displayed with the step the same as the own ship vector length In the Own ship vector section you can configure properties of the ship velocity vectors To predict the ship position over a period of time three vectors are used e Ground
40. Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization lt y q e x Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Stop Radar Clutters Orientation Adjustment i 0 0 ims Lm wu Radar 1 Radar 2 ee image position Diagram Monitor Tapeta Radar Ranges 19 X 4 m b Radar Pulse Short Pulse Se ie QUE ra Cea Radar Diagnostics VIDEO TRIGGER BEARING HEADING Figure 197 Info gt Radar Image tab The option has been implemented to select an image from one of the two radars registered with the system 2 To select a radar click the Radar 1 Radar 2 button 3 To start reading radar signal press the Start Radar button when pressed the name is Stop Radar 4 To turn the display of the radar image on or off use the Hide radar image checkbox it works in the same way as the Radar indicator described above To hide the radar image check the checkbox to display the radar image clear the checkbox 5 To turn on the display of a special symbol indicating the position of the radar on board the own ship check the Show position checkbox The radar position is set in the Config gt Own Ship gt Radar tab Set a radar range select a value in the Radar Ranges list In the informational Radar Pulse section the radar pulse duration is displayed To set values of different clutters to optimize the radar picture use options from the Clutters section the Sea the Rain and the Gain clutters When setting values to cl
41. VV IURE UT 23 system check up Laoreet diia tosta cobre a Ie ko HER sts dU Ip Edw EHE ao V RES 21 system information cchddscacsewesseduvadsnecsesdsecseanadonsdesasendeandaces 22 system setup Cui CT 21 color differentiation test sess 22 POT MAO r AE E E AT Ze measurement units cesses nennen nennen 20 EI osse E ERI ON E A SUUM COPRE I LOEO 20 updating SoftWare Lou uoce eyes cepi qe rr YA Sp asa d FI Ea ae oo CR Mi obs 23 user interface laNQuage ecccccccccccccccceesssssseeseeeeceeeeeeees 21 VO NER T T 21 system warnings indicator ccseeeccccceccceeeeeeeeeseeseseeseeees 12 termimatine ECDIS 8 BR Se WTO AE E m 53 tidal Stteamms iiiiiieei esie enero anat eaa aaa eaa aea e ya a napa a ae aad pag asa rana 82 duc oe gtd E EEE E E E E 81 e SE uea giaticacedledtnatcbuidenanocen tran itiedds aa Me DEUM RU 21 BS MONO sarees Pivot dette emus irat SD m ene IESU stones 129 types of mariner OD IS sse rebos rte betbe IE tre rt cab dB ord retra ut dudas 62 updating charts DX CEBIT oats a bedeni opea bdo nea ie Deeobabas dic iui dents 56 M MY 57 itc IE P E 58 Mariner objects esssssssss See mariner objects Over Ta CE Dose tedio ieduova Vd e aH FREUE DEA a EESE 56 A c 5d updating ECDIS software eessssssesseeeeeeeennn 23 user inte
42. Weather Download Request window Save the file to any location on your computer and send it as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive a response e mail with weather package files attached to it Save the files to any location on your computer To load the weather package files use the Import JWP function in the Weather Packages panel After you set the Internet connection up you can test it Testing the connection allows you to see if you have set it correctly Testing procedure involves two operations sending data to the server and receiving data from the server To test the connection with the weather server do the following 1 2 3 To start testing go to the Weather gt Weather Packages panel press the Settings button and select the Test Connection option from the drop down menu The Test Connection window will open Mi Test Connection X Send data Testing Receive data Waiting Figure 122 Test Connection window Press the Test connection button Testing operations status is displayed in the Send data and Receive data fields Operation statuses can be the following e N A no test was started e Waiting testing of the operation has not started yet e Testing testing of the operation is being performed at the moment e Error error description an error occurred during testing of the operation the error description is given in brackets e Passed the operation w
43. and Import S57 Opens the Config functional panel holding the following tabs System Alarm Setup AIS Targets Anti Collision Tool Own ship Input Output and Units and Time Opens the Weather functional panel holding the following tabs Weather Presentation Easy Mode Weather Presentation Weather Alarm Area Weather Time Series and Weather Packages 2 6 Functional Panels Functional panels hold tools used to setup and execute main ECDIS functions To open a functional panel use a button from the Functional Buttons Menu To close a panel outpress its button in the Functional Buttons Menu or use the Close Panel button Each panel may contain several tabs and sub tabs Each panel also has a set of buttons with general functions Last update December 11 2012 13 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Clear Highlight removes highlighting from the chart view Highlighting made by any function can be removed from the chart view using the general Clear Highlight button Restore Down restores the functional panel to its default size To resize a panel move the mouse pointer to the upper border of the panel and when it changes to the resize pointer E drag the panel up Auto Hide pins the panel down If the panel is not pinned down it is reduced so that to display only its tabs names after the mouse pointer is removed from the panel To pin the panel down press the Auto Hide button When the pin on
44. another vessel to the user specified distance and time see chapter 8 5 4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits e To indicate the possibility of collision see chapter 8 5 5 Indication of Collision Risk 8 5 1 Theoretical Principles of the Anti collision Display Consider a collision scenario between own ship and an external target The vessels encounter geometry is plotted in Figure 198 The OOW can easily verify that the vessels have a potential point of collision PPC from visual observation i e aspect angle to target is unchanged or from radar observation i e relative motion of target echo towards the centre of own ship Fa a M li A EM eo PPC e s r M ts F N i Pl ri hk F E p F k a i E gn zi 3 zi zi a d Ln xi LT F 24 r Own Ship Target Figure 198 Example of encounter geometry for own ship and a target on collision course It is easy to see graphically that the PPC can be moved along the predicted track line of target if own ship changes course to starboard and simultaneously increase speed Figure 199 PPC PPC PPC Own Ship Target Figure 199 Movement of PPC due to change of own ship course and speed Last update December 11 2012 150 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The vessels encounter geometry in different collision scenarios shows that a line displa
45. be displayed in the two modes not for all tidal streams This option depends on the data for each tidal stream stored in the database In case it is impossible to define ebb and flood states for a tidal stream the graph can only be displayed in one mode and the Direct Changes button will not be displayed in the graph area at all Last update December 11 2012 84 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 If a tidal or a tidal stream station is currently selected astronomical information is presented for coordinates of the selected station and the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude fields For calculating the local time if this time type is selected in the drop down list at the bottom of the time and coordinates pane the time zone of the selected station is used the time zone is displayed in the Time Zone field The Latitude Longitude and Time Zone fields are grayed and you can only change date and time 3 f no tidal or tidal stream station is currently selected astronomical information is presented for coordinates of the current chart view center the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude fields For calculating the local time if this time type is selected in the drop down list at the bottom of the time and coordinates pane select the time zone in the Time Zone drop down list 4 Using date and time tool set the date and time you need astronomical data for The Reset Time button
46. by verification of a next dataset are displayed in the Errors Report window You can do the following To continue conversion of the dataset press the Continue button To cancel conversion of the dataset and go on with converting the next dataset and creating the CM93v3 database press the Skip button To cancel conversion of all datasets altogether and stop creating the CM93v3 database press the Stop button Last update December 11 2012 38 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS b At the second stage S 57 data are converted to datasets of the CM93v3 database If there is no database with the name entered to the Database Name field a new CM93v3 database is created during the conversion process if there is a database with such name you can select it from the Database Names drop down list data of this database are overwritten by the new data At the termination of the conversion process the message Database was created successfully is displayed To view the log of all errors occurred during the data conversion press the Show log button in the Data Import S57 tab The S57 conversion error log window will open where you can view all the errors The new CM93v3 database is saved to a predefined location and is registered in the ECDIS automatically 4 5 4 Updating Imported S 57 Data To update a database created by conversion of S 57 data to CM93v3 data do the following 1 2 3 Connect the d
47. calculated or received from various positioning devices e Tidal stream or current vector a point object indicating a predicted or actual tidal stream or current vector with effective time and strength In the table below geometry types attribute sets and categories of mariners objects are described owes rem Type and Presentation EN ind Information Scale maximum undefined Clearing line Scale minimum NMT not more than Category of clearing NLT not less than line Information Danger highlight ocale maximum Scale minimum Information Object name Scale maximum Scale minimum Local time User s remark Information Object name Scale maximum Scale minimum Local time User s remark Last update December 11 2012 63 Gia vA FINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Information Scale maximum Scale minimum undefined Mariner s note Category of information mariner s note caution Local time User s remark Information Object name Manufacturer s ror Scale maximum feature AN Scale minimum Local time User s remark undefined dead reckoning estimated Scale minimum visual astronomical Input identifier Radar Decca GPS Glonass Local time Loran Tchaika Position finding MFDF Omega method Transit Tsikada dGPS dGlonass dOmega dLoran dDecca Orientation Scale minimum Tidal stream or 5 Category of current current vector and tidal stream Current strength Local time und
48. cell permits Apply SA Certificate S57 source data Processing Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Licensing ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d UPDATE 1 Turn off the errors report ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d BASE ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d BASE V ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d BASE lV ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c UPDATE ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c BASE M ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c BASE ii 4 b Find databases Figure 34 Data gt Import S57 tab detected S 57 exchange sets displayed in the S57 source data pane 3 In the Database Name field enter the name of the database that will be created during the conversion process 4 Select an S 57 exchange set to be converted in the S 57 source data pane and press the Convert button The data conversion process will start The process is performed in two stages a Atthe first stage verification of S 57 data is performed Errors found during the verification process are recorded to a LOG file If any critical errors are found the conversion process is cancelled You can turn off the display of error messages To do so check the Turn off the errors report checkbox To turn the error messages display on clear the Turn off the errors report checkbox If the error messages display is on the errors found
49. change of course by the own ship to avoid collision CPA is close to the set CPA Limit 10 It is important to maintain the evasive maneuver until the target has been passed the TCPA value in the Info gt Targets gt ARPA Targets tab is unreachable f No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 SHIP 17 06 10 2009 01 28 65 50 343 N 031 10 752 W esoG 20 0 ecos 048 0 Alarm ARPA Anti Collision Input Units d ance ard PIE E an Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 1 Maximum CPA NM 20 TCPA Limit min Figure 225 Evasive action is maintained until TCPA is unavailable Last update December 11 2012 166 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 11 When the relative distance to the target is equal to or less than the CPA limit the collision danger sector disappears and the collision danger line only is displayed 1 66776 x15 h No official data available Refer to paper chart Alarm ARPA Anti Collision Own Input Units System Setup andSonar Tool ship Output andTime Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min mp Radius of CPA limit circle NM 10 Maximum CPA NM TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min v Target Vectors Apply Parameters SHIP 17 06 26 2009 01 28 65 50 402 N 031 10 591 W esos 20 0 kn ecos 048 0 Not for use with position device Figure 226 The distance to target is equal or less than the CPA lim
50. chart view IMPORTANT For the ECDIS to be able to receive ARPA data ARPA should be registered in the ECDIS The registration is carried out in the Config gt Input Output tab 8 3 1 ARPA Targets Data When ARPA equipment is connected and configured in the Config gt Input Output tab ARPA targets can be monitored in the ECDIS Target information can be viewed in the Info gt Targets tab The ARPA Targets tab displays information about targets located and monitored with ARPA Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor ARPA targets 1 Target number 1 COG 270 0 T SOG 17 0 mi h Status Tracked Name 2001 CPA TCPA 20 48 NM 1h 28m 16s COG 270 0 T SOG 17 0 mi h Status Tracked Lat Lon 00 42 055 N000 05 681 E COG SOG 270 0 T 17 0 mi h Status Tracked Range Bearing 42 100 NM 007 8 Acknowledge Acknowledge All Figure 195 Info gt Targets tab ARPA Targets tab To view a target information select the target in the targets list gt Inthe ARPA Targets tab the following target information is displayed e Target number Target number e Name Target name e CPA Closest point of approach e TCPA Time to closest point of approach e Lat Lon The latitude and longitude of the target e COG Course over ground e SOG Speed over ground e Status Status of the target lost tracking
51. converted to the CM93v3 format 16 To be able to convert a media to the CM93v3 format permits for the media must be installed in the system Last update December 11 2012 37 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 4 5 3 Import S 57 to CM93v3 The ECDIS provides the possibility to import data from the S 57 format to the CM93v3 format This function can be accessed from the Data gt Import S57 tab In case the S 57 data are protected using IHO data protection scheme S 63 cells permits should be installed before starting conversion of the data to the CM93v3 format IMPORTANT The S 57 Import functional module needs separate licensing For details on installing licenses see chapter 4 4 Licensing Software Modules S 57 data are available to the users as exchange sets containing datasets updates pictures textual descriptions and a catalog file with the description of the exchange set To import S 57 data to the CM93v3 data do the following 1 Connect the data storage device with the S 57 data to your system and open the Data gt Import S57 tab 2 Press the Find databases button The ECDIS will search for S 57 data on all removable data storage devices connected to the system All detected S 57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S 57 source data pane Dynamic Auto Import 4 m ilex Licensing Databases Updating S57 Database Name Test bs Convert Install Media Copyuserpermit Apply S63
52. do the following 1 Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Great Circle tab Echo Sounder AIS RN Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization 4 amp M x Diagram Monitor E image Info Info Info info Calculator Monitor Distance Bearing Great Circle Datum Transformation Show Clear All C O 00 00 000 S 000 00 000 Start Point 00 22 903 N 000 44 420 Step 50 000 NM N 00 00 000 00 45 803 N 001 28 843 01 08 695 N 002 13 275 Ortodromia Points 000 00 000 01 31575 N002 57 718 AM 01 54 439 N 003 42 177 Cad rotat 02 17 285 N 004 26 656 N 10 00 000 02 40 107 N 005 11 157 E020 00000 03 02 902 N 005 55 687 osculis 03 25 665 N 006 40 247 03 48 394 N n07 4 saa Figure 240 Info gt Navi Calculator panel Great Circle tab for the great circle calculations N Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections To show the line connecting the positions with the specified coordinates in the chart view press the Show button 3 Select a measurement unit for the step distance nautical miles statute miles or kilometers in the drop down list near the Step field p Enter the distance value of the step in the Step field e Press the Ortodromia Points button Coordinates of the great circle points will be displayed as a list of coordinates in the special list area 6 To clear the calc
53. edit the route schedule To switch to the route edit mode in the Route gt Route Planning tab select a route in the routes list and press the Edit button The route will be loaded and opened in the route edit mode Start Route Route Export t Ilex Save As Show Voyage Planning Finder Import Sawe Es ALGER ARZEW ALG ER Algeri a ARZEW AI geria Print Route Charts Check Route Parameters WPT CP Schedule Dangers Cautions Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m RAD NM XTD NM SPD k RL DIST NM BWW 36 46 730 N 003 04 252 E 0 6 1223 ALGER Algeria 36 46 409 N 003 04 887 E 0 3 0919 36 46 399 N 003 05 256 E 2 7 026 0 36 48 893 N 003 06 775 E 180 4 23 293 6 36 49 802 N 003 04 181 E 2 8 296 1 Figure 79 Route gt Route Planning tab route edit mode gt Inthe route edit mode the following operations with the route are available Edit route plan changes the WPT table see chapter 6 4 4 Route Plan Add control points add entries to the CP table see chapter 6 4 5 Adding Critical Points Edit route schedule change the Schedule table see chapter 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule Save changes to save all changes introduced to the route press the Save button Once the route has been saved the ECDIS switches the route edit mode off and the standard Route
54. etc e Range Distance from the own ship to the target e Bearing Bearing to the target from own ship e rue Relative Indicates if the target heading vector is true or relative If the vector is measured in relation to the North direction it is true and if it is measured in relation to the own ship course it is relative New feature in 5 0 84 program version Last update December 11 2012 146 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To scroll the chart view so that to display a target in the chart view center double click on a target entry When the distance between an ARPA target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous approach set in the Config gt Targets tab the target is assigned the dangerous target status and changes its style it becomes red and starts flashing To stop the target flashing select it in the targets table in the Info gt Targets tab and press the Acknowledge button The target will still have the dangerous target style but will cease flashing To acknowledge all dangerous targets press the Acknowledge all button 8 3 2 ARPA Targets Display To turn the display of ARPA targets on or off left click on the ARPA indicator If the display of ARPA targets is off the ARPA indicator is orange __ARPA Ji if the display of ARPA targets is on the ARPA indicator is green EEN To configure the display of ARPA targets and tracks do the following 1 Open the Config gt
55. for box is only active for Historical Weather function and the Download at box is only active for the Scheduled Download function 12 To reset the Easy Mode data request to the default settings press the Reset button 13 To save the data request for the use press the OK button The Easy Mode request configuration will be saved The request is used each time you download data using the Easy Mode download option 6 6 3 Overview and Coastal Download The Overview and Coastal download options are preset options The Overview download option only allows downloading the Global ECMWF 150 km weather model the European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 150 km grid and Tropical Cyclones data The Coastal download option only allows downloading the Global ECMWF 50 km weather model the European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 50 km grid and Tropical Cyclones data To download weather data using the Overview or Coastal download options do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Press the arrow near the button to open the download options menu Select the Overview or Coastal option The Weather Download Request dialog will open Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Weather Weather Weath
56. generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder The ECDIS will load the data automatically Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 2 3 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive data files in the response e mail Save the files to any location on your computer Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling 6 6 5 Scheduled Download If you would like to receive e mails with weather package files at a given ti
57. gt Route Planning panel opens Last update December 11 2012 74 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Save route under a different name to save the route under a different name press the Save as button enter the name in the Save Route as dialog and press the OK button The route with the latest changes will be saved as a new route The old route will remain in the routes list View the route in the chart view to view the route in the chart view press the Show button The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to display the whole route in the chart view Print the route plan the WPT table out to print the route plan out press the Print Route button The WPT table will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print View charts covering the route to view charts that cover the route press the Charts button Charts covering the whole selected route will be highlighted in the chart view Check the route for dangers to check the route for dangers press the Check Route button The whole route is checked leg by leg and all found dangers and cautions are listed in the Dangers and Cautions tabs The tabs are created inside the Route Planning panel and organized in the same way as the Object Info panel Also all legs are marked with colors These co
58. i 251 040 Pointon Chart c m Pressure Ee L1 MI stone Tener pe Ll vi mus ce len ta ff EE K Y1 Precipitation Ronan suo cane Pee em Dew point i O BEIM Export E Cloud cover Figure 134 Weather gt Weather Time Series tab time series for a route 7 To export weather data for the route to a csv file press the Export button indicate the name of the file and the folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog and press the Save button 8 To print the graph press the Print button the graph will be automatically saved to a jpg file and opened with your default image processing program Print the graph out using the printing functionality of the program 6 7 5 Weather Alarm Area In the Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab you can set alarm thresholds for weather forecast parameters and the ECDIS will display areas where values of parameters exceed the set thresholds as alarm areas on the chart To set a weather alarm condition do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab and press the Add condition button to create a new line in the alarms table 2 Double click in the Met Parameter field to open the drop down list with weather parameters Select a parameter from the drop down list Value from Add condition Delete condition Moveup Move down Delete All Data was edited by user Figure 135 Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab
59. is the length of the vessel as measured from the bow ending of the waterline to the stern ending Width Beam the widest width of the vessel meters Draft Draft of the vessel meters Load Displacement Displacement of the vessel tons e Additional parameters section Angle of vanishing stability Sets angle of vanishing stability AVS of the vessel degrees AVS is the angle the boat can heel and still right itself Waterline area coefficient Waterline area coefficient non dimensional quantity Effective waterline area Effective waterline area square meters Transverse metacentric height Transverse metacentric height of the vessel meters Transverse metacentric height is the vertical separation of the center of gravity and the transverse metacenter 3 Check the Enable ship response calculation checkbox so that the Danger zone was calculated and displayed in the Inspect Ship Position panel 4 Check the Show alarm of resonance condition checkbox to enable the alarm in case a resonance condition occurs during navigation along the route 5 You can save a set of parameters to a file in order to use them later To save parameters press the Save button in the Save as dialog indicate the location and name of the file and press Save The set of ship response parameters will be saved to an xm1 file 6 To load previously saved sets of parameters press the Load button in the Open dialog select the file w
60. it is widely used in marine terrestrial navigation and location based services Uses stationary satellites or a surface signal to locate the ship with a very high degree of accuracy The term GPS is frequently used to refer to GPS receivers GPS See Global Positioning System Great Circle A Great Circle is the shortest distance between two points on a spheroid A great circle is formed at the edge of a plane crossing through the center of a sphere Unlike Rhumb Lines great circles generally do not have constant bearing the equator and the meridians are prominent exceptions Greenwich Meridian See Prime Meridian GRIB Gridded Binary A general purpose bit oriented data exchange format GRIB is an efficient vehicle for transmitting large volumes of gridded data over high speed telecommunication lines using modern protocols GRIB weather communicates large weather data files efficiently Heading The direction the ship is oriented High Water HW The maximum height reached by a rising tide Higher High Water HHW The highest of the high water or single high water of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Mood and the Sun Higher Low Water HLW The highest of the low water of any specified tidal day do to the declinational effects of the Moon and the Sun International Hydrographic Organization IHO An organization that provides the specifications for what qualifies as an ECDIS
61. map no You will receive data files in the response e mail Save the files to any location on your computer Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling To setup the Easy Mode option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages panel 2 Press the Settings button and select the Setup Easy Mode option from the drop down menu The Weather Download Request dialog will open In the request dialog you can add a product to the request set the product parameters remove a product from the request set a geographic area for which a forecast is required set the period for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings Gi Weather Download Request Ea EH Global ECMWF 150 km EH Tropical Cyclones Forecast For 45 nex 2008 Download at 14 36 Total 19kb Reset OK Cancel Figure 105 Weather Download Request dialog Easy Mode S
62. object To edit a mariner object do the following 1 w N 5 Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and select an object in the objects list You can also select the object directly in the chart view make sure that the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab is open find the object in the chart view and right click on it The object will be highlighted and marked with an arrow symbol To clear the highlight press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel Press the Edit button to switch to the mariner objects edit mode and to open the object editing tab Change the object attributes and position using the same operations as when creating an object see above To save the changes press the Save button To cancel changes outpress the Edit button and say no to saving the changes To delete an object select it press the Delete button and confirm the operation 6 2 2 Export Import of Mariner Objects Mariner objects are mainly intended for the use of the mariner However they can be exported to an external file that can be used for various purposes Exported objects are written to a file with the DAT extension Mariner objects can also be imported to the ECDIS To export a mariner object do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and press the Export Import button to switch to the export import mode Selected Objects Clearing line Mariners Note Event
63. of navigation related information on shipborne navigational displays General requirements methods of testing and required test results e IEC 61174 ed 3 2008 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Electronic chart display and information system ECDIS Operational and performance requirements methods of testing and required test results e IHO S 52 ed 6 0 Presentation Library v 3 4 Specifications for chart content and display aspects of ECDIS e IHO S 57 ed 3 1 2 2000 2014 IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data e IHO S 63 ed 1 1 1 2012 IHO data protection scheme e ITU R 1371 1 Technical characteristics for an automatic identification system using time division multiple access in the VHF maritime mobile band Last update December 11 2012 6 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e MSC 192 2004 Adoption of the revised performance standards for radar equipmentto 1 4 New Feature Highlights As compared to the previous version of the program of 5 0 83 the following new functionalities have been implemented with the 5 0 84 version Table 1 Table 1 New features in 5 0 84 version Extended time range for display of weather data Weather Time Series on page 106 Image overlay supported of data from two independent radars Radar Image Overlay on page 148 Extra functionalities for AIS target monitoring including safety issues in particular Mee
64. only used as a reference and in no way can the data be used to navigate near the ice border or in the ice covered waters Ice concentration and ice coverage data are displayed in the chart view in accordance with the standards of the WMO To display ice situation data do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab and tick the Ice concentration checkbox in the Meteo Parameters table The data will be displayed in the chart view Last update December 11 2012 105 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Non standard ae i5 used i ut _ Silent mode MM Ae 2 38 10 307 N ee 005 25 220 W acoc 00 0 HDG asw 8 DPT Wind 12 1kn 197 0 ROT 00 W 18 WGS 84 Hat for use with position device Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather iz q x Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 08 10 2009 12005 Thu Go Today T77 Mi 4l i Lu Step 3o Weather Legend lee concentration value label ice concentration contours Figure 132 Weather Weather Presentation tab display of the ice situation 2 The ice situation data received from satellites during one day are compiled into one time period and provided for the download from the Jeppesen Marine weather server only the next day That is why the date and time in the Data field are set automatically to 12 a m of the previous day and cannot be changed 6 7 4 Weather Time Series I
65. request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer Last update December 11 2012 95 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive data files in the response e mail 4 Save the files to any location on your computer 5 Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button 6 In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling 8 If you want to stop receiving scheduled weather data press the Delete all scheduled button in the Weather Data Request dialog for Scheduled download Take into account that you cannot cancel one or several scheduled requests You can only cancel all of the requests 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling Each time you order a weather forecast the request of the forecast is listed in the Weather gt Weather Packages tab In the tab you can see the progress of the request processin
66. response e mail save the file to the Receive folder The ECDIS will load the subscription automatically e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the Request Subscription button Save the generated subscription file to any location on your computer Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx xml Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive the subscription in the response e mail Save the subscription to any location on your computer Download the subscription to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling To view weather subscription do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Subscription option from the drop down menu 2 The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there
67. see the data make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather data When the display of weather data is on values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view To configure the display of weather data do the following Last update December 11 2012 101 C NAVMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 Open the Weather Weather Presentation tab Using options from this tab you can turn on off the display of weather parameters select the type of weather symbols point line area select measurement units that will be used to display weather parameters set the time for the display of the weather forecast and turn on off animation of the weather forecast Y Temperature Temperature in Celsius Wind vectors Speed in knots Precipitation Precipitation in millimeters Swell waves Height in meters Total waves Height in meters Legend lt lt Figure 123 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab To turn on the display of a specified weather parameter in the chart view tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name in the Meteo Parameter column of the Meteo Parameters table To turn the display of the parameter off clear the checkbox You can also use options presented in the Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab to turn the display of weather parameters on off To do so open the Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab and press
68. signature check is available for the selected database Figure 20 Signature 4 To check the database signature press the Check signature button The check IN progress signature check progress is displayed in the Signature check progress dialog dialog To cancel the procedure press the Abort button Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results appears 5 To install the database select the database in the Available databases pane and press the Register database button the database is copied to a pre defined location on the system hard disk and registered automatically The database is added to the Registered DB list 6 The following operations can be carried out with registered databases integrity check signature check and unregistering e To check the integrity of a registered database if available select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Check integrity button the button becomes active if integrity check is available for the database Upon the termination of the integrity check a message with the information on the check results appears e o check the signature of a database select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Check signature button the button becomes active if the signature check is available for the selected database The signature check may help identify problems with the data authenticity and integrity In case an
69. stabilized vector vector based on SOG speed over ground and COG course over ground values the black dotted line with one minute graduation marks and a double arrow end To display this vector check the Ground stabilized vector checkbox e Water stabilized vector vector based on STW speed through water and HDG heading values the black dotted line with no graduation marks and a single arrow end To display this vector check the Water stabilized vector checkbox e Prediction vector vector based on STW HDG and ROT rate of turn values the red line with a single arrow end To display this vector check the Prediction vector checkbox Figure 143 Velocity vectors To set the time period for the ship position prediction select a value from the Vector length drop down list e g if it is set to 6 minutes the vector length will show how far the vessel will get in 6 minutes with the current speed To be able to evaluate the ability of the own ship to pass a narrow place through a lock under a bridge etc the Sight lines function is used The Sight lines function turns on the display of the passage corridor of the own ship You can see the passage corridor at the chart scale at which the own ship symbol is shown as a scaled area symbol and larger If the own ship symbol is shown as a point symbol the ship passage corridor is not displayed The width of the passage corridor depends on the course over the ground
70. the Chart Chart Presentation tab e Shallow pattern The depth are from the coast line to the safety contour is filled with a dedicated pattern e Safe contour only Turns off the display of all depth contours except for the safety contour Used for hiding depth contours especially in areas with complex relief to reduce cluttering The contours values are used to highlight four depth areas To limit the highlighted areas to only two areas set the Two shades property in the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Depth settings tab In this case safe and unsafe waters are distinguished on the display Last update December 11 2012 52 i NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Safe depths Turns on the display of soundings which are deeper than the safety depth set in the Contours section of the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab In S 52 presentation unsafe soundings are black and safe soundings are grey In C Map presentation there is no difference in appearance of the safe and unsafe soundings Isolated dangers in unsafe waters Isolated dangers in unsafe waters are marked with a dedicated hazard symbol Plain depth contour Turns off the display of depth contours labels 3 The settings take effect immediately after they have been set 5 6 6 Text Settings Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the overloading One of them is selective dis
71. the Jeppesen Marine Update Server over the Internet and download updates for the currently installed database An updates log of all chart corrections is maintained The Automatic Updating requires the system to be logged on to the Internet over any communication channel To download chart updates over the Internet and to automatically register them do the following 1 Open the Data gt Auto Updating tab and press the Auto Updating button The Auto Updating pane will open Dynamic p e ases Auto Import 4 tm Ilex Licensing Updating S57 Dads a oi Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Licensing Auto Updating SemiAuto Download updates Get size Cancel Updating Updating Log Processing Review Updates S Figure 55 Data gt Auto Updating tab Automatic Updating function 2 Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop down list If only one database is in view the Databases drop down list is not displayed in the Data gt Auto Updating tab 3 Press the Download updates button to start downloading updates You can monitor the downloading process in the Processing field All steps of the process are shown in the Processing drop down list 4 To check the size of available updates before downloading press the Get size button The updates size will be displayed in the Processing field 5 After updates have been received they are automa
72. the chart view scale To scale the chart view using the drag to zoom method 1 Press and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the drag to zoom rectangle around the area you wish to zoom in Figure 37 Zooming the chart view using the drag to zoom method 3 f you want to cancel this operation press the ESC key while drawing 4 To zoom the chart out do the same holding the SHIFT key down To scale the chart view using the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel e Type the scale in the Chart Scale Edit field and press ENTER e The Zoom In button doubles the current view scale and the Zoom Out button 7 halves it e The Original Scale option changes the scale to the original scale of the chart that is currently in the view latina Sent e The Best scale option displays a chart with the largest scale available for the position of the own ship The chart is displayed at its original scale v BestScale io To scale the chart view using the mouse wheel 18 n the case of zooming out the whole chart window will shrink to the size of the drag to zoom rectangle after releasing the mouse button 1 The Best Scale option is only available if the Navigation mode is on Last update December 11 2012 42 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Turn the mouse wheel forward to increase the current view scale and backward to decrease the current view scale This way the current view scale is increased d
73. the waypoints list do the following 1 Find the port in the ports list Ports are sorted by port name or by country where ports are located depending on the option selected in the Sorted drop down list below the ports list Ports that service vessels with a draft less than the current draft specified for the own ship are disabled in the list and you cannot select them for your route Select the port in the ports list if the Highlight checkbox is ticked the port will be marked with a green circle on the chart and press the Add to Itinerary button The port will be added to the waypoints list To find a port in the ports list quickly you can use the Search function Switch on the search by port select By Port option in the Search Options drop down list and type the port name into the Search field The first port found that begins with the typed symbols will be highlighted in the list Continue typing until required port is highlighted If the By Country search option is selected the search is carried out by country Enter the country name to the Search field and the first port alphabetically of the country will be highlighted When using the search by country sorting by country is also recommended To scroll the chart view to a port select the port in the list and press the Go to Position button To highlight all ports included in the ports list check the Highlight All checkbox All ports will be marked with yellow circles in the c
74. they are dangerous in terms of the alarm conditions green if the legs are safe and blue of there is a danger of capsizing for the ship following under given weather conditions and with the planned speed along the legs The navigation along the routes is imitated by dragging the own ship symbol from one waypoint to another using the mouse pointer When the ship symbol is moved the time changes to the time at which the ship is scheduled to reach the new position The weather forecast changes together with the time The own ship symbols on other routes are moved too When dragged along the route the own ship symbol can be moved for a distance the ship would make in the time interval set in the Step field in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab To move the own ship symbol along the route you can also use the animation buttons of the time setup tool Last update December 11 2012 109 I TA NAVMARINGE m Simulate 61 01 293 N 006 00 585 E eso 0 0 ecos 360 0 j 26 WGS 84 Not for use with position device Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Preseatation Alarm Anea Time Series Packages Build for _ Pressure i Point on Chart Hive Temperature s Route Wind vectors w Precipitation aj w Swal waves DOVER HARBOR Dew point temperature Total cloud cover BREST Total waves Wed 11 02 Thu 12 02 Fri 13 02 Figure 136 Wea
75. time but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed with your other activities When you open the Test Connection window next time you will see the status of the test e Manual connection type E mail File via Attachment 1 Press the Test connection button 2 Save the generated test request file to any location on your computer 3 Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive the test response file in the response e mail Save the response file to any location on your computer 4 Download the file to the ECDIS open the Weather Packages panel Weather gt Weather Packages and press the Import Weather Data File button In the Open dialog window select the response file and press Open You will see no indication of data actually being loaded but the Receive data operation test will be performed 5 The procedure may take time but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed with your other activities When you open the Test Connection window next time you will see the status of the test 6 7 Weather Forecast Display 6 7 1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data Weather data can be displayed in the chart view as an additional data layer To display the data you should turn the data display on and configure the data display parameters To display the data from a weather data package do the following Te 2 Load a weather data package t
76. v Ice concentration PA tropical cycione Legend gt gt T i H i i i 4 a i i H H i i 1 i i H 4 i i i i i r f i Figure 131 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab display of tropical cyclones 3 The cyclone observed positions are displayed with red colored symbols l the forecasted positions are displayed with white colored circles o The position of the cyclone at the time set in the time setup tool in the Weather Weather Presentation tab is indicated with a yellow colored circle o 4 When you point with the mouse pointer at one of the cyclone positions a tool tip appears with the cyclone name date and time when the cyclone is expected in the position wind speed and wind gust speed 5 If there is a route going near the cyclone trajectory the dangerous route legs will be highlighted with purple color in the chart view the same color will be used to indicate the dangerous time for navigating along the route in the Weather Weather Time Series tab graphs 6 7 3 Display of Ice Situation Ice situation data are distributed by Jeppesen Marine as an individual weather product IMPORTANT Ice situation data are based on the information received from satellites the day before the data are available for download from the Jeppesen Marine weather server Therefore the ice situation data can be
77. virtual Yes AIS targets visibility A symbol representing manual selection of any AIS target range for the display of detailed information in a separate data AIS Search and Rescue Transmitters AIS SART Active AIS SART distance to activation A symbol representing an active AIS SART length of the velocity vector shows the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship s velocity vector Selected AIS SART Yes AIS targets visibility A symbol representing manual selection of any AIS target range for the display of detailed information in a separate data panel No AIS targets visibility range All AIS Targets The target is not displayed Yes out of the AIS targets no display Targets are displayed only if they approach to the own visibility range ship closer than the AIS targets visibility range to avoid cluttering No The target is not displayed any distance no display no comments Last update December 11 2012 145 Lost AIS SART A symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS SART before reception of data was interrupted CNAVMARINGE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The program can recognize AIS targets of the S amp R aircraft type Targets like these are indicated on the chart as 8 3 ARPA The ECDIS implements the full support for the ARPA data Using the ARPA functionality you can receive and view data of targets located by ARPA and display the data in the
78. with O mean value and RMS retrieved from device description table All Lines of Position are assumed as Geodetic lines on the reference ellipsoid now fixed to WGS 84 Calculations on the ellipsoid use internal algorithm from dKart library A position FLa A is needed for the algorithm Initial position is usually received from dead reckoning Start position covariance matrix Ba is 2x2 diagonal with values for latitude and longitude covariance equal to 10000 m RMS value This makes no affect of a priory given position to the resulting estimated position The iteration calculates as well known minimum RMS dFL 1 1 Ba H 1 B H H 1 B dZ 1 FL FLa Cp dFL 2 where dFL dLat dLon position tranfser vector B is NxN N number of LOPs diagonal matrix with diagonal element Bii RMSd RMSd for distance measurements and Bjj RMSbrg RMSbrg Drp Drp RMSd is a RMS of distance measurements assumed as increasing on more distances in not a linear function RMSbrg is a bearing measurement error radians Drp calculated from given position distance to reference point H is a gradient matrix 2xN dimension with elements calculated as differentials of the LOP parameter by corresponded coordinate Lat or Lon dz is a difference vector N size with element LOP calculated LOP measured Cp is a 2x2 matrix of the Latitude and Longitude effective radius calculated in the FL position Measurements aging When the positioning syste
79. 0 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0kn 2009 04 17 21 25 04 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn Track r PO 2009 04 17 21 24 02 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn Track ir PO 2009 04 17 21 23 02 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0kn emmm ee eme mem me em nemnem mmm EEE C7 GENS ONG mo eie 4o mm m Refresh Add Remark GoTo Position SaveAsRoute Print Cleanup Export Import V RemarkHints E z MRRM J Figure 234 Log Book panel Set the date and time period at which you want to view log book records select the date in the Date drop down list and set the beginning time in the From field and the end time in the To field By default the log book is opened at the date that was viewed last For example to view today s log book the date has to be reset Set the time system for the time display select the Ship s Time or the UTC Time option in the drop down list to the right from the To field After the time has been set log book entries for the specified date and time will be displayed in the entries table Every entry in the log book contains the following information e Class Describes the type of information see below e Level Describes the importance of the entry information warning or alarm e Type A general description of the entry e g POS Position User Remark Chart Scale and Angle e Date The date and time of the entry UTC or Ship s depending o
80. 04 and Figure 205 Target 4 Target 5 Target 3 eee Own Ship G Target 1 Figure 212 Display of CDL CDS to the acquired targets from Figure 204 and Figure 205 Safe areas are easily identified in true motion overview Target 4 Target 5 t Target 3 Target 2 roast rd Own Ship Target 1 Figure 213 A change of course to starboard to pass ahead of target 4 and astern of target 1 with a safety distance margin equal selected CPA limit Last update December 11 2012 157 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 8 5 2 Graphic Elements of the Anti collision Display The anti collision display functionality is based on visualization of potentially dangerous situations that can result in collision The anti collision image is built of collision danger lines and sectors built in true motion between the own ship and the targets surrounding it If there is a danger of collision of the own ship and any of the targets or if the distance or the time to closest point of approach between the own ship and a target are less than the user specified limits color indication is introduced in the anti collision image In the figure below all main features of the anti collision image are displayed Target Target Speed Vector CPA Limit Collision Danger Sector Collision Danger Line Own Ship Speed Vector Own Ship Figure 214 Graphic elements of the anti collision display The following graphic eleme
81. 12 111 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e The Danger red shadow zone covers all points representing combination of speed and course at which there is a danger of having a sudden increase in roll amplitude of the vessel if the vessel speed and direction vector end lies within the red shadow zone the vessel is in danger of capsizing The conclusion is made from comparison of the vessel natural roll period with the relative wave period if the difference between values is less than 30 the resonance can occur This combination can in some cases be dangerous An alarm for a given threshold of roll amplitude can be made in the Weather Alarm Area panel To set ship parameters for the Ship Response analysis do the following 1 In the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the Ship Response Options os Ship Response Options button The Ship Response dialog will open CES Ship Data Additional parameters leave empty if not known Length m 92 Angle of vanishing stability Width m 15 Waterline area coefficient 00 Draft m 5 3 Effective waterline area sq m Load displacement t 3 Transverse metacentric height m v Enable ship response calculation iv Show alarm of resonance condition Save Load OK Restored on startup Figure 140 Ship Response window 2 Setthe required parameters e Ship Data section Length Length at waterline LWL of the vessel meters LWL
82. 2 the S52 option is selected in the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Presentation section c the chart view scale is larger than 1 16 500 To adjust the contrast and brightness control do the following 1 First set contrast to a maximum brightness to a minimum Look at the black adjust symbol 2 Thenifthe centre square is not visible turn up the brightness until it just appears 3 Or if the centre square is clearly visible with contrast at maximum brightness at minimum turn the contrast down until the inner square disappears then turn contrast back up until the inner square is just visible again 4 lf the above adjustment is not successful select a more appropriate chart display palette and repeat this procedure Last update December 11 2012 22 i _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 5 The black level is then correctly set If a brighter display is required use the contrast control but preferably do not adjust the controls unless lighting conditions on the bridge change After the black level has been set you can proceed with the color test For the test you need to display the color differentiation diagram in the chart view To open the color diagram do the following 1 Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered see chapter 4 1 Installing and Displaying Database and added to the view see chapter 4 1 2Displaying Database 2 Open the Data gt Chart Catalogue tab
83. 2 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS SOLAS Safety of life at sea SPD Speed STW Speed through Water TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach True motion TTA Time to Arrival TTG Time to Go UTC Universal Time Coordinated VRM Variable range marker W West WOL Wheel Over Line WOP Wheel Over Point WP WPT Waypoint 203 Page Index DEI Wy ICON T 45 add mantal Update xa scadecaccecceuntrecureetentindectesennanadansetueses 59 add manual update from NtM eeeeeeee 61 dditional chart data 50 additional chart windows JIDO G2 NN IPTE PC NN 45 look ahead WIN OW xiasecceceduettaestoesu capp ets Son nus co Spe reo 44 AIS MAC Rari 139 LAE COIS display MN E naceeatanesedauacienenancorsnsncseesias 142 AIS lost alali ERE E TT 133 AIS targets INCICM OR seite cootra taa ab e rero ceret rand ee rbnhds 11 EN ALT conditions JIT d 134 alarms PS MOS T 133 IPAS BODIE ceca psois Seite ccs ENS 131 QIN ST OUMCIN 1o ceeoer choose or RRE eX an Eas uid eda t ua URP RE bs 132 ju du 133 condit ons TISE aues co e tut re Ri o oo aen me o ae RON RS 134 ds A Pe 133 Warnings Panel sisecccsivasnitartactednaatecssaadsivesniterviacdtesuedleneedsd 131 alarms MITT e 12 ane role 6 IE E E 6166s cua odo ka ao EM R Tas nea ua DU d cens 126 anti collision display collision risk indication eeeeeeseeeeeeesse 160 CONT SU A O
84. 64 8750 TY 6487 016 96021685 2015 product code NAV i COM ELECTRONIC CHART DISPLAY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM NavCom Voyager VOYAG ER CAPn mmer Npeaynp UIE armpa_comnotepan X 1 12046 x10 Te 16 44 58 26 08 2009 A j F Position Device CCRP 39 55 007 N 119 39 561 E xad 11712 WGS 84 NoaxoAbi K nopty SINGAPORE WPT 1 51 2cek ETA 16 49 26 08 2009 DIG 0 488M BwoL 35 3 BWW 034 8 ry 5 4 DWOL 0 488M vex 150 003 wet siwr WG 4m 52cex ETA 16 49 26 08 2009 39 55 596 N 119 40 270 E O0 00 C USER S MANUAL CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS CONTENTS 1 2 3 JP NDpIre BIS p C O E n 6 ti User Nanua S WUCUNE NEUE 6 1 2 Typographic Conventions s aiicccaderorasdadreasaravactsisrducianntsdacanaisedreguatecaseseidaaianadddeuusriidaveveidanbnngadnawnidadvinuetis 6 1o odii scudo MT ITem 6 1 4 New Feature PIGINGIUGS iicanteaccessieccasrateicdsnaiancoarataariansienneimakaasdanadeacgxnaimnsiesslavedeanaiancearasaieiassiaacetuntenctans T EGEIS INTERFACE ciorapi ER E EEE E E 8 27 Siartingand Terminating the ECDIS uaunsiceicab do ncetyence anemic mean notenhat pace E eMe iUd RE PPM ME 8 C WED O rrr Drm 8 Zo WAI ANOS tr AINE E T T S 8 2 4 Chart scale and Quick Access Buttons Pahlel uice iiia bnskibu tt E iedewusnseinidineuiussidussadsnnaialalisemauteiads 12 20 Funcional Bunons Meonk mU Tem 13 26 E rele ic PANEIS erren IU Tr 13 Zl On Screen Keyboard yiciaeict
85. 68 Raymarine User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 9 OTHER NAVIGATIONAL TOOLS 9 1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects 9 1 1 ERBL Electronic range and bearing line tool is intended for easy measuring of ranges and bearings between objects in the chart view With the tool you can measure ranges and bearings between the own ship and any point in the chart view as well as between any two points in the chart view you can also fix a range as a circle around the own ship to monitor objects within the range To turn on the ERBL mode press the ERBL button in the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel to open the panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator To turn the ERBL mode off outpress the ERBL button Voyage UAU Alarm GPS2 lost Xd 1 75000 x2 7 SHIP 14 25 07 30 03 2009 lI isi amni ME Ao 42 49 180 N 1 75000 009 15 236 W Original Scale esoG 5 0 kn coe 202 0 DPT 20 0 10 0m 41B WGS 84 Not for use with position device Figure 229 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel ERBL button To measure the range and bearing between the own ship and a point in the chart do the following 1 Turn the ERBL mode on In the chart view range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as orange dashed lines The ERBL center is in the own ship position 2 Point the mouse pointer to any object in the chart view The range and bearing to and from values are displayed in the mou
86. 9 8 2 1 iie ESI iano EP EET 139 8 2 2 AlS Targets Display SOLUS saririk A A NAE iei 142 gE N E 146 8 3 1 PERE oe Whe E a EE E E EE 146 8 3 2 ARPA Targets DISplay ccccsscccssscecesececeseceseseecasecceaseeceaeeeseecesasecesaueeesaeeeneeteneusenseesens 147 a Paarma e NE i mme 148 OMM Sees d iB TEE 149 8 5 1 Theoretical Principles of the Anti collision Display eeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeene 150 8 5 2 Graphic Elements of the Anti collision Display ccccccccssccccescesceseeseeseseeeeseeeeesaneessaes 158 Last update December 11 2012 4 NAvMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 8 5 3 Configuration of the Anti collision Display 1 1 2 2 1 2 11b eric rar stabat nor roe epr arn res 158 8 5 4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits 159 8 5 5 maicaton of Collision RISK Eo DL 160 8 5 6 Example and Recommendations for the Anti collision Display Use 161 9 OTHER NAVIGATIONAL TOULS icivebedusschnc duit nana aua Qn duode E uu be nE ru ud does Leal ad bad dod du 169 9 1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects eese 169 9 1 1 zl M MK 169 9 1 2 CAE dide a NR E A mm 170 9 1 9 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer cccccssscecsecensecenseeesaseeeesseesseeeseeeeeneneeens 170 g2 JManoverbosrd and Fosilon FIX assisetenscinntes
87. COG and heading HDG of the ship If the COG and HDG values are the same the width of the own ship passage corridor equals the maximum beam of the ship set in the Config gt Own Ship tab If the COG and the HDG values are different the width of the own ship passage corridor is more than the maximum beam The width of the own ship passage corridor is shown on the chart near the end of Figure 144 Own ship the passage corridor symbol passage corridor Beam 10m Length 40m the following Open the Navi Navigation Data tab and check the Show secondary checkbox in the Position Source section To display the own ship symbol as a scaled area symbol do the following 1 2 Open the Navi Navigation Data tab and check the True scale ship image checkbox The own ship point symbol will turn into an area symbol at large scales The scale at which the transformation happens depends on overall dimensions of the own ship set in the Config gt Own Ship Own ship setup tab If any of the prediction vectors is not displayed make sure that the required data SOG COG STW HDG ROT are coming to the ECDIS from input devices Last update December 11 2012 115 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 2 Position Sources 7 2 1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources In the ECDIS you can use two ways to position the own ship e One or more GPS devices DGPS WAAS EGNOS etc compatible with the NMEA interface GPS de
88. Coverage option or press the Add New Coverage button Eil The Edit Coverage window opens Edit Coverage New Coverage 4 New Coverage Delete Coverage Boundaries North N52 10 781 West W 012 47 428 E007 11 481 East South N 39 58 858 Figure 107 Edit Coverage window b Initially the New Coverage boundaries are boundaries of your current screen view You can set new boundaries either by entering new coordinate values to the North South East and West fields coordinate values are in degrees minutes and fractions of minute or by selecting a new coverage on the screen C To select a new coverage on the screen move the mouse pointer to the edge of the coverage displayed on the screen a red frame When the pointer changes to the horizontal resize pointer click the right mouse button and drag the coverage boundary holding the button Release the button when the coverage boundary is in the right place You can also move the coverage move the mouse inside the selected area the pointer will change to the move pointer P press the right mouse button and move the coverage Release the button when the coverage area is in the right place Coordinate values in the North South West and East fields of the Edit Coverage window change in accordance with selection on the screen d After you have defined boundaries of the new coverage press the Apply button to save the settings in the list of coverage areas e
89. D or DVD disk with the new version To install the new version do the following 1 Insert the disk to the disk reader 2 Installation package will launch automatically 3 Follow the installation package instructions 4 Updated software components will be installed in the same location where the previously installed components are 3 5 Data Synchronization The ECDIS implements a data synchronization technology designed to synchronize a single set of data between all ECDIS computers connected in the cluster by automatically copying all changes introduced to the data back and forth Data that are synchronized are routes databases updates manual updates mariner objects and own ship configuration 3 5 1 Synchronization Setup Synchronization is carried out over the local network Computers of the network are assigned names and roles Names uniquely define each computer in the data synchronization scheme Roles are not unique there can be several computers with the same role and define the way computers participate in synchronization The network configuration for data synchronization is defined using an xm1 configuration file Network Config xml The file is located in the C ECDISDATA Config folder Synchronization setup is done using an xml configuration file and is available only to system administrators Last update December 11 2012 23 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 5 2 Synchroniza
90. DIST NM Time to next ALGER Algeria 2009 10 02 14 44 18 0 2009 10 02 14 46 2009 10 02 14 46 18 0 2009 10 02 14 47 2009 10 02 14 47 18 0 2009 10 02 14 56 2009 10 02 14 56 18 0 2009 10 02 15 04 2009 10 02 15 04 180 Figure 84 Route gt Route planning tab Edit mode Schedule table 3 The following route schedule parameters are displayed in the Schedule table ETA Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated date and time of arrival to the waypoint Can be set by the user ETD Estimated Time of Departure Estimated date and time of departure from the waypoint Can be set by the user Stop dur Stop duration at the waypoint It can be applied for waypoints representing pilot stations and ports as a route can include a number of intermediate ports of call Speed Estimated speed in knots on the leg from this waypoint to the next It is taken from the WPT table and can be changed here If you change the speed value in the Schedule table it is changed in the WPT table too DIST The distance from the waypoint to the next one along the leg Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG Units and Time tab the Distance Units section The Distance is taken from the Waypoints table Time to Next Time that will be spent to reach the next waypoint It is calculated as speed divided by distance 4 Above the table the total distance and the total duration of the route are displayed
91. Display configurations select the configuration name in the drop down list and press the Delete button 7 You can set your Custom Display the same as the Base Standard or All other display types To do SO press the Set by button and select the display type you need from the context menu 5 6 3 Supplementary Data The Jeppesen chart database includes supplementary data in addition to cartographic data The supplementary data can be used in voyage planning and other navigational purposes The supplementary data is included in the database as supplementary data layers The supplementary data are tides and tide currents GMDSS areas SAR regions improved background and overview charts and terrain data You can choose to display or hide the supplementary data layers on the chart To display hide the supplementary data of a specified database do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab The supplementary data display is configured in the Supplementary Chart Info section Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Display Type Supplementary Chart Info Databases C MAP Tides tidal heights and streams N 00 00 000 ia GMDSS areas E 000 00 000 a SAR regions Improved background and overview charts Print Chart Goto Position Figure 49 Chart gt Data Display tab Supplementary Chart Info 2 Inthe Databases drop down list select a database If the databa
92. E ECDIS 1 Open the Config Anti Collision Tool tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Syston Setup uS Tarata Tool Ship Output and Time iv Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 1 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Maximum CPA NM 2 0 TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min v TargetVectors Apply Parameters Figure 215 Config gt Anti Collision Tool tab 2 To turn the anti collision display on check the Anticollision ON OFF checkbox To turn the anti collision display off clear the checkbox 3 Set the time for prediction of the own ship position select a value in the Vector Length drop down list The time value defines the length of the own ship speed vector the end of the vector points to the position at which the own ship will be in the specified time 4 Setthe minimum CPA distance enter a value to the Radius of CPA limit circle field The minimum CPA distance determines the safe passing distance between the own ship and a target The allowable input range is 0 0 to 5 0 nautical miles 5 Set the maximum CPA distance enter a value to the Maximum CPA field If a target is at a distance to the own ship equal or less than the maximum CPA distance the target is relevant for the collision risk evaluation Targets with the CPA distance to the own ship larger than the maximum CPA are not considered dangerous and are not included in the anti collision display The allowable input
93. ECDIS 3 To edit the LOP Position fix advanced parameters enter new values to the value fields of appropriate settings without changing the structure of the MODevices config xml file In the table below sections and settings of the file are described Default Value DRActualisation SogRMS B u BrgCorrection DistRMS DistCorrection DirFinder 1 BrgRMS 0 BrgCorrection Last update December 11 2012 O lt l e Description Speed over ground root mean square error RMSE in knots For example if your speed over ground RMSE is 0 2 knots set the SogRMS value to 0 2 Radar bearing RMSE in degrees For example if your radar bearing RMSE is 0 5 degrees set the BrgRMS value to 0 5 Radar bearing constant correction in degrees If the radar bearing line deviates anticlockwise the correction should be positive if the bearing line deviates clockwise the correction should be negative For example if your radar bearing is 0 5 degrees wrong clockwise set the BrgCorrection value to 0 5 Radar distance RMSE in nautical miles For example if your radar distance RMSE is 4 5 nautical miles set the Dist RMS value to 4 5 Radar distance constant correction in nautical miles If the radar defined range exceeds the true range value the correction should be negative if the radar defined range falls behind the true range value the correction should be positive For example if yo
94. Eare a EEEa 78 T O MI I aoa D 38 o SE 0191210 MR A T AA T AE TT 39 S 63 protection apply cell DECUS ooo iso oit aee PER na 35 apply SA COPI Cae us eseice pisse der Ei 36 Cell permits SC ccecacsasiasdend otii rta derer ou eu o Etica pend og Y as 36 Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS copy user permit to file ccc cccceeesssseseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 35 current SA certificate info eee 37 uninstall cell permits eeeeeeeeeee 36 SA certificate 1e M HTC M 36 current certificate information essen 37 safely depilira Ei 51 BIS EY ZOMG erosota E 132 scale chart VIEW MR ORO PC ee 41 scale statis mMdiCatoieusrseisni n ii EEE 9 scheduled weather download cccccccccssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 scroll chart VIC W MM RR 40 semi automatic chart updating eessssssss 56 SOW CONTOU te 51 ship paramet Ors sna cersevanxaivercenntstrincaasivsndsatisdeasaidtaiiencesmivenounants 19 ship TESpONSE te sercsusadassanieseesdenehe E iEn P EEr EE tonnes 110 software modules LiCeNSING cccceccceeeeeeeseseesseeeeseeeeeeeees 34 Source scale INGICAUOL sacciiiantairetardurnsbasdnand dR edel vade epo Pad Pad Svid ue 9 sarine e QU PIRE PPP 8 supplementary chart data ccccccccccceececeeeeeesseseseseeeeeees 50 synchronization of data PVC CO CRM TE 26 MINOT COT RENS P P PER 24 TAO Ge SL eddie E M DIES M E ME 26 SEAT
95. Flood Ebb Ebb Figure 95 Info gt Streams Info tab After the tidal stream station has been selected you can get information about the stream for any date and time To set the date and time use the date and time tool The tool is described in detail in chapter 6 5 1 Tides Information To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated on the chart press the Play button Each new position of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period In the left hand part of the panel the following general information about the selected stream is displayed e Time Zone Time difference between standard local time of tidal stream and UTC e Direction Direction of the tidal stream e Speed Speed of the tidal stream e Flood Ebb Shows if the current tidal stream object is in the flood or ebb state Detailed information about the tidal stream is represented in the Graph and Speed Directions tabs e Graph Tidal stream speed in knots dependent on time is graphically expressed on the diagram The diagram background consists of three color zones These zones graphically show night time dark grey twilights light grey and daytime white The red vertical line on the graph marks the time entered in the date time field Two display modes are available by switching the Direct Changes button Considering the stream state the button Direct Changes is pressed The vertical diagram axis will be di
96. If a caution object is found in the guard zone the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes orange and is called Cautions To view the Dangers and Cautions lists click on the Dangers and Cautions indicator the Dangers Cautions tab will open with the Dangers and Cautions tabs in it 61 In order to use the anti grounding functionality efficiently it is important to set the Safety Contour correctly in the chart presentation see chapter 5 6 5 Depth Settings The anti grounding function uses the safety contour value and the own ship draft to determine anti grounding warnings Last update December 11 2012 132 7 6 3 Alarms The ECDIS provides the possibility to set a depth alarm activated when the depth below keel is more or less of the set depth limit as well as alarms when a detected AIS or ARPA target is lost To set the depth alarm do the following 1 Open the Config gt Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab sten Alarm AIS Targets Anti Collision Own Input Units Setup Tool Ship Output andTime Buzzer On Off Antigrounding alarm Alarms iv Target lost alarm Depth alarms v AIS lost alarm Depth below keel limit 4 0 m Morethan Lessthan Apply Figure 181 Config Alarm Setup tab Alarms tab 2 Enter the value of the depth below keel limit to the Depth below keel limit field The measurement unit for the depth is set in the Config Units and Time tab 3 Check the More than or the Less tha
97. In the databases drop down list select the ChartletsBase database Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop down list 3 Double click on the AAS5C1WOO dataset the dataset contains the color differentiation test diagram The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset The color diagram will be brought up to the chart view P If you can t see the color test diagram make sure the following arrangements are made a the display type is set to All other the display type indicator is All other ET b the chart presentation type is set to S52 the S52 option is selected in the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Presentation section c the chart view scale is larger than 1 16 500 5 The diagram consists of twenty squares extending over the whole of a 350x270 mm approx screen Each square is colored with one of the four main background area shades such as shallow water blue DEPVS and each carries a two pixel wide diagonal line in one of the important line or symbol foreground colors such as planned route red PLRTE 6 The color differentiation test consists of being able to distinguish the background colors and to pick out the like foreground colors i e to say that squares 3 5 11 15 18 and 20 all have a shallow water blue background and that squares 3 10 and 17 have a grey line 3 4 Updating ECDIS Software To update the ECDIS software you will need a C
98. Knot Kt A speed unit of one international nautical mile 18520 0 meters or 6 076 11549 international feet per hour 197 Wayman NWAVYVMARINGE Latitude The designation for angles measuring how far North or how far South a position is Value range is from 9098 to 0 at the equator to 909N Latitude values are represented by the Greek letter lambda A Lat Lon Any object s position expressed in Latitude and Longitude Leg The segment of a route between two waypoints Line of Position Plotted line on which own ship is located determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element Log A record of the ship s movements and a place for manual text entries Longitude The designation for angles measuring how far West or how far East a position is Value range is from 180 E to 180 W Values of longitude are represented with the Greek letter phi LOP See Line of Position LORAN LOng Range Aid to Navigation LORAN is a terrestrial based navigation system using the time interval between radio signals to determine the position of the receiver LORAN was popular with marine navigation prior to the existence of GPS The current version of LORAN in use is LORAN C LORAN fails under different conditions than GPS arguably making it a complementary radio navigation system Lost Target Tracked radar or reported A S target for which the system is n
99. M uad none DR DIM brEd A MENU HE OUS 88 Easy Mode setup icine scesserrinesseaneisancoiatraderioesiaraieinecenneanaiees 89 overview download cccceseccccceecceeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 91 scheduled download 5 eot reete erepto eher tt 94 Be UE o POE EEEE See weather download setup subscription ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees See weather subscription weather packages eessessssssssseoeeeeresssssssssssseererersessssssss 96 weather packages eise cetus booa ua Dora uiios LEVER DER a ia 96 weather subscription OG AG NNUS E E E 86 I Ne Wy MT TT 87 jjj 87 wind sensor data cese cessus pe eaeiteaxesseccacitenias sexsaronamannanconees 126 207
100. Me acosacoc ieri rodea abre PR biPac oro od vasi aea q ws Pe QOSE 158 graphic els MIL ULM tiruri sosronrasdssruerrenrerinineiieeti 158 limits violation indication cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 159 HIC OY o saosstesi aide ced dnoM cO d pMRa M da RUE 150 antieroundme alarmi si sccacencsesresesavansncsedaveuconssciwedeseswuruddien 132 ARPA Tal 1S Cal PRETERITO 146 targets display MINNS ERI ER EEEO n sub Oates 147 ARPA lost alari ica cipdescdcedsostsnaudanasdcndacasacccmebedetlecmiaieAaawiacor 133 ARPA targets display indicator esses 11 astronomical information sees 84 automatic Chart updating eese 56 automatic route planning eese 69 DESE SCANS IMO GS iade suos cua eau dudo E nd 127 black adjust symbol eeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeen 22 POO KMAT E Seoni serisi EE e I REE ETIES 43 calculate great circle points cccccccccceccccceeeesessseeseeeees 176 cell permits DIP ONY RR RT O 35 36 Llc e T e NR 36 chart boundaries by scale level eessssss 68 chart display palettes csiis tuoi a edd eo veo obe ie 128 chart display setup chart presentation models eeeeeeeeeessssss 47 CSA BS DE a E A sande did ses Siu 48 TVA Ie e cH oos museos enda entice even elit deu dati e ei E Es 43 chart navigational settings HOBESCCIOP Seite ito
101. NE Glossary Activated AIS target A target activated for the display of additional graphically presented information for example heading line velocity vector etc Aids to Navigation Usually pertains to buoys ranges and the like AIS See Automatic Identification System ARPA See Automatic Radar Plotting Aid Automatic Identification System AIS AIS provides a means of broadcasting digitally navigation information including ship position speed heading dimension name destinati on ROT aids to navigation base station reports and more Created by the IMO and sanctioned by the U S Coast Guard for ship monitoring and collision avoidance It is used by ship traffic monitoring and control locations throughout the world to improve situational awareness and help prevent collisions at sea Automatic Radar Plotting Aid ARPA The functionality entailing the detection of moving targets and calculating their soeed and course Used to automatically detect radar targets and output to other devices ARPA is a collision avoidance system Autopilot A self steering device which attaches to a ship s steering mechanism to control the ship s bearing Azimuth Azimuth of a body is the arc of the horizon intercepted between the North or South point and the foot of the vertical circle passing through the body It is reckoned in degrees from either the North or South point clockwise entirely around the Horizon source Our Restle
102. NE ECDIS The CDL can be displayed to any acquired target in a true motion overview because it is completely independent of own ship s speed and course It is only depending on the target s relative position speed and course This means that collision risk can be judged simultaneously to all acquired targets in a true motion overview with easy identification of possible evasive maneuvers Figure 204 and Figure 205 Target 4 Target 5 mt om E WM Target Target 3 Target 1 Figure 204 From judging the tip of own ship s vector in relation to the CDLs it follows that there is a direct collision threat to targets 2 and 5 Target 1 will pass slightly astern and targets 3 and 4 will pass ahead of own ship if the motion parameters speed and course are maintained Target 4 Target 5 WE BN i f i ni No l Target 2 we Target 3 j 2 Le wm d a a cS MM dL dia E LM E dad M Lame I Own ase T Target 1 fey Figure 205 A change of course to starboard is a potential evasive action by own ship Targets 1 2 and 3 will pass well ahead while targets 4 and 5 will pass astern of own ship if their course and speed are maintained Last update December 11 2012 153 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The CDL represents the situation where CPA 0 0 n miles The general solution is an actual collision danger sector CDS which can be found by introducing a safety margin CPA limit with respect t
103. Name drop down list select the name of the device to which the route will be exported The list contains devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab 3 In the Device Type list select the type of the device 4 Inthe Route to Export drop down list select the route to export 5 Press the Export button The route will be exported to the specified device as RTE and WPL sentences Upon completion of the operation the message will be displayed The route was successfully exported To import a route from a device do the following 1 Open the Route Export Import tab and switch to the From To Device tab 2 In the Device Name drop down list select the name of the device from which the route will be imported The list contains devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab e In the Device Type list select the type of the device P Press the Import button The ECDIS will start reading RTE and WPL sentences from the specified device Progress of the route import is displayed in the Progress section progress bar 5 Upon completion of the route import the message will appear Route X is received Would you like to import more routes To go on with importing routes press the Yes button to save the received route press the No button 6 To save the route enter the route name to the Enter new route name dialog and 5 Cancel press the OK button If you press the Cancel button the route will be saved under
104. Points Last update December 11 2012 169 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 4 To release the ERBL right click in the chart view Turn the ERBL mode off 9 1 2 Check Points The check points functionality allows you setting up to three checkpoints Check points are the points to which the distance and bearing from the own ship are constantly displayed in the chart view The values of the distances and bearings are updated as the ship moves To set a check point do the following 1 6 Open the Check points panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator to open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel and press the Check points acta mca s button Checkpoint2 True Relative Choose whether the bearing from the own ship to check points should be vaccis vu iio A aac true angle between the direction to the north and the direction to the Clear All object or relative angle between the ship course and the direction to the Calculation Mode object To set the true bearing check the True Relative checkbox to the mmus J right from the check point name to set the relative bearing clear the True Relative checkbox v Cursor DIST BRG Close Select the calculation mode for distances in the Calculation Mode drop down list distances can be calculated as great circle arcs or as rhumb Figure 230 Check points lines panel To plot a check point in the chart view check one of the Check po
105. S e 61 manually update chart ObJects ccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 62 mariner objects ELO dU crate tas E MI Sen dame une USA Ord 64 A tes sono coins ios cpa H renee ee 66 NO MET nm VEEE ce ae MT 66 EEDIDORE ERTE AIEE ET E ETE EAE ATEA E TTET T 67 A qur O EA VE E A 62 measurement units Setup 20 uio oe E A 171 move around chart VieW eeesssssssssoeeeeressssssssssssseeereerereesee 40 nav mto OIC AE OM sesso tirer ebrei reti esa Duate dud 10 navigation calculator Convert COOFIDaleS oneeebessb E cen uecdevedaorastedestdsseiesuasDadvetuns 176 direct geodetic PFODICM isin uio eoe is torno nena aee ca ruota 175 greate circle points i aces pios RebE QR OH TL RE eI Heb PV Reb PEN ir voa sud ade 176 inverse geodetic problem eeesseses 175 aviation Mode 3 5 cii odds divisa cm M nedOns intei oe taa opo c bbs 127 navigation mode indicator eesssssssseeeeeeeee 9 navigational chart settings best Scale MOUE acus oiii ee arbo ope o EUER eb UE RIT aD ako abus 127 chart ORIENTAL OI eon om eor 220 0e n kudus vis 128 display palete Sus eerenivo bettsdivs eset potu e ud Festa eet dariit 128 TAY 1 SALON DUO us ionatececitt perrita tud eta etos pab idest ep oes 127 true and relative MOTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 205 CRAYMARIN NAVMARINE pi navigational data SOULCES ccccseeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeees 126 navigat
106. Standard Display is on screen when the chart is first displayed by the ECDIS The Standard Display is recalled by single operator action press the Data Display Type indicator in the Indicators panel The Standard display consists of Display Base drying line indication of fixed and floating aids to navigation boundaries of fairways channels etc visual and radar conspicuous features prohibited and restricted areas chart scale boundaries indication of cautionary notes In addition to the objects set a specified set of chart presentation parameters is used Custom Standard Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or removed from the standard set of parameters The last chart presentation parameters settings are saved in the system All other The All Other Display shows the chart information in full the All Other Display type has no mandatory chart presentation parameters The All Other Display is recalled by single operator action press the Data Display Type indicator in the Indicators panel Custom The Custom Display displays the Display Base and other chart information by class on demand To set one of the display types do the following 1 Open the Chart Chart Settings tab 2 In the Display Type drop down list select a display type Information corresponding to the selected display type will appear on the screen immediately Last update December 11 2012 48 CN Av MARINE Use
107. Targets tab The display of ARPA targets is configured in the ARPA sub tab Alarm AIS Targets Anti Collision Own Input Units System Setup Tool Ship Output and Time Distance to Dangerous LostTarget Alarm Range Past track 0 500 NM 0 500 NM Set Past track interval 30 sec CPA TCPA to Dangerous 0 500 NM 10 min Set Figure 196 Config gt Targets tab ARPA sub tab 2 To turn on the display of the track passed by targets check the Past track checkbox Select the interval of the track update in the Past track interval drop down list the interval value ranges from 1 second to 30 minutes 3 Set the distance to dangerous approach in the Distance to Dangerous field enter a value in nautical miles to the field and press the Set button for the setting to take effect When a target approaches the own ship to the distance closer than the distance to dangerous the target symbol changes to the dangerous target symbol and starts flashing For the symbol to cease flashing acknowledge the target To acknowledge a target open the Info Targets tab ARPA sub tab select the target in the targets table and press the Acknowledge button to acknowledge all targets press the Acknowledge all button The target symbol will stop flashing 4 Set the lost target alarm range enter a value in nautical miles to the Lost Target Alarm Range and press the Set button for the setting to take effect If a target was lost while insid
108. The Import mariner objects dialog will open In the Import mariner objects dialog select the folder where mariner objects files are stored The list of files will be displayed in the right hand pane of the dialog window P Select the mariner objects file to import to the ECDIS and press the Import button 5 The mariner objects from the file will be imported to the ECDIS and added to the list of other mariner objects 6 To return to the editor press the Editor button 6 3 Charts Catalogue The Chart Catalogue allows you to obtain detailed information about charts belonging to a specified database Using the Chart Catalogue function you can find any chart of a specified database you are particularly interested in and view it in the chart view You can also display boundaries of charts grouped into scale levels in the chart view 6 3 1 Searching Charts Catalogue In the Charts Catalogue you can obtain information about any particular chart and view the chart on the screen To search the chart catalogue do the following 1 Open the Data gt Chart Catalogue tab Last update December 11 2012 67 pe User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS x Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic ee Auto Import lt E a Catalogu Database Licensing Updating S57 Professional Chart Boundaries UKHO test and sample datas Overview 40 000 000 5 000 000 Jeppesen Italia S r l World 5 000 000 1500000 H
109. The device will be deleted from the list 2 Press the Save Settings button for the changes to take effect 3 Enter the password to the Password required dialog and press OK The changes will take effect 3 1 2 Monitoring serial line You can monitor the serial line to determine if a specified communication channel and the channel baud rate are configured correctly and the system receives messages over the specified channel To monitor serial line do the following 1 Press the Line Monitor button in the Config gt Input Output tab The Line Monitor window will open ENSE TJI Close ITCP IP Local Port 2002 ES Clear Monitor Activate Log SHEROT 0 0 A 2B SHEHDT 145 00 T 1F SHEROT 0 0 A 2B HEHDT 145 00 1 1F SHEROT 0 0 A 2B HEHDT 145 00 1 1F SHEROT 0 0 A 2B HEHDT 145 00 1 1F SHEROT 0 0 A 2B C LICLIINT AAC AN Tk AE Figure 9 Line Monitor window 2 n the Line Monitor window select the communication line from the drop down list next to the Close button In case the communication line is a COM port select the line baud rate from the drop down list next to the lines list In case the communication line is a TCP IP or a virtual line enter the local port number to the Local Port field NOTE if an io lines xml configuration file is used the drop down list next to the Close button contains a list of communication lines described in the configuration file Select the line to monitor in the list 3 Check the Activat
110. The red arrow in the upper right corner represents the direction and velocity of the wind To read values of the weather parameters represented by the arrows see corresponding weather legends in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab to open a weather legend relating to a weather parameter select the weather parameter in the Meteo Parameters table and the corresponding weather legend will be displayed in the Weather Legend part of the tab 3 The polar diagram gives you information about the speed and course of the vessel in a specified position on the route as well as about the speed and course values combinations that can cause a risk of a sudden increase in roll amplitude The diagram consists of the following elements Concentric circular axes representing vessel speed The vessel symbol plotted in the middle of the diagram The vessel speed and direction vector the arrow pointing outward from the center of the vessel symbol shows the direction and velocity of the vessel The direction is the angle between the imaginary vertical axis of the diagram and the vessel speed and direction vector measured horizontally from North to whatever direction you are pointing The vessel speed is defined with the help of concentric axes representing speed the value of the speed lies in the point where the vector ends Speed of the vessel in the current position is taken from the route characteristics speed on the leg Last update December 11 20
111. To restore initial coverage boundaries the screen coverage boundaries set when the Edit Coverage window has just been opened press the Reset Area button f To scroll the screen so that a specified coverage area was in the center of the screen press the Go to button Last update December 11 2012 90 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS g To create a new coverage press the New Coverage button The name of the new coverage will appear in the list The default new coverage name is New Coverage x you can change the name to any name you like h To delete a coverage select it in the list of coverage options and press the Delete button i To return to the Weather Request Download window press the OK button All new coverage areas will be in the list of coverage areas If you press the Cancel button the new areas will not be preserved in the list of coverage areas 7 You can view a selected coverage area from the Weather Download Request dialog To do so press the Go to Coverage button in the request table In the Period field select time period for which you need weather forecast In the TimeStep field select time step at which weather parameters readings from the weather package are made 10 In the Size field an approximately estimated weather package size is displayed The total size of the request is displayed in the Total information panel at the lower right corner of the window 11 The Forecast
112. V T VDR Route Planner RTE WPL RTE WPL gt ABK UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs The ABK sentence is generated when a transaction initiated by reception of an ABM ACA AIR or BBM sentence is terminated This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested ABM broadcast of either ITU R M I 371 messages 6 or 12 OCOCADR XXXXXXKXXL x2 X3 wl x5 DnhsCB o hb Poem mses 00 NEC NN RN mem NEN EN NN Message sequence number mam Type of acknowledgement gt DBT Depth Below Transducer Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Water depth referenced to the transducer X X X X X oS cDBEBT ikl 2 XxX2 M4 Bees FO hD lt CR gt xLF gt X X Depth value in feet Measurement unit f for feet EE Last update December 11 2012 177 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS orea NN Measurement unit M for meters EE gt DPT Depth Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline Negative offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the part of the keel of interest For the ECDIS the offset is always negative so as to provide depth relative to the keel S DPT x xl x x2 x x3 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt cso mee OO oeen
113. W cccccccccescccseeccsceceuceceueecaeecaueesaeeecueeceueecaueesaueesueeseueeseueessuecaueesseeenags Ad 5 5 2 cB mol E 45 sub eno crt DISP s Losses niet ou Un ERE EUR NEAN PUEDEN ISERoOl EAE AANE AEEA AEN 47 5 6 1 Chant Presentan MOSS sirssiriinnarseinsiaiidnnediianioniianno adinin innoirea innii iiaia 47 5 6 2 Se cS ERU TN T NC cT 48 5 6 3 x dla silica O NRI TIE TT US 50 5 6 4 Depth Areas Presentato nee ets mre ne ee ee ane Meee tee ta One ee ets eens ee ee eee eet etree te 51 5 5 5 Brewers T T m m Tem 52 5 6 6 Ji SaN ne ao ieaie 53 5 6 7 iler Deme 54 Sur JB Ee ssiseeciseinngin ii E i id iiaa ii a0 A ee ION ie a a 56 01 SOUS ine CMa essre ren EEE TAEAE i AEEA E E ETR AEE 56 6 1 1 PrO e SOC AU ME A DOTT 56 6 1 2 cem antomatie Updating eius sias A E E 56 6 1 3 Updating Log Review DDOBIBS ais e esie Iuno MIR TAE INUI EI EH IINE Lol Ped HER a P seeps iinaeiiekietiianeis 57 6 1 4 Pe He IS AIAG MM RE m 58 o2 Mannar oec ssaa E a iaa i 62 6 2 1 Creating and Editing Mariner Objects eco scaascussndcarednssaceadsedcivstseccdneedousaieedubciied aiaiceueniaieeds 64 6 2 2 Export Import of Mariner Objects cccccccscsccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeececeseacessecessaseesseeeseuseesegeesseneeees 66 6 3 Charts Catalogue uuscauimeaidedns uat nhun ie devitmmad ciiuiad du tuna iuf iinit dente iuste bel n eiiis duxi copiosa d iio d bmdE dump 67 6 3 1 Searching Charts ye A ENERO Ems 67 6 3 2 Viewing Cha
114. W Testing u CALAlS France BORDEAUX 4 n case there are several routes in the specified povERHARBOR United Kingdom CALAIS France file only for route files you will be prompted to select one of the routes in the Select Route Name dialog gt Output Route Name BWW Testing Reverse Route In the Select Route Name dialog you can also change the output route name by entering a new EN oe name to the Output Route Name field and Figure 86 Route gt Export Import tab select the Last update December 11 2012 route to import CNAVMARINGE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS reverse the output route by checking the Reverse Route checkbox After the route has been selected and other parameters set press the OK button to import the route 6 4 8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a Device It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference This chapter explains how to exports routes to and import them from external devices To export a route to a device do the following 1 Open the Route gt Export Import tab and switch to the From To Device tab Start Route GoTo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import From To File From To Device Device Name GPS2 Y Device Type NMEA 0183 Y Route to Export New Route X Import Export Progress Status Ready Cancel Figure 87 Route Export Import tab From To Device tab 2 In the Device
115. a default name Figure 88 Enter new route name 7 After the route has been saved you can edit it in the Route gt Route Planning panel 3 In case the ECDIS failed to start receiving the route from the very first sentence an error message will appear In that case close the message cancel import by pressing the Cancel button in the Progress section and press the Import button once more Last update December 11 2012 80 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 6 5 Tides and Tidal Streams Data Tides and currents information is included in the database as a supplementary section The data include locations of tidal and current stations tidal ranges and other information You can turn on the display of tides and currents in the chart view and view information about each tide in the Info gt Tides Info tab and about each current in the Info gt Streams Info tab 6 5 1 Tides Information Information about tides is available in the Info gt Tides Info panel To access tides information do the following 1 Open the Info gt Tides Info panel and set the Switch Tides On Off checkbox to turn on the display of tides information in the chart view Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal stream stations appear on the map the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1 5 000 000 and the list of all tidal stations is displayed in the pane below the Switch Tides On Off checkbox 2 To view inform
116. abase from the Databases drop down list Enter the number of the Notice to Mariners to the Notice field Select the code of the data producing agency in the Source Producing Agency drop down list the name of the agency will be automatically displayed in the field to the right 10 Select the name of the chart to which the object will be added in the Source Identification Code drop down list to view the selected chart press the Show button Press the OK button to continue the operation or the Cancel button to cancel the operation 11 If you press the OK button the chart view is scrolled so that to display the specified chart and the Attributes pane opens 12 To set the object attributes and metrics repeat steps 7 to 11 of the previous procedure The new object is added to the Extrascale dataset 30 f you add a manual update object from a Notice to Mariners the object is added to the chart dataset specified in the Source Identification Code field of the Add New Object from Notice to Mariners dialog Last update December 11 2012 61 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To edit a manual update object do the following 1 2 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab In the databases drop down list select a database In the History pane the list of updates applied to the specified database will be displayed Find the updated object you want to edit in the list To select the object double click on
117. adding a new alarm condition 3 Double click in the Value of field to open the drop down list of attributes of the specified weather parameter Select an attribute from the drop down list 4 Double click in the Value from field and enter the value of the lower limit of the condition double click in the Value to field and enter the value of the upper limit 5 Repeat the actions for other alarm conditions if necessary To combine several alarm conditions use operations available in the Operation drop down list The drop down list appears after the next alarm condition has been added The following operations are available e AND alarm area will be made for areas where both conditions are true e OR alarm area will be made for areas where at least one of the conditions is true 6 To delete a condition select it in the table and press the Delete button To delete all conditions from the table press the Delete All button Last update December 11 2012 108 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 To move a condition up or down in the table select it and press the Move up or Move down button respectively 8 To save the current conditions set to a file press the Save button in the Save as dialog indicate the folder and the name of the conditions file and press Save The conditions set will be saved to an xml file To load a previously saved conditions set press the Load button in the Open dialog select the file
118. an configure HTTP parameters in the Setup Connection window in the HTTP parameters branch of the connection parameters tree Setup Connection Es Communication type Internet HTTP Data center Europe Timeout s 120 Attachment size Kb 1000 HTTP parameters Automatic send receive v Enable break recovery v HTTP proxy type Manual configuratic M HTTP proxy server Proxy server Dravu cariar nart 3 128 z Export settings Import settings OK Cancel Figure 119 Setup Connection window Internet HTTP communication type e Automatic send receive if the parameter is set data requests are sent to the weather server automatically if the parameter is not set data requests are put first to the waiting list in the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and sent to the server on the user command e The HTTP proxy type parameter can be set to the following values Direct connection Use the option if you do not use proxy server to provide connection to the Internet Automatic discovery Use the option if you do not know exact parameters of your proxy server or if you are not sure that your internet connection is provided through a proxy server Set this option and the program will find proxy server automatically Manual configuration Use the option if your internet connection is provided through a proxy server and you know all parameters of the server Last update December 11 2012 98 Qaymar
119. angerous anymore Lost target any distance A symbol representing the last valid position of a target before reception of data was interrupted Reference target any distance Tracked radar targets designated as reference targets are labeled with the letter R no display Selected target Yes any distance Target selected in the chart view is automatically selected in the targets table in the Info gt Targets tab All target symbols are oriented to the targets course The target symbols have speed vectors extended in the direction of the targets course for a length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship s prediction vector COG 90 SOG 10kn prediction time interval 3min 8 4 Radar Image Overlay The ECDIS provides the possibility to display data received from radar in the chart view as a radar image overlaying the chart To turn the display of the radar image on or off left click on the Radar indicator If the display of the radar image is off the Radar indicator is orange A if the display of the radar image is on the Radar indicator is green To configure the display of the radar image do the following 1 Open the Info gt Radar Image tab If no radar board is connected to the ECDIS all controls of the Radar Image tab are inactive Last update December 11 2012 148 E NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Echo Sounder AIS
120. anual installation sees 30 software modul6S u rr perire bi opa topo Ro REERVEN E SPP QU eEd 34 licenses from TNE iuo oo sa deese irt porre l Ee Db Re aodio poa Guy aed dios 3l FACE SCS DES aesceentieceseeobbreuboseibsesitistved esu ireo EEES 3l licens me dita oiera dos oda Ede Di epuacub t a MEE 30 light Sectors display vue adescesvedes esr kr nta et ova tau ma eraat eser eaa 129 lines of position fix csoctiiivevexit bete ite eroi Ie pared eei tot bindet uds 117 accept observed position sssseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeees 120 calculate observed position eesssss 120 enter observation results sess 119 set advanced parameters ccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 121 Set reference DOLES ui soie pe rri nies eh obe ea RF Ee ap bou ga dp Eae 118 log book de lete PISA NS IT TTE 173 Nu CT n 173 Maport pane errereen RR 173 DAC Ke A E E E A 174 NT ye WR 171 look ahead Window cccccccceceeeceeecccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 re CLOOALC ET 171 manual chart updates 001 1198 ENIRO RT 58 manual eenst cec eoi dod oni Vo dace a e 30 manual route planning create hew TOUTE Pr c 72 EE a E i e E E EE E A 74 Plot Way OILS sete ce ateediaotelcea edet eoe E a e eaae 73 manual updates BICC ODE e M 59 edit Chart ODIOCIS totos siete tis diee ora ba Eua ce ERE aoe ben 62 EGIT MEC S aeccsstvaisesdiodIsLesi etes E EPUM RUE 62 PE OUNCE
121. aring label checkbox is set the planned bearing to the next waypoint will be displayed on each leg of the route If the Speed label checkbox is set the planned speed to the next waypoint will be displayed on each leg If the WOL checkbox is set the wheel over line is displayed at the next waypoint The wheel over line marks the position of the course change The WOL line is only displayed in the next waypoint and is parallel to the next leg 7 7 2 Route Monitoring Panel After the voyage start the Route Monitoring panel opens In the panel information about the route is displayed gt The following route monitoring data are displayed in the Route Monitoring panel Route name Name of the route that is being monitored Mig Number of the next waypoint and number of waypoints in the ARENDAL MARSTRAND 11 18 Name Name of the next waypoint No name TTG Time to go from the current own ship position to the next 9h 34min waypoint 13h 31min Ifthe indicator is green the own ship proceeds in the direction 05 23 2009 02 12 of the next waypoint 94 688 NM m 119 2 If the indicator is red the own ship proceeds in the direction inverse to the direction of the next waypoint or does not move 119 2 at all 67 071 NM 0 007 Nm waypoint 11 TTA Time to arrival from the current own ship position to the end ETA Estimated time and date of arrival to the end waypoint 9h 34min 01 27 2009 02 12 DTG Dista
122. ary Chart Info section and check the Piracy Information data section For more details see chapter 5 6 3 Supplementary Data There are two types of piracy information objects a point Piracy Attempt object a skull and cross bones symbol x and an area Piracy Note object To get information about a piracy object right click it and find the object in the Object Information tab that will open gt The following types of Piracy Attempt objects exist e Hijack marked with a red skull and cross bones symbol L e Armed robbery Armed assault marked with an orange skull and cross bones symbol L e Attempted boarding marked with a blue skull and cross bones symbol L e Suspicious approach marked with a green skull and cross bones symbol L The Piracy Information supplementary section requires separate licensing 8 To select a Piracy Attempt object place the mouse pointer exactly in the point where bones cross Last update December 11 2012 113 9 Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 NAVIGATION 7 1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track Position of the own ship can be monitored in the chart view The own ship symbol is displayed in the chart view in coordinates coming from the primary position source The elements of the own ship presentation in the chart view include the own ship symbol the prediction vector and the passed track Ground stabilized vector Water stabilized vector One minute mark O
123. ary Manual discrepancy between positions defined by primary position source and by manual observation LOP position fix 7 3 Heading Sources In the ECDIS you can use two ways to get the own ship heading e One or more external devices providing heading information compatible with the NMEA interface The devices should be registered in the ECDIS e Dead reckoning see chapter 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning Several devices providing the own ship heading data can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time One of the devices is used as a primary heading source and one as a secondary heading source To set a device as a primary or a secondary heading source do the following 1 Make sure that the device you want to set as a primary or secondary heading source is connected to the ECIDS and registered in the Config gt Input Output tab 2 Open the Navi Navigation Data tab Heading sources are configured in the Heading sources section All devices providing heading that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the available heading devices list dead reckoning DR is also on the list though it is not an external input device Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data past track and vector Reckoning Position Fix Ship Motion Mode Manual Center if Position Heading e omues sources Ship in center Primary heading source Chart Orientation Speed _Swapheadingsources Course Up Secondary heading source
124. as successfully terminated e Unknown the operation was not tested e Failed failure reason the operation testing failed due to some reason the reason of failure is given in brackets Testing procedures depend on the communication type set in the Connection setup e Automatic connection types Internet HTTP E Mail SMTP POP3 E Mail Inbox via MAPI 1 Press the Test connection button 2 Test request will be sent and test response received and downloaded automatically 3 The procedure may take time but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed with your other activities When you open the Test Connection window next time you will see the status of the test e Semiautomatic connection types E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Press the Test connection button the test request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder 2 Send the test request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no When using an e mail connection make sure to configure settings correctly Connection settings configuration is a one time job that should be done by an IT specialist to ensure the right options and settings are used Last update December 11 2012 100 i is NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 You will receive the test response file in the response e mail save the file to the Receive folder 4 The ECDIS will load the test file automatically 5 The procedure may take
125. at show the depth of waters as well as land boundaries and other obstructions Charts may be paper or electronic and electronic charts may be of raster or vector type Chart License Chart Licenses unlock a Chart region Each license is made up of 16 digits laid out in the following convention 1234 1234 1234 1234 Closest Point of Approach CPA Predicted closest point a maneuvering boat will get relative to any target moving or otherwise located at a point on the relative movement line perpendicular to the reference ship The minimum horizontal distance between two crafts during a close proximity encounter COG See Course Over Ground 195 SAY MARINE COM Port The interface through which the ECDIS can communicate with peripherals Visual series support 32 COM Ports Course The direction a boat is being steered Course Over Ground COG Is the track of the ship over the ground and is based on position changes CPA See Closest Point of Approach Cross Track Error XTE The distance of a perpendicular line drawn from the ship to an active route leg Determines how much the ship is straying from the course of a Route Current The flow of water characterized by direction and speed Current speed and direction may change with the tide See also Ebb Current and Flood Current Dangerous Target Tracked radar or reported AIS target with a predicted CPA and TCPA that violates values preset by the user The r
126. ata storage device with the S 57 updates data to your system Open the Data Import S57 tab Press the Find databases button The ECDIS will search for S 57 data on all removable data storage devices connected to the system All detected S 57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S 57 source data pane In the Database Name drop down list select the name of the database that will be updated Select the S 57 exchange set with updates to the database in the S57 source data pane Press the Convert button Converted data will be added to the data contained in the specified database V Databases created by conversion are encrypted for the eToken dongle inserted to your computer at the moment of conversion These databases can only be used with this same dongle or a dongle of a dongles group to which it belongs Last update December 11 2012 39 CNAvwARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 5 CHARTS DISPLAY Chart databases consist of a number of charts These charts are electronic copies of regular paper charts However working with the electronic charts you don t have to prepare a next chart and plot the own ship position on it while working with another chart at the same time as it happens when working with paper charts Electronic charts are combined into Zones Areas and Cells You can purchase licenses for any set of the Zones Areas and Cells you need Depending on the set of Zones Areas and Cells you have a continuous c
127. ate Select the retransmission communication channel and the channel baud rate from the corresponding drop down lists Use the function if you want to retransmit received AIS messages to other computers connected to your computer through a network Time Out The timeout before an alarm is given after the signal from the device is lost Ignore CRC When receiving sentences from a device cyclic redundancy code CRC is used to check the sentences checksum If an error in checksum is detected an alarm is given and displayed in the Alarm conditions indicator and the sentence is not received To ignore CRC errors for a device check the Ignore CRC checkbox If the checkbox is set an alarm is still given in case of a CRC error but the sentence is received NOTE if an io lines xml configuration file is used the Communication line Baud rate and Retransmission line Baud rate settings are replaced with the Communication line name and Retransmission line name settings To set both of the settings select an option from the drop down lists Talker Setup Ed Talker Setup Listen For Device Name lv Device Type Position Device Talker ID Communication line name Retransmission line name M Timeout 10 Ignore CRC v Figure 8 Talker Setup dialog interface for the io lines xml configuration file 3 In the Listen For section check the message types which the ECDIS application will listen to and parse If no messa
128. ather Subscription window The subscription was not found message 3 Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 Press the Request Subscription button 2 In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup subscription request will be sent and subscription received and downloaded automatically 37 You are asked to download subscription information when you start downloading weather data for the first time no matter which downloading option you are using Last update December 11 2012 86 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the subscription request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 2 3 4 Press the Request Subscription button the subscription request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx xml Send the subscription file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive the subscription file in the
129. ation Test diagram is provided to enable the mariner to verify that his display screen still retains the color differentiation capability needed to distinguish between the various color coded areas lines and point symbols of the ECDIS display The Color Test should be applied on the day and dusk color palettes see chapter 7 5 3 Chart Display Palettes Before the Color Test diagram is used the black adjust symbol SY BLKADJ should be brought up on the screen and the contrast and brightness controls or equivalent controls for an LCD should be adjusted in a specific way To bring up the black adjust symbol do the following 1 Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered see chapter 4 1 Installing and Displaying Database and added to the view see chapter 4 1 2Displaying Database 2 Open the Data gt Chart Catalogue tab In the databases drop down list select the ChartletsBase database Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop down list 3 Double click on the AA5C1AB2 dataset the dataset contains the black adjust symbol The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset The black adjust symbol will be displayed in the chart view 4 f you can t see the black adjust symbol make sure the following arrangements are made a the display type is set to All other the display type indicator is All other ET b the chart presentation type is set to S5
130. ation about a tide you should select it To select a tide right click on it in the chart or find it in the tidal stations list and select it there Information about the tide is displayed in the Tide Info section Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor iv Switch Tides On Off Tide Info UTC Time MESI Time Zone UTC 05 00 Graph High Low Water Water Levels 2009 10 02 13 58 Play Tide Type Semi Diurnal aes rr UMN 0 8 n mi above entrance Allowa 1 From High Water 01h 32m 130th Street Hudson River j AAN ENERE E 2 5 miles above mouth Little Sa From Low Water 07h 40m LA TEN BENI PEINE Current Water Level 1 47m i ATTN TS 1 3 miles above A1A highway bridg FTI TIT IT TINY 37th Avenue Long Island City Ez 0 247 13 15 17 19 21 23 1 Results In UTC UTC 2009 10 03 02 23 Water Height 1 5m Figure 89 Info gt Tides Info tab 3 After the tide has been found information about it as well as the information about a tidal stream can be displayed for any date and time To set the date and time use the time configuration tool the same for Tides Info and Streams Info panels Using the tool you can do the following actions UTC Time Current Time 30 07 2008 13 20 lt Play Figure 90 Time setting e Choose the time type UTC Time or Lo
131. ay of chart elements in the chart view Chart elements that can be displayed selectively are divided into four groups depth elements text elements light sectors and other elements To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Other settings tab In the tab there is a list of chart elements Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors iv Plain borders INFORM symbol Quality symbol Picture symbol Safety contour 5 0 NTEULUN Safety depth 2 0 2 0 2 Low accuracy ind Textdscr symbol s iv NOAA navaids Overscale id iv ENC boundary Scale boundary iv Chart boundary Lat Lon grid Use SCAMIN Shallow contour Deep contour 10 0 Set Parameters Figure 53 Chart 2 Chart Presentation Other settings tab 2 To display an element in the chart view set the checkbox to the left from the element name to hide the element from the chart view clear the checkbox There are the following elements in the Other settings tab Plain borders Turns on the display of borders of various special areas caution areas deep water areas etc as plain dashed lines The setting only works for the S 52 presentation INFORM symbol Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the Informatio
132. be configured through the Setup Connection function To configure connection do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Setup Connection option from the drop down menu The Setup Connection dialog will open Setup Connection X Communication type Data center Timeout s Attachment size Kb File parameters Remove after download Figure 118 Setup Connection window 2 Set the communication type select the communication type in the Communication type drop down list You can choose between HTTP Internet and e mail connection To comply with different ship or office communication set ups you are offered four e mail connection types SMTP POP3 Inbox via MAPI Folder Send Recv and Manually via Attachment See detailed description of all communication connections further on in the manual Last update December 11 2012 97 CNAVMARINGE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 Set the data center set the center on the continent where you are now to have data transferred faster Select the data center in the Data center drop down list So far only the Europe data center is available please check for other available centers later Set the timeout time period during which the answer from weather data server is awaited relevant for HTTP SMTP POP3 and Inbox via MAPI connections Enter the timeout value in seconds to the Timeout field Set the attachmen
133. bitrary number of windows can be opened in this way The last of them stays marked with orange frame on the title bar and on the chart To close all open windows at a time press the Close displays Figure 190 Dangerous target indication When the distance between an AIS target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous approach set in the Config gt AIS tab the target is assigned the dangerous target status and changes its style it becomes red and starts flashing To stop the target flashing select it in the targets table in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab and press the Acknowledge button The target still has the dangerous target style but stops flashing To acknowledge all dangerous targets press the Acknowledge all button Sorting AIS targets on the target list The function has been implemented to sort AIS targets on the list on the Info AIS monitor tab according to a user defined criterion To do so select a criterion on the list as shown in Figure 188 e Order inflow Targets are sorted by the first incoming message time Dist to target Dist to dangerous target Dangerous targets stand higher on the list than safe ones CPA TCPA 9 New feature in 5 0 84 program version New feature in 5 0 84 program version Last update December 11 2012 141 CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Targets are sorted by the value of CPA current CPAqmin TCPA current TCPAqis
134. branch of the connection parameters tree e Send folder Send path is the folder where data requests are saved as xml files The files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml you are not allowed to change request file names After a request file is generated and saved send it as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no Weather data will be sent to you attached to the response e mail e Receive folder Receive path is the folder where weather data files received from the data center should be saved The ECDIS checks the Receive folder periodically and when the program finds data files there it loads the weather package automatically The loaded weather package is added to the Weather Packages window E Setup Las Communication type E Mail Folder Send Ri Data center Europe Timeout 5 120 Attachment size Kb 1000 Folder parameters Send path C Documents and Sel Receive path C Documents and Set J Remove after download a Figure 121 Setup Connection window E Mail Folder Send Receive communication type Last update December 11 2012 99 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt E Mail Manually via Attachment Manual connection type If you use the E Mail Manually via Attachment e mail connection option you will have to send request files and receive and install weather packages manually In this case request file is generated when you press the Send Request button in the
135. button and confirm the operation The following route monitoring options can be set in the Route Start Voyage tab e To set a pre turn warning switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre turn warning field Within the specified time from the course shift point the Voyage indicator in the indicators panel see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel will switch to the WOP Warn state the indicator color will become orange e To set a pre turn acknowledgement switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre turn acknowledgement field Within the specified time from the wheel over position the Voyage indicator in the indicators panel see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel will switch to the WOP Ack state the indicator color will become red e To be able to see tooltips when moving the mouse pointer over a waypoint in the chart view switch to the Settings tab and check the WPT tooltips checkbox e To reverse the route so that the end point becomes the start point press the Reverse Route button and confirm the operation To restore the route initial direction outpress the Reverse route button and confirm the operation Last update December 11 2012 135 i NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS If the WPT labels checkbox is set waypoint labels are displayed on the route in the route monitoring mode If the checkbox is not set the Bearing label and the Speed label options are not available If the Be
136. buttons with the names of parameters you want to display Weather Weather Weather a E Ean Modei Presentation Alarm Area Une Packages uU E LL w Hour aem ee cere OE TBESERE Figure 124 Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab weather parameters buttons 3 The data are displayed using symbols that are described in the legend for every meteorological 4 parameter To open the legend of a parameter select it in the Meteo Parameters table and press the Legend button To select the type of symbols to be used for the display of a specified weather parameter in the Meteo Parameters table tick checkboxes corresponding to the symbol types for the parameter the Area Cont Symb or Text field e Area tinting of areas 58 38 268 N 008 01 611 E Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather 4 OGIex Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Nam rea Time Series Packages Date 15 02 2009 00 002 Sunday Go Today J M 4 gt DI Step fi Hour Weather Legend nots ka Total waves Figure 125 Display of the wind strength using the Area type symbols Last update December 11 2012 102 TT NAYVMARING LM e Cont isolines Weather Weather Weather Weather User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 55 08 027 N012 31 361 E 4 amp hhex Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 15 02
137. cal Time in the time type drop down list Local Time is the difference between the UTC Time and the Time Zone e Set the date and time for calculation of tides and streams characteristics set the date and time in the date and time field under the time type drop down list e Make the current date and time the date and time for calculation of tides and streams characteristics To do so press the Current Time button The date and time field will became grayed and the value in the field will SUSULU k change to the current date and time value Figure 91 Selecting time type for tides information e Results of tides and streams calculation can be presented either in UTC time or in local time formats Select the time format for the tides information in the drop down list in the lower left corner of the Tide Info section 4 To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated in the chart view press the Play button Each new position of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period 5 Tide Info Displays tide or stream information in the selected station General tides information includes the following parameters e Time Zone The time difference between standard local time of tide location and UTC e Tide Type Can be Diurnal Mixed Diurnal Mixed Semi Diurnal and Semi Diurnal e From High Water Time passed from the last high water event Last update December 11 2012 81
138. cal point This field depends on the D T choice Remark Here you can enter the critical point information To delete a critical point right click on it 8 To print the CP table out press the Print CP button The CP table will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print 9 To save changes press the Save button All changes will be saved and the route edit mode will be switched off 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule The route schedule is created together with the route itself Times of navigation between waypoints are calculated using the distance between the points and the own ship speed parameters You can edit the route schedule entries change time of departure and allocate time for stops in waypoints To edit the route schedule do the following 1 Open the Route gt Route Planning tab select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route edit mode 2 Inthe route edit mode switch to the Schedule table Now you can edit the route schedule Start Route Go To Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import _Rowtenane From Por TI Se a Stn al ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria Print Schedule Charts Check Route Parameters WPT CP Schedule Only named WP Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m Stopdur Speed
139. cate the location where the file will be saved enter the file name and press the Save button The request configuration will be saved to an x xml file To download a previously saved request configuration press the Load Request button in the Open dialog select the request configuration file and press the Open button The request configuration will be loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog After the request has been configured you can download data Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server Last update December 11 2012 93 2 3 i is NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 2 3 4 Press the Send Request button A data request file will be
140. ced parallel to the in sight line between the vessels and drawn from the tip of target s true vector can be regarded as a collision danger line CDL in true motion Figure 200 PPC PPG NL E wo M PPC act E M LN Mi n ii t Ls E Collision Danger Let Qan Were ee eee eme Eine remit equ mE Eus rcm mS IS UIS ISP ieee Target In sight Line Figure 200 Collision danger line in true motion display The CDL has a very simple interpretation if the tip of own ship s vector touches the CDL then a direct collision threat exists and the vessels will collide if the speed and course are maintained Likewise any maneuver change of course and or speed that deflects the end of own ship s velocity vector away from the CDL is a potential evasive maneuver Figure 201 Figure 203 um ET 7 P in Ay am i i lt lt lt ee nee ee ee Se m ore Own Ship oe Target Figure 201 Evasive action by change of own ship s course to starboard in order to pass astern of target Last update December 11 2012 151 NAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS a i eee a a Own Ship e Target Figure 202 Evasive action by decrease of own ship s speed in order to pass astern of target Own Ship e Target Figure 203 Evasive action by a combination of change of own ship s course and decrease of speed in order to pass astern of target Last update December 11 2012 152 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARI
141. ck on the entry to highlight it in the chart view Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab To edit the object attributes press the Attributes Edit button The Attributes pane will open where you can edit the object attributes After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there the object appearance will change to reflect the attributes changes and the Modified action Modified Will be added to the object actions list To edit the object metrics press the Metrics Edit button The Metrics pane will open where you can edit the object metrics The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there the object will be moved to the new position the object symbol in the previous position will be crossed with a red line and the Moved action will be added to the object actions list To delete the object press the Delete button Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there the object will marked as deleted in the char
142. course The deviation from the route XTE is more than the set value Own ship is too far from the route DevEx The indicator notifies that the own ship is approaching a waypoint Set the time before the waypoint at which the ECDIS will notify you using the Pre turn Warning setting in the Route gt Start Voyage gt Settings tab OP The indicator also notifies that own ship is approaching a waypoint The indicator is supposed to prompt the mariner to start turning Set the time before the waypoint using the Pre turn Acknowledgement setting in the Route gt Start Voyage gt Settings tab D Last update December 11 2012 11 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Own ship is at the waypoint and must turn to take the next leg course Own ship does not move or moves in the direction opposite to the direction of the route Own ship reached the voyage destination point gt System Warnings indicator has the following states The System Warnings indicator notifies the user about the caution conditions see chapter 7 6 Alarms There are no caution conditions currently If the cautions indicator is yellow there is a caution condition To view caution conditions left click on the indicator The Alarms and Cautions panel will open Alarms indicator has the following states The Alarms indicator notifies the user about the ala
143. cssececceeeeeeceeseeeceeuseceeuseeessageeessagseeesageeesssneenenes 125 7 4 1 PP OW OM ise NER T T TU TEE 125 7 4 2 Pete tie DAt SOU CC cT ETHER 126 7 4 3 Aa aO DA n P TEREEEREN 126 lo Navigatonalcharnt Sh m 127 1 5 1 UU IW ss NR UR TNT PL Pp 127 nov BES cl MOOG NE RINT Rm EO seats 127 finas Chart Display PalelleS8 nid reekt bd redu ttt eran dx pad rei be rug rtc eri Rid ves b eut i emu dd Rid iaa v 128 7 5 4 Chart Orientation sc ccc bin ayed rmdir Gethin ent yi ctbdalaerehdodeteareerololeruebnednndreddngmemncenebiaretibdied 128 5 9 Tr e and Relative MOHON wate nscinsetsinareda cane tandvaindi ania nuidienmudicatanridedstacumuinanuudanentaaiantiiatieeniaet 129 7 5 6 E EE e RTT ERE narra T OQ DI A A A AAA ATTE TY 129 C 43 e E E E E A E A O 130 1 6 1 Alarms and rcg Te Sl AI Ne TII T EO DLL LIES 191 17 6 2 Anu rondin A T snae e a EE e a R ert Gi 132 17 6 3 c qnccem TEILTE 133 7 6 4 cune ense 8 c orco 134 JE WOU BNC ON garcia race pores mmm 135 41 Route Monitoring Mode 2 maa darcitenat iue bai d vibe pudore nina dee dr nd vnde don 135 f l 2 Route MONKtOnNNG FP ANG INNER TETTE E TTE TT 136 ito Iso TO WayPoint a0 p s DTE e aras nen nee enon ae Sereno ree renee nara eee meee Sree merece tee eran rere 137 NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOLS sess nnnm nenne n nnns nnns nnns 138 OMNEM E SIT M SSmo TERES 138 DEPO R 13
144. ction of LOPs measured later 2 Three reference points with bearing difference of 120 two reference points are equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship distance to the 3 reference point is twice as long as to the first two time of measurement is the same Figure 245 Three reference points bearing difference is 1205 one reference point is at a double distance from DR position than the other two Last update December 11 2012 192 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The observed position moves to the intersection of the more accurate LOPs the accuracy ellipse major axis is perpendicular to the less accurate LOP Figure 246 Observed position near the intersection of the more accurate LOPs 3 Two of the three reference points equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship have a small difference between bearings 1347 1347 1347 Figure 247 Three reference points equally distant from DH position small angle between bearing lines of two points Last update December 11 2012 193 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The observed position is situated near the intersection of LOPs with the angle between them closer to 90 the accuracy ellipse major axis is aligned with LOPs intersecting at a smaller angle Figure 248 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs with the angle closer to 90 Last update December 11 2012 194 SAY MARI
145. current chart scale is not twice as large or as small as the original chart scale for Normal scl example the original scale is 1 100 000 and the current scale is 1 75 000 The current chart scale is twice as large as the original chart scale for example the original scale is 1 100 000 and the current scale is 1 50 000 Over scl The current chart scale is twice as small as the original chart scale for example the original scale is 1 100 000 and the current scale is 1 200 000 Underscl gt Scale Status indicator has the following states The Scale Status indicator shows if there are charts of larger scale for the current own ship position The indicator operates only when in navigation mode The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area and the best scale mode is on see chapter 7 5 2 Best Scale Mode To turn the best scale mode off left click on the indicator Best scl The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area but the best scale mode is off To Best scl turn the best scale mode on left click on the indicator There are larger scale charts for the area Larger scl Navigation Mode indicator has the following states The Navigation Mode indicator shows if the navigation mode is on or off Left click on the indicator to turn the Navigation mode on or off The indicator also shows other ECDIS modes that are currently on Navig The navigation mode is on
146. d the certificate requesting organization the Issued for field the certificate validity period the Valid from and the Valid till fields To close the window press the Close button Information about installed certificate Information about installed certificate Issued by IHO S 63 Scheme Administrator Issued for IHO S 63 Scheme Administrator Valid from 2003 09 01 Valid till 2013 08 29 Figure 32 Information about installed certificate window In case an error occurred during operations with SA certificate the error message will be displayed in the Message log pane 4 5 2 Large Media Support In case S 57 data are provided using large media you can use the large media support functionality of the ECDIS to work with the data To convert S 57 data to CM93v3 format using large media support do the following 1 2 Insert the large media device to the computer Open the Data gt Import S57 tab Enter a name of the database to be created by S 57 data conversion to the Database Name field and press the Install Media button The Install Media window will open Press the Find Media button to load media information to the system Available media will be listed in the Available Media pane The following information about media is provided media name media contents and media location Select a media in the list to see additional information and installation instructions in the Instructions pane Available Media
147. d and other vessel movement characteristics as well as the data about the surrounding conditions are received using special navigation devices such as positioning devices gyro devices and other sensors input devices The data received from the input devices is processed and presented in the ECDIS application The data can also be transmitted to other devices such as autopilot ARPA display and others output devices For the data to be received and transmitted by the ECDIS application the input and output sensors must be connected to the system using the system COM and USB ports and registered in the ECDIS application 3 1 1 Adding editing and deleting input output devices IMPORTANT The input output configuration is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password The input output configuration requires separate licensing Make sure that the ECDIS I O license for the software module is installed on your system Registration of input and output navigation devices is carried out in the Config gt Input Output tab To register a device add it to the Talkers list Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Tool Ship Output and Time Setup AIS Targets Talkers Talker Name TalkerType TalkerID Line Description Timeout Mnemonic Filter Gyro TCP IP port 2002 10 sec HDT ROT Speed Log TCP IP port 2003 10 sec ARPA TCP IP port 2008 10 sec Echo Sounder TCP IP port 2005 10 sec Line Mo
148. d for offshore navigation To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Destination approached The alarm notifies that a control point on the route is being approached see chapter 6 4 5 Adding Critical Points The alarm message will indicate the number and the name of the control point To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Man Over Board An alarm is activated when the MOB button is pressed The alarm is deactivated after the click on the alarm message but the message is displayed for 20 seconds in any case Exceed deviation The deviation of the own ship from the route exceeds the XTE cross track error set for the route in the route plan see chapter 6 4 4 Houte Plan The alarm is deactivated when the own ship returns to the XTE limits Invalid sensor data Data coming from one of external sensors are invalid Non WGS 84 Datums The chart currently displayed in the chart view has other than WGS 84 coordinates system If the positioning device defines the own ship position in WGS 84 coordinates and the chart has a different coordinates system the own ship position in the chart view may be wrong If the alarm is activated it is recommended to introduce a position correction in the Config gt Input Output tab see chapter 7 2 4 Position Correction The alarm is deactivated when a WGS 84 chart will be displayed in the chart view Target lost An ARPA target is lost The alarm is generated if the targe
149. d in both views 5 5 2 3D Window The 3D window displays the chart area that is currently on the screen as a 3 dimensional model To open the 3D window do the following 1 Open the Chart Chart Settings tab 2 In the New Window section press the 3D button The 3D window will open 3D Window Figure 41 3D Window The 3D Window can be expanded for a better 3D view and if required shown on a separate PC monitor To arrange the 3D view use the 3D window control buttons Li z Set view from ship Sets the view from the own ship This mode is available only if the ship is inside the chart view and the 3D window borders Show hide vertices Displays hides vertices the points on which the 3D picture is built Show hide wireframe Displays hides the lines connecting the 3D picture vertices see above Show hide colored Z layers When this option is on all depths are divided into 10 layers from the minimum depths to the surface The layers are displayed in different colors The palette for the layers presentation is selected in the Z colors panel see below When Z layers are hidden all depths are displayed in blue color but with different shades Show hide alarm area When this option is on all depths shallower than the safety contour are marked with red color Show hide water surface Displays hides the water surface which is represented as a blue plane 2 The Synchronize function do
150. d the state where it was plotted after the selected action To cleat the highlight press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel 8 To reject an update select the updated object in the objects list press the Reject button and confirm the operation The object will return to its state before the update 9 You can reject all updates applied to a dataset To do so select the dataset in the datasets list press the Reject button and confirm the operation All updates objects of the dataset will return to their initial states If you reject all updates applied to the Extrascale dataset the dataset will be deleted To add a manual update to the chart do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab 2 Inthe databases drop down list select a database to which you want to add a manual update 3 Press the Add New button The Add New Object dialog will open Type Point C Line C Area Search Find cQ Obstructions and foul areas d Obstructions in general d Snags stumps a Wellheads a Diffusers a fish havens s foul areas From Notice to Mariner Figure 59 Chart Manual Update tab Add New Object dialog You can t reject a single action only all actions performed with an object or all the objects updated in a dataset Last update December 11 2012 59 CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 4 Select an object from the objects list To find an object use
151. dard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Waypoint identifiers listed in order with starting waypoint first for the identified route Two modes of transmission are provided c indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted w indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been reached FROM while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently heading for TO and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route SCRIBE atl 0242 83 0 C Cl aces 6 c c7 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Last update December 11 2012 182 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Total number of messages being transmitted Message number Ee s Additional waypoint identifiers gt SGD Position accuracy estimate Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs Estimate of position accuracy based on geometric dilution of precision GDOP and system noise in feet and nautical miles Limited utility no recommended replacement S SGD x xl N2 x x3 4 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Wumemmeanm 00 M meme 000 THS True heading and status Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading This sentence includes a mode indicator field providing critical safety related information about the headi
152. defines the time scale during playing For example if the replay speed is x2 events will be replayed two times faster than they happened in reality If you want the play back to be cyclical check the Cycle playback checkbox To start the play back press the Start Play Back button After pressing the Start Play Back button and confirming that you really want to switch the Playback Mode on in the upper left corner of the chart area a large letter R Replay appears informing you that you are in the Playback Mode Also under the Indicators panel a special Replay panel appears Figure 238 Replay panel The chart window will display position and scale equal to those during sailing Date and time corresponding to the playback events are displayed in the Replay panel In the right part of the panel position course and speed of the own ship are shown Position of the own ship on the chart also corresponds to the replay time The buttons on the Replay panel are the following gt Play If the Cycle playback checkbox is ticked playback will be resumed from the first record otherwise replay will be stopped after reaching the last record O Stop 4 gt gt Step back forward buttons allow viewing the ship s movement step by step id 91 To begin To end buttons go to the first or last logbook record amp Switch playback off button switches the Playback Mode off Pressing the button is Last update December 11 2012 174 i
153. der where to save the log book page and press the OK button In the selected folder a Logbook folder is created and the log book page is saved to this folder The log book page is saved as two files the name of the files is the date of the page and extensions are 1bk and 1bt UTERE Select folder to export log book to subfolders with log book name will be automatically created NEW VOLUME E Refresh devices tree OK Figure 235 Export day log book dialog 15 To import a log book page press the Import button The Import day log book dialog will open In the dialog select the folder where the log book file is stored In the pane next to the folder tree pane the list of all log book pages in the selected folder will be displayed Select a page press the OK button and confirm the operation The log book page will be imported to the log book and available for display and playback x Select log book file to import E NEW VOLUME E 20090326 Ibk Logbook 20090401 Ibk Logbook 20090508 Ibk Refresh devices tree ok Cancel Figure 236 Import day log book dialog 71 This function creates a route from all the recorded own ship positions of the log book in view Each point of the track will become a waypoint in the created route This may be useful in order to sail the same route later or to export the route to another system This function when used in the track log provides the possibility to set time interval fo
154. detected databases are listed in the Available databases pane name and issue number Currently registered databases are displayed in the Registered DB list Char Add Remove Dynamic Auto Import Datab Catalogue Database 0 9 Asi are Updating 57 Registered DB Available databases ChartletsBase Issue 1 l i Professional Issue 381 Professional Issue 380 TestBase Issue 1 Check integrity Check signature Unregister database Find databases Register database Check signature Figure 26 Data Databases tab current version database in the Registered DB list new version database in the Available databases list 3 Select the new version database in the Available databases list and press the Register database button In this example it will show the message The database Professional issue 380 already registered Do you want to update it with database Professional issue 381 Press the YES button 4 The old version of the database will be overwritten with the new version The new version is registered and added to the view automatically 4 4 Licensing Software Modules The ECDIS application includes functional modules that require individual licensing These modules are Import S 57 Anticollision Ship Model and ECDIS Input Output e Import S 57 module performing import of cartographic data from the S 57 format to the CM93v3 format e Anticollision
155. dinates Move waypoint To change the position of a plotted waypoint click with the left mouse button on the waypoint it will be captured by the mouse pointer Move the waypoint to a new position and release it by clicking with the LEFT mouse button once more Insert waypoint before the first one Move the mouse pointer over the first waypoint The line marker will be linked to it instead of the last waypoint Left click to plot a new point before the first one The new waypoint becomes the first waypoint of the route Move the mouse pointer over the last waypoint wait for the line marker to link the last waypoint and the pointer and resume adding waypoints from the last one Insert waypoint between two existing waypoints In order to insert a waypoint between two existing waypoints move the mouse pointer over the leg between them a special symbol will appear Left click in the new position a new waypoint will be created the waypoint is attached to the pointer Choose the waypoint position and left click to plot the waypoint Delete waypoint To delete a waypoint move the mouse pointer over it The line marker will NI disappear and a special symbol will be displayed Right click on the waypoint to delete it Panning and zooming in or out While you are in the Edit mode any left click plots a new point To pan the chart view move the mouse pointer to the window border in the direction you want to move the chart view
156. ding weather forecasts with one Click This option allows downloading of all weather products listed in your subscription Configure weather download request using the Setup Easy Mode function After the request is configured you can order data by simply pressing the Download button in the Weather Presentation Easy Mode or Weather Packages panels To download weather data using the Easy Mode option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 10 12 2005 15 07 Wednesday Go Today Forecast for Download v Settings Expand info gt gt ImportJWP Figure 103 Weather Weather Presentation Easy Figure 104 Weather Weather Packages Mode Download button Download button 2 Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request confirmation dialog 2 In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in t
157. distance 0 000 NM a EE EN EE REN RENE ERN EN Figure 77 Route gt Route Planning tab creating a new route Last update December 11 2012 72 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 4 After all waypoints and route information have been added press the Save button to save the route To save the route under a different name press the Save as button enter the new name to the Save route as dialog and press OK To plot waypoints of the route in the chart view do the following Plot waypoint in the chart view Left click in the chart view A waypoint number 1 in an orange circle will be plotted in the chart view Move the pointer and you will see a thin red line linking the point and the mouse pointer The line marker can be useful for checking the leg and the second waypoint position To plot the next waypoint left click in a new position in the chart view The second waypoint 2 will appear The next left click will plot the next waypoint and so on Add waypoint to the waypoints table To add a waypoint to the route using the keyboard enter the waypoint latitude and longitude to the LAT and LON fields of the WPT table To do so Left click in the LAT field of the WPT table to start entering the latitude the 00 00 000 value will appear enter your value for the waypoint latitude using the keyboard Then enter the waypoint longitude to the LON field The waypoint will appear in the chart view in the set coor
158. dynamic licensing information credit value collection keys and next mandatory report date is written to the eToken 5 n case of an ECDIS cluster the dynamic licensing information is distributed over the network to all nodes 6 After the subscription has been activated the following information is displayed in the Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab e credit rest in the Credit Rest field the credit rest value is sent to you each time you receive updates e next mandatory report date in the Next Report Date field Last update December 11 2012 32 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e last confirmation date in the Last Confirmation Date field e the list of databases available for dynamic licensing in the Available Databases list e the list of collections available for dynamic licensing in a specified database in the Available Collections list the collections are listed in your subscription Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic Dose Auto Import Licensing Catalogue Database Updating 57 lv Enable Dynamic Licensing Available Collections Non reported Reported Available Databases null Code 0x10000 Type 0x8 Nc rg null Code 0x80000 Type 0x8 datasets datasets Credit Rest 4986 Next Report Date 08 eepaaa 2009 Confirmation Date 05 deepaaa 2009 Refresh Figure 25 Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab data displayed after the service activation To view charts using dyna
159. e CPA limit circle Figure 208 This solution can be found by utilizing the ARPA Trial Maneuver functionality Target Relative Vector Figure 208 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit Change of own ship s course in order to pass astern of target with selected CPA limit i e extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle The solution to pass a distance equal selected safety margin CPA limit ahead of target is shown by a course change to port Figure 209 Target ai i P Ownwghip BENE ME is m Vector Figure 209 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit Change of own ship s course in order to pass ahead of target with selected CPA limit i e extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle Last update December 11 2012 155 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Figure 208 and Figure 209 show that a sector shaped region can be imagined in the relative motion display Figure 210 Li f T A i 4 PPC F i F h Fr s Fd M F 1 F F gp P a F s F a d F k k F me Fa k F i 5 Fr 5 mE EE E Hee ee ee ee Eee ee p tm oa ee a ee x i E m o T M ee Vector Figure 210 Sector shaped collision danger region as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an ARPA radar with safe passing distance set by the VRM radius from centre of own ship This imagined region in the relative disp
160. e Log checkbox if you want all received messages to be written to a log file C ECDISDATA Debug LineMonitor txt 4 Press the Start button the button label will change to Stop If messages are being received they are displayed in the window what you see is AIS messages in the official format To clear the window press the Clear Monitor button 6 To stop monitoring press the Stop button To close the Line Monitor window press the Close button 3 2 Own Ship Data IMPORTANT The own ship data configuration is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password However the own ship current draft can be changed without the password provided no other own ship parameter has been changed Last update December 11 2012 18 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Configuring operating parameters of the own ship is very important for the correct functioning of the system The own ship parameters are configured in the Config gt Own Ship tab Here you can introduce parameters of the own ship and set precise location of various devices onboard Alarm Anti Collision EJ Input Units fle x Picea Setup Tool Ship Output and Time Own ship setup Position of instruments AIS Targets Tmax max draft 7 0 m T current draft 5 0 m LOA max length 20 0 B max beam 4 0 m m Hm max height 5 0 m Turn radius starboard 100 0 m m Conning station Hb
161. e Look ahead View will open The look ahead window properties are the same as those of the main window The properties are set in the tabs of the Chart panel The properties are set for the chart window which is currently selected To select a chart window use the Look Ahead and Monitor buttons that appear in the upper right corner of the panel after you have opened the look ahead window The Chart Scale panel of the Look ahead View differs from that of the main chart view e In the Scale field the chart view scale and the over scale factor are displayed 1 97628 x10 The over scale factor shows in how many times the chart view scale is larger or smaller than the original chart scale 79 S 1 97628 e The Zoom In button doubles the Look ahead View scale and the Zoom Original Scale Out button halves it T ng Synchronize Last update December 11 2012 Figure 40 Chart Scale panel NAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e Inthe Scale edit field the scale of the Look ahead View is set enter the scale value and press the ENTER key The chart view scale will be changed e The Original Scale button sets the view scale to the value of the original scale of the chart that is displayed currently e The Ship on screen option scrolls the chart so that the own ship was in the view e The Synchronize button synchronizes the look ahead view and the main chart view so that the same geographic area is displaye
162. e a license only if it is issued for your System ID and only if the correct eToken is connected to the system The System ID information is available in the Data gt Licensing tab and in the Info gt System Info tab For details about ordering and purchasing licenses contact your charts supplier After the licenses have been obtained as a licenses file or as 16 digit license codes they must be installed on the system to enable the ECDIS application to decrypt and use the data for the chart database only the coverage for which you have purchased licenses can be displayed 4 2 1 Installing Licenses Manually You can install licenses manually if you have 16 digit license codes To install a license manually do the following 1 Open the Data gt Licensing tab 2 In the Databases drop down list select the database for which you are applying the license 3 Press the Add manually button to open the pane for manual licenses installation x Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic ortos Auto Import fl Catalogue Database Licensing Updating S57 System ID Databases C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Professional Data Set or Area Name Add License manually Display expired licenses before date H B ee Zone 1 Area 1 aaa a a a e i a at d i t a i e Zone 1 Area 10 Add Licenses from file mer Figure 22 Data gt Licensing tab Add Licenses manually 4 n the areas lis
163. e chart view The changes are applied to the chart dataset if the existing dataset objects are edited Objects edited or added with Manual Updating are displayed in the chart view as regular cartographic objects with a special symbol All changes made by the Manual Updating function are registered in the manual updating log The log is displayed in the Manual Update tab in the Updates History pane where you can view all the updates modification and reject any of them To view manual updates history do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab 2 In the databases drop down list select a database In the History pane below the history of manual updates applied to the specified database will be displayed The manual updates history is presented as a tree structure where the first level is the dataset to which the updates were entered the second level is the updated object and the third level is the list of actions applied to the object 77 When a new database issue is installed updates that have been included in the new issue of the database as regular objects will be automatically removed from the hard disk Last update December 11 2012 58 Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Professional Add New Metrics Edit Attributes Edit Delete Object Z14A3310 e Obstruction Category of obstruction wellhead Value of sou
164. e correction value enter Apply corrections the minus sign in front of the value Figure 159 Position After the correction has been entered or changed press Apply corrections Correction section The corrections are applied to the coordinates received from the positioning device and displayed in the navigational panel Ihe corrections are indicated with the plus and minus signs depending on the sign of the correction Positioning devices can transmit the DTM sentence in the NMEA format This sentence contains indication of the coordinates system of the device In this case check the DTM sentence checkbox when registering the device in the ECDIS With the DTM sentence the ECDIS receives the position correction automatically and you don t have to enter it manually Last update December 11 2012 123 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 2 5 Position Discrepancies When the own ship position is defined using more than one method there can be discrepancies between position values The discrepancies are displayed in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position discrepancies section Pri Sec 0 555 NM Position Discrepancies Pri Man e Primary Secondary discrepancy between positions coming from primary and secondary position sources displayed if the Show secondary checkbox in the Navi gt Navigation Data gt Position sources tab is checked Figure 160 Position discrepancies e Prim
165. e fails an alarm is triggered see chapter 7 6 Alarms and the secondary heading source becomes the primary source automatically 7 4 Navigational Data Display and Sources 7 4 1 Navigational Panel Information about the own ship position current speed and course and other navigational data coming from external devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab is displayed in the Navigational panel in the upper right corner of the screen gt Inthe Navigational panel the following data are displayed SHIP 20 24 12 2009 09 11 e SHIP The local ship time and date To display the UTC time left click on the date and time line and hold the mouse button When the 36 17 994 N button is released the local time is displayed again The offset 000 06 569 E between the local and the UTC time is set in the Config gt Units and S80G 10 0 kn Time tab ecos 315 0 eHpG 325 09 Kurs STW 8 0kn e Position source indicator The position source indicator shows which position source is being currently used to define the own ship appr 5 0m belowtrans position see chapter 7 2 Position Sources If the primary position swing 12 1kn 162 0 Disp source is used the indicator is green if the secondary position source agor 0 0 o is used the indicator is orange In the brackets near the device name reference position is indicated CCRP conning station POS the positioning device itself Data not assessed 5951 WGS 84
166. e local computer can only receive synchronization data from other local network computers and carry out synchronization but it cannot send synchronization data to other computers Stopped no synchronization is available the synchronization tool is stopped no synchronization data can be received or sent Ready to start synchronization the local computer is ready to receive synchronization data and carry out synchronization Waiting for remote synchronization to finish synchronization is in progress between remote computers of the local network and the local computer is waiting its turn for synchronization Synchronization in progress synchronization is running on the computer e Synchronization log in the Synchronization log tab messages informing about the synchronization process are displayed To clear the log window press the Clear log button e Tasks to perform the list of synchronization tasks the local computer is to perform if the task is performed successfully the task entry is removed from the Tasks to perform table and the message informing about the task completion appears in the Synchronization log if the task failed it is moved to the Failed tasks table and then after 3 minutes back to the Tasks to perform table The Tasks to perform table has the following fields Target the role of the target computer all computers with the indicated role will be sent synchronization data Last update
167. e of the object is set to any other value than surveyed The property is relevant for the following objects point land areas point and area wrecks and point and area obstructions Text descr symbol Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating objects with the Textual description attribute the description may contain for example an extraction from a MIS Last update December 11 2012 54 CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS pilot book e NOAA Navaids Turns on the display of symbols of Aids to Navigation created using the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration USA standards rather than the INT1 standard The setting only works for the C Map presentation e Overscale id Applies a dedicated vertical pattern to the chart or the part of it that is over scaled the chart display sale is twice more than the original scale of the chart e ENC boundary Turns on the display of borders of the ENC coverage e Scale boundary Turns on the display of borders of areas covered with charts of different scale levels e Chart boundary Turns on the display of chart borders e Lat Lon grid Turns on the display of the Lon Lat grid e Use SCAMIN Turns on the use of the SCAMIN minimum scale attribute of objects If the setting is on objects with the SCAMIN attribute are removed from the chart view once the chart view scale is less than the minimum scale of the object display 3
168. e original scale of the source chart A small arrow will point to the object that has been modified To clear the highlight press either the Clear Highlight button right above the updates list or the Clear Highlight button in the upper right corner of the Data panel 6 1 4 Manual Updating The Manual Updating function allows you to apply updates to the chart data manually The main source for updates is Notice to Mariners The updates included in the Notices to Mariners are normally included in the set of automatic updates However information about changes in the charts is published in the periods between the issues of Notices to Mariners through various channels The channels include NAVTEX NAVAREA and other navigational communications and warnings Using the Manual Updating you can apply the changes reported by official navigational organizations but not issued as Notices to Mariners yet Using the Manual Updates function you can add new objects to the chart data edit and delete existing objects Manual updates are registered in a separate chart layer that is not connected with existing charts it is an independent dataset called Extrascale dataset When the chart is prepared to be displayed in the chart view it is overlaid with data from the Extrascale dataset However if you when adding objects indicate that they are included in the Notices to Mariners the changes are applied to the chart dataset which is currently displayed in th
169. e own ship AIS transmitter as a positioning device check the Use own transmitter as source of position checkbox The transmitter will be added to the position sources list in the Position Source section of the Navi Navigation Data tab see chapter 7 2 1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources To view AIS symbols in true scale set the True scale symbol checkbox AIS targets are displayed in true scale if the following conditions are met a width of the own ship true scale symbol is more than 7 5mm b the AIS target is within the activation distance c the AIS target heading HDG and position reference point data are available Set the Distance to Dangerous the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as dangerous Press the Set button for the changes to take effect Set the Distance to Activation the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as active This value should be more than the distance to dangerous approach If the Distance to Activation field is inactive and you want to change the value check the Automatic Activation checkbox Press the Set button for the changes to take effect Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA TCPA to Dangerous section if the actual CPA or TCPA of the own ship and an AIS target are less than the set values the target is displayed as dangerous Press the Set button for the changes to take effect Set the AIS targets visibility range the distance from
170. e ship reaches the boundary the screen is redrawn and the ship is brought back to the Figure 173 Navi gt external boundary To configure the internal green boundary use the lower Navigation data tab slider in the Ship Redraw Area section Ship Redraw Area 5 After the ship redraw area has been set outpress the Set button to exit the ship section redraw area setup mode To turn on and setup the relative motion mode do the following 1 In the Navi Navigation Data tab press the Relative button in the Ship Motion Mode section In the relative motion mode the own ship symbol is stationary and the chart is moving 2 The own ship position can be set in the following ways a In the center tick the Ship in centre checkbox and the ship will always be in the center of the screen Manual Center Enable b Manually in the Manual Center panel check the Enable box to activate the manual selection of the fixed ship position Then press the Set button and in the chart view select the fixed ship position by left clicking in the Figure 174 Navi gt selected position the selection mode is indicated by a red frame around Navigation Data tab the chart view Manual Center section c Automatically if the Ship in center or the Enable manual center checkboxes are clear the own ship position in the chart view is set on the outer boundary of the own ship redraw area 7 5 6 Light Sectors The ECDIS allows displaying lig
171. e target R null otherwise ERN VBW Dual ground water speed Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Water referenced and a pest data VBW x x l X X MU uo A uec e x A hhecRS ng e rae tn e tla Longitudinal water speed astern knots Box Transverse water speed port knots not processed Ee TIUS NN NN a xx Longitudinal ground speed astern knots s fx Transverse ground speed port knots not processed A Segue A ai Veins reas Hox Stern transverse water speed port knots not processed A Se sonar pe Asana Vs mune ox Stern transverse ground speed port knots not processed NN Status transverse ground speed A data valid V data invalid VDM AIS VHF data link message Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of a received AIS message packet as defined in ITU R M 1371 and as received on the VHF Data Link VDL using the six bit field type The structure provides for the transfer of long binary messages by using multiple sentences Data messages should be transmitted in as few sentences as possible When a data message can be accommodated in a single sentence then it shall not be split VDM Xl X2 X3 a4 S85 xo hh lt CR gt lt LF gt e me Besson comens Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message 1 to 9 Sequential message identifier O to 9 EE Last update December 11 2012 185
172. e the complex diagnostics utility by pressing the Collect diagnostic info on the Info System info tab Figure 14 The results will re saved to a file named report nfo which you can view and or save to an external media To do the latter press the save diagnostic info and specify the file directory in the standard Browse for folders window that will then open Routes are synchronized automatically between Master and Backup computers You don t have to synchronize the data manually between these computers If changes in routes data were made on Master or Backup computers they have to be manually synchronized with Route Planning Station New feature in 5 0 84 program version Last update December 11 2012 26 m User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Name Size Packed Size Modified Ji logs 1384 321 1388032 2013 02 28 14 38 Diagnostics 29 222 29696 2013 02 28 14 38 ECDIS 5 0 xml 7 690 8192 2013 02 28 14 38 E report nfo 11 644 922 11644928 2013 02 28 14 38 Ea System Information File Edit View Help Report Summary CAUsersyANDE Name Value eba Name eToken PKI Client 5 1 Memory 3 File System H C H DA EA FA RA be UN Video Controller Processes Installation location C Program Files Alad Version 5 1 66 0 Major 5 Minor 1 Services PKI Infrastructure Windows Registry System Logs l eToken PKI Client iKey Driver C Map SDK 9 ECDIS E T H E Find wha
173. e the set range a Target Lost alarm is generated if outside the set range no alarm is generated 5 Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA TCPA to Dangerous section and press the Set button for the changes to take effect If the actual CPA or TCPA of the own ship and a target are less than the set values the target is displayed as dangerous Depending on the presence of signal from targets and the distance between the targets and the own ship there are the following types of ARPA targets Symbol name and description ARPA targets display Target in acquisition state any distance The target detected in an acquisition area is displayed as a flashing dashed red circle It flashes until it is acknowledged in the Info gt Targets tab If the target is dangerous its color stays red if it is not dangerous its color changes to green Last update December 11 2012 147 SAY MARI Av Aii User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Symbol name and description ARPA targets display Tracked target any distance Dangerous target distance to dangerous approach Or CPA CPA to Dangerous or TCPA lt TCPA to dangerous If a target approaches the own ship to the distance closer than the distance to dangerous approach set in the Config gt Targets tab it is designated the dangerous status and the target symbol becomes red and starts flashing The target flashes until it is X acknowledged Once acknowledged targets remain red until not d
174. e upper right corner of the i panel Figure 164 Position 7 4 3 Wind Sensor Data and Data sources panel Data sources tab If a wind sensor is connected to the system and registered in it a Wind entry is displayed in the Navigational panel In the entry data coming from the wind sensor are displayed Wind direction can also be presented in a graphical form To view the graphical representation of the wind direction do the following 1 Press the Disp button in the Wind entry of the Navigational panel The Anemometer window will open In the window you can see the true and relative wind direction display 2 To switch to the true wind direction display press the True button Last update December 11 2012 126 C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 To switch to the Relative wind direction display press the Relative button EN Anemometer EN Anemometer Figure 165 Anemometer true wind Figure 166 Anemometer relative wind STWz10kn HDG 0 relative wind speed 5kn relative wind direction 225 9 4 To drag the Anemometer window to a different position move the pointer to the title bar press the left mouse button and drag the window to a new position holding the button 5 To close the window press the Close button in the upper right corner of the window 7 5 Navigational Chart Settings 7 5 1 Navigation Mode When in the navigation mode the ECDIS monitors the own ship position and move
175. ecreased by 5 with every turn of the wheel 5 3 Bookmarks The current chart view is defined by the position of the screen center the current scale and the current chart display settings Using the Bookmarks option you can save the current screen coordinates and chart settings to a bookmark When this bookmark is opened later the displayed chart will be identical To use bookmarks do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 2 Enter the name of the bookmark to the bookmark names field in the Bookmarks section 3 Press the Add button The bookmark will be saved and added to the bookmarks list 4 To open a previously saved bookmark select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop down list and press the Go To button The chart will be scrolled to the center position saved in the bookmark and scaled accordingly 5 To delete a bookmark select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop down list press the Delete button and confirm the bookmark deletion 5 4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend A vector electronic chart is a part of geographic information system An electronic chart displays data stored in a geographic database The database stores records of geographical objects The objects are defined by a set of attributes These are the values of the attributes that define the way the objects are displayed on the screen Besides the attributes defining the appearance and the position of an object on the electronic cha
176. ect weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters To select a parameter tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name To unselect a weather parameter clear the checkbox 5 After the parameters have been checked the graphs of the parameters development in time will be built in the graph pane The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis vertical axes are different for each weather parameter and represent the parameters magnitude 6 When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the pointer position In the parameters list the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right of each parameter The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow vertical line 7 To export weather data for the selected point to a csv file press the Export button indicate the file name and folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog and press the Save button 8 To print the graph out press the Print button the graph will be automatically saved to a jpg file and opened with your default image processing program Print the graph out using the printing functionality of the program To create time series for a route do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Route option The list of all available routes will appear in the Select Route pa
177. ed the VRM can be manually manipulated to change the radius Variation Also known as Magnetic Variation and Declination The angular difference in direction between true North and magnetic North Vector Chart A chart where chart information is stored in terms of points lines and polygons NCX and TX 97 charts are vector chart formats Velocity Made Good VMG The speed at which the boat is moving towards its intended destination regardless of the ship s direction Vertical Datum For marine applications a base elevation used as a reference from which to reckon heights or depths It is called a tidal datum when defined in terms of a certain phase of the tide Tidal datums are local datums and should not be extended into areas which have differing hydrographic characteristics without substantiating measurements In order that they may be recovered when needed such datums are referenced to fixed points known as bench marks source Our Restless Tides VMG See Velocity Made Good VRM See Variable Range Marker Waypoint A mark of which routes are made The ship when following a route steers by successive waypoints XTE See Cross Track Error Zoom To change the apparent scale of a chart in the chart view 201 Av Aii Abbreviations ACK Acknowledgement AIS Automatic identification system ARPA Automatic radar plotting aid BRG Bearing BTW Bearing to Waypoint BWW Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint
178. eed of a ship over the earth s surface It is essentially the Speed Through Water STW plus the cumulative effect of wind and current Speed Through Water STW STW is the relative speed of the vessel over water surface See also Speed Over Ground SOG Starboard Starboard designates the right side of the boat as seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow Starboard side is indicated with a green light Stern The rear of a ship System Electronic Navigational Chart SENC A database in the manufacturer s internal ECDIS format resulting from the lossless transformation of the entire ENC contents and updates It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other navigational functions and is the equivalent of an up to date paper chart The SENC may also contain information added by the mariner and information from other sources Target In nautical terminology a target is generally an obstacle or object in or near the water to avoid for the purpose of safe navigation TCPA See Time to Closest Point of Approach 200 Wayman NWwAVYVMARINGE Tidal Currents Tidal currents a horizontal motion are a result of the rise and fall of the water level due to tides a vertical motion The effects of tidal currents on the movement of water in and out of bays and harbors can be substantial See Neap Tides Tide The change in ocean levels due to gravitational influenc
179. eep contour The deep contour value is not used in other ECDIS functions 3 To apply the Contour settings press the Set Parameters button 3 f a particular electronic chart does not have the depth contour that is set in the Safety Contour field the system will automatically set the nearest deeper contour as the Safety Contour For example the safety contour value is set to 15 meters if there is no a 15 meters contour on the chart but there are 10 and 20 meter contours the 20 meter contour will be considered the safety contour In case there are no depth contours at all in the chart the ECDIS will give the alarm Safety contour not available There is a possibility that the chart has depth contours in it but the ECDIS doesn t recognize them It happens because the ECDIS only recognizes contours if they bound depth areas In case you have doubts open the Object I nfo panel where you can see the depth contour objects and check if they bound depth areas or not see chapter 5 4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend Last update December 11 2012 51 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The contours values are used to distinguish on the display between depth areas that are safe or unsafe for navigation The areas are filled with colors specified in standards The colors are as follows From C Map Presentation S 52 Presentation 1 Zero depth contour Dark blue 5 6 5 Depth Settings Sometimes the cha
180. efined predicted actual 6 2 1 Creating and Editing Mariner Objects To create a mariner object do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and press the Create New button The Select an Object dialog will open Figure 64 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab Last update December 11 2012 64 Ray NAVMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 In the Select an Object dialog select an object type and press the OK button The ECDIS will switch to the mariner object edit mode and the object editing tab will open Select An Object x Clearing line Danger highlight Event Mariners feature Mariners Note Manufacturers feature Position Tidal stream or current vector Figure 65 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab Select an Object dialog 3 Inthe object editing tab select the object geometry type To do so check one of available options for the geometry type Chat Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Export Import Attributes Create New Information comma Object name PO Scale maximum PO Scale minimum a Localtime v 44 Users remark a Figure 66 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab Mariners Feature object editing tab 4 Fill in the values of attributes A mariner object can have one or several of the following attributes Information information about the object is not displayed in the chart view Scale maximum
181. ellipsoid surface and mean sea level geoid surface mean sea level surface below the WGS 84 ellipsoid surface Units of geoidal separation meters 13 X X Age of differential GPS data time in seconds since last not processed SC 104 type 1 or 9 update null field when DGPS is not used Differential reference station ID 0000 1023 GLL Geographic Position Latitude Longitude Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Latitude and longitude of vessel position time of position fix and status S GLL 1111 111 a2 yyyyy yy3 a4 hhmmss ss5 A6 a7 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt DECRE NN N Ro e eo e S Last update December 11 2012 179 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS DECRE NN M gt GNS GNSS Fix Data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Fix data for single or combined satellite navigation systems GNSS This sentence provides fix data for GPS GLONASS possible future satellite systems and systems combining these This sentence could be used with the talker identification of GP for GPS GL for GLONASS GN for GNSS combined systems as well as future identifiers Some fields may be null fields for certain applications as described below GNS hhmmss ss 1111 11 a yyyyy yy a c c xx x x x x Kax Xa x xl hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Description Comments hhmmss ss UTC of position Latitude degrees and minutes N S YYYYY YY m Mode indicator Total number o
182. er Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages 12 2008 14 00 Monday Go Today Download v v Settings Expandinfo ImportJWP Qy Open Grib Coastal en Cyclones Custom Coastal Custom Figure 108 Weather Weather Presentation Figure 109 Weather Weather Packages Easy Mode Download button Download button 2 In the Weather Download Request dialog you can set the product parameters remove a product from the request set a geographic area for which a forecast is required set the period for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings Last update December 11 2012 91 C NAVMAFINGE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS FH Global ECMWF 150 km EH Tropical Cyclones X Worldwide e o 1 day s 1h 4 18kb Forecast For 15 nex 2008 Downloadat 43 44 Total 19 kb Send Request Cancel Figure 110 Weather Download Request dialog Overview Coastal request dialog 3 Set the data request select product parameters in the Products field set data coverage in the Coverage field select the forecast period in the Period field and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download the Setup Easy Mode procedure Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6
183. er the chart Also called Scrolling Past Track An onscreen and or logged record of a ship s previous movements Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Polyconic Projection The polyconic projection involves projecting the surface of the Earth onto a series of cones situated with their apexes over the poles Port Port designates the left side of a boat as seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow Port side is indicated with a red light Prediction Vector A vector displayed in front of the vessel showing where the boat will be after a specified period of time assuming no intervening heading or speed changes Prime Meridian The meridian of longitude which passes through the original site of the Royal Observatory in Greenwich and used as the origin of Longitude Also known as the Greenwich Meridian RADAR RAdio Distancing And Ranging Microwave pulses used to detect objects usually metallic based on wave reflection Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services RTCM In the United States the Federal Communications Commission FCC and U S Coast Guard use RTCM standards to specify radar systems Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons and the basic version of Digital Selective Calling DSC radios Range The distance between two specified points usually the ship and a mark Range from Ship to Cursor The distance between the ship icon and the cursor Ra
184. erience in using MS Windows applications This manual uses certain conventions to provide a consistent means of recognizing specific information as follows Keys are physical keys of the computer keyboard Buttons are displayed graphically on the screen Text written like Chart refers to the names of keys and buttons as well as the names of all other user interface elements Program messages are written like this Would you like to copy the database to a local hard disk Text written like Data gt Licensing gt Add License manually is contracted from press the Data button open the Licensing panel and press the Add License manually button and presents a sequence of commands that user should perform to reach a function IMPORTANT Information that is crucial for correct functioning of the system or a function is marked by the word Important and solid lines above and below the text 1 3 Normative References The ECDIS is created in compliance with the following international standards e IEC 60945 ed 4 2002 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems General requirements Methods of testing and required test results e IEC 61161 1 ed 4 2010 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Digital interfaces Part 1 Single talker and multiple listeners e EC 62288 ed 1 2008 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Presentation
185. eriodic date of activity only during their activity period If the setting is off the objects with periodic date of activity are always displayed on the chart Text important Turns on the display of texts that have the important category These texts contain the information important for navigation such as bridge clearance depth values above point obstructions etc Text generic Turns on the display of texts that have the generic category These texts are names of geographic objects such as countries cities islands etc Text other Turns on the display of texts that have the other category These texts are names of lights and other aids to navigation Aids to navigation tooltip Turns on the display of tooltips with information about aids to navigation The tooltips appear when the mouse pointer is over an aids to navigation object National text Turns on the display of object names in national languages in the chart if available The setting only works for the C Map presentation Mariner s notes Turns on the display of mariner s notes see chapter 6 2 Mariner Objects Last update December 11 2012 53 i _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 The settings take effect immediately after they have been set 5 6 7 Other Settings Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the overloading One of them is selective displ
186. ers Association Computers directly connected to NMEA producing devices GPS heading sensor etc receive raw NMEA data This data conforms to the NMEA 0183 3 01 specification See also NMEA 0183 and NMEA 2000 NMEA See National Marine Electronics Association NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183 defines the electrical interface and data protocol for communications between marine instrumentation Many times referred to as NMEA in the context of marine instrumentation communications NMEA 2000 This standard contains the requirements for a serial data communications network to inter connect marine electronic equipment on ships It is multi master and self configuring and there is no central network controller Equipment designed to this standard will have the ability to share data including commands and status with other compatible equipment over a single channel source http www nmea org pub 2000 NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA is a federal agency focused on the conditions of the oceans and the atmosphere NOAA supplies navigation chart information for the coastal U S and the Great Lakes region Overscale Display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the compilation scale Overscaling may arise from deliberate overscaling by the mariner or from automatic overscaling by ECDIS in compiling a display when the data included is at various scales Pan To move the view window ov
187. es 66 FOULS TO OVI CE M 80 TOUS TOMS Mec 79 IE POs NOM en causa deta Parte Uem bo ap area hti 171 functional buttons menu cccccccccecceeeeeseeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeees 13 go to WAY POM sesscrsscrssuavasecneasoeechuauvoniaiasasbenauieromacseveraceds 137 great circle points calculate cccecccccecceeeeeeessnseeeeeeees 176 OU a ONG EEE cere bo mede dime uices nsa Lie DUE 132 heading SOUPCOS aiiawaceasntssviecensuindivataendavananbidiecaxpiviatswsdiendenies 124 history of manual chart updates sssssssse 58 idv T 15 ice situation display cxiscncsaeivsnsesredieiaevisnnscandscnduaiydereadiersabisxent 105 import mariner objects to file iuis rove ee pe ero arise pho dE PI Ee UUba2E 67 route Trom OO VICO deae oett oos dct uote Fa osa RE E rri 80 import 5 57 to CMOS J eccctck crtn cantrincioncerrieca ai iea 38 TPAC AOR S uL aia S E E EEE 8 AIS targets display sees 11 PU AN ANS AA PE E P E 12 ARPA targets display essere 11 dangers and cautions INdicatOP cccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 dats display Gy DO ecc sepan ivo dedos au EVE CoU ENASR GUN CDM REDE 10 VE RUE 01 o PN RR RENE ree acne 10 navigation MIO uice ciesar eiie teres daeerieputi vesc indem oou Docstrbeu 9 penodi dale E 10 DOSIHON SOG CC mocnina cavers uid demaida deci reet toten iEd 8 radar displIdy c sseeseccsaseteki nta eb eeu tat iaei eera
188. es external to the Earth Formulas for calculating tides can be found in tide and current tables provided by NOAA and the British Admiralty Time to Closest Point of Approach TCPA This is the time remaining until the closest point of approach of a target Time To Go TTG The amount of time estimated until the ship reaches an active waypoint assuming no intervening change in course or speed Displayed in hours and minutes TTG See Time To Go Universal Transverse Mercator Projection UTM UTM is similar to the Mercator projection except the projecting cylinder is mapped transverse to the meridians and the Mercator projection used is a secant variation where the map scale to nominal scale is 0 9996 The UTM segments the earth into 60 six degrees of longitude wide zones where the cylinder is oriented along the central meridian of a zone The zones extend from 84 N to 80 S The sixty zones start 180 degrees east and proceed eastward The usage of zones allows the UTM projection to be used over the entirety of the Earth while minimizing distortion towards the poles User added Electronic Chart Information Electronic chart information manually entered by the user for presentation for example navigational notes safety zones of interest local notices to mariners etc Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Variable Range Marker VRM Term describing a circle around the boat When enabl
189. esn t work together with the Ship on screen option on Last update December 11 2012 45 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS LO 5 9 fe Show hide terrain Displays hides the Terrain profile When the terrain profile is hidden the land area is always displayed flat Show hide seabed Displays hides the seabed Show hide compass Displays hides the compass The compass is represented as a blue and red arrow in the lower left corner The blue arrow points to the north and the red arrow points to the south Show hide navigation Displays hides aids to navigation Show hide vessel Displays hides the own ship The ship s size in the 3D window depends on the chart scale Show hide ERBL Displays hides the Electronic Range and Bearing Line in the 3D window Depth and coordinate scale frame Displays hides the frame with the values of the depth latitude and longitude coordinate scales Zoom in Zooms the 3D view in Zoom out Zooms the 3D view out Z scale panel In the Z Scale panel you can adjust vertical scale for the best presentation of the surface The land surface and seabed surface scales are configured separately fi 3D Window xi J s Figure 42 3D Window Z scale panel The vertical scale with the value of 1 displayed in the field under the scale control slider in the highest position means that the vertical scale of the 3D view is the same as the chart scale The vertical scale w
190. espective target is marked by a dangerous target symbol Data Sentence The unit of information sent between peripherals and the ECDIS conforming to the NMEA 0183 specification Dead reckoned Position DR position extrapolated from the last accepted position update based on present course and speed Dead Reckoning A method of navigation where known values position course speed time and distance to travel are used to calculate unknown values Values such as set and drift can also be incorporated Deviation Changes in the magnetic field due to the ferrous composition of surrounding objects affecting the measured direction of magnetic North Deviation is measured as the angular difference in direction between the actual magnetic heading and the compass heading Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS DGPS Differential GPS A network of 60 radio beacons in conjunction with a GPS that sends correction information used to reduce positional error to the 1 3 meter range Digital Selective Calling DSC A type of VHF radio that allows boats to contact other similarly equipped boats using that boat s MMSI Number DSC allows two radios to communicate selectively with each other while excluding other receivers from using the signal DSC can report position information Display Base Level of information which cannot be removed from the ECDIS display consisting of information which is
191. estore Settings button It is impossible to restore the previous settings after the new settings have been saved 6 The Advanced button opens for editing the MODevices config xml file where you can enter values of RMS and fixed corrections for observation devices for the LOP position fix function see chapter 7 2 3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs 3 3 System Setup 3 3 1 Measurement Units and Time To set the measurement units for various values such as distance speed depth elevation and various dimensions use the options provided in the Config Units and Time tab In the tab you can also set the time parameters select the time zone you are sailing in set the daylight saving time if necessary as well as select the format of the date display Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Spion Setup AIS Lits Tool Ship Output and Time Time Zone Properties GMT 03 00 Kuwait Riyadh Daylight Bias 60 min Apply Depth Elevation Size Units i Date Format dd mm yyyy Feet Statute Miles Km per hour Fathoms Kilometres Statute miles per hour Figure 12 Config gt Units and Time tab To set measurement units do the following 1 To set the measurement unit for depths elevations and dimensions select the unit in the Depth Elevation Size Units list The setting is applied immediately The selected unit is indicated by the Depth Elevation Unit Indicator in the lower left corner of the chart view Measurement un
192. et parameters clear the Auto Manual checkbox of the parameter that you are going to change and enter a new value to the edit field 3 Enter the drift direction and speed to the Drift direction and Drift speed fields 4 After all necessary changes have been done press the Apply button for the parameters to take effect 7 2 3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs The Manual Position Fix function is intended for fixing of the own ship position using range and bearing lines of position taken from visual or radar detected reference objects Description of the function algorithm and examples of the manual position task are presented in the Appendix D To use the Manual Position Fix function open the Navi gt LOP Position fix tab Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data past track and vector Reckoning Position fix Reference points Select reference point Remove RemoveAll Position Discrepancy Result N 000 000 E000 00 000 Accept Position Figure 148 Navi gt LOP Position fix tab The DR cannot be set as a primary position source this way It is used for positioning only in case there is no any data available from external positioning devices Last update December 11 2012 117 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt To complete the manual position fix task the following operations should be performed pone E Ee us Plotting reference points in the chart view Enter
193. etegieanateastaredeaseotaduareaduasanteiecs 117 CLG UIA SA barns EET ental nena 133 depth are ds SEED ess E 51 es PERUENIRE T T 51 BALCTY CC DUN uo ceci E E E gu iade 51 shallow COMLOUR 51 depth SUNS oor tacet edet alas ad Po ot d tado ud lada p Res UD 52 devices precise location onboard sssseesee 19 direct geodetic problem iaa eie rev oie t reno 175 display of AIS targets cccccccccccccccccceeeessseesessseeeeeeeees 142 display of light sectors cccccccccccccccceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 129 display DOlelteS acabe cette orb eue Pio nce pdt esa i DET en Dl te du MS 128 GSA LU DO aa donati dts bd unco E aM itus bau dA Meu uses 48 SUIS id aT REN NR 48 DI V teres eve enn mre 48 eT STET NEN 50 SITZ DITO COO NENNT ETE 48 display weather configure display i12 eset tetro ro eU t er oae PERPE e bb BM Edo Fen de 101 L E e ceteram O HUM MEME I 104 HS EE cs cocos ct ates E deem tutae iu e atenteitu ise ud maed 105 UD NOI ODE oneen ionctesetutities c otusie dena p oor Uti hi dos 101 displaying database ccccccccccccccccccceeeessseseeeeeceeeeseeeeeees 20 download weather coastal download essen 9 Custom download ooo ioo iuo ea ooo ota ciiir aiaiai 93 Easy Mode download ccccccccccccccceesssesseseeeeceeeeeeees 88 overview download seesessseeececeeeeeceeeaeesseseseeseeeees 9 scheduled download
194. etup 3 To add a product to the request press the Add new product button and select the product you want to add in the drop down list The product appears in the table and is removed from the Add new product list To set the product parameters click on the plus sign near the product name to expand the product parameters list to collapse the list press the minus sign near the product name and check those weather parameters you want to receive Last update December 11 2012 89 Gm NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS E Weather Download Request Products Add new product Coverage Period TimeStep Size Global ECMWF 150 km X Screen of 3 day s 6h 5 Okb v Pressure Temperature V Wind lv Precipitation v Total Waves Swell Waves E Tropical Cyclones K Worldwide ev 5 1 day s 1h Z 18k Forecast For 45 nex 2008 Download at 42 12 Total 19 kb Reset OK Cancel Figure 106 Weather Download Hequest dialog setting a product parameters To remove a product from the request press the product Remove button X To set a geographic area to be covered by the forecast data choose a predefined coverage from the drop down list or set your own coverage To open the list of coverage options press the arrow near the current coverage name To set a new coverage a Press the arrow near the current coverage name and in the drop down list select the Add New
195. eview Last update December 11 2012 57 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 The Updates Log pane displays all charts datasets to which updates have been applied The information relating to each dataset includes dataset name the Name column update status accepted or declined the Status column the number of updates applied to the dataset the Number column and the date when the updates were applied the Date column 3 When the updates are imported from the S 57 format the import log is kept In case there were any problems during the import process the log file can be viewed the Remark button becomes active and to view the log just press it In case there were no problems during the import process the import log is unavailable and the Remark button remains dimmed 4 The Updates Review list on the right part of the pane is made up of records of the updates sorted by the updates issuing hydrographic offices by datasets to which the updates were applied and by numbers of files in which the updates are stored The tool tips should assist you in viewing long names and remarks Information about each correction is given in a short form For example it does not contain the past and present cartographic object position but it is just written as Modified 5 Double click on any correction in order to highlight it on the chart The screen will be panned to the object position and the scale changed to th
196. f satellites in use 00 99 Horizontal dilution of precision X X Antenna altitude above below mean sea level geoid meters Geoidal separation meters Age of differential data Differential reference station ID gt HDG Heading deviation and variation Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 IMO Resolution A 382 X Heading magnetic sensor reading which if corrected for deviation will produce magnetic heading which if offset by variation will provide true heading X X X X x x X X p HDG meekly 30 32 doy XX sab blscbB sebb X X Magnetic sensor heading degrees EE X X Magnetic deviation degrees BEEN Last update December 11 2012 180 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Magnetic variation degrees EE HDM Heading magnetic Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs Actual vessel heading in degrees magnetic S HDM x x M hh CR LF Magnetic heading degrees aS Heading type M for magnetic BEEN HDT Heading true Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading S HDT x x1 T2 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt True heading degrees EE Heading type T for true EE gt MWV Wind speed and angle Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 When the reference field is set to R Relative data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the vessel s bow centerline and the wind speed bot
197. f the time system setting e Remark Recorded information itself It contains detailed information on what has been added to the logbook coordinates course echo sounder depth etc To set a filter and display entries of selected classes only check those entry classes you want to be displayed Select the classes in the classes list in the left part of the panel In order to deselect a class clear its checkbox The option is not available for the track log The record classes are the following e System Changes made to the system configurations e Track Logging position changing chart scale e Voyage Logging events when sailing a route e User records Entry added by the operator e Targets ARPA activity e AlS targets AIS activity To refresh the log book data press the Refresh button Usually this is not required as the log book data are refreshed automatically at regular intervals To add a remark press the Add Remark button the Add Remark window will open Enter the remark in the window and press the OK button A User records class entry will be added to the log book If you add a user remark when the track log is on it still will be added to the main log To scroll the chart view to the coordinates of a log book entry select the entry in the entries table and press the Go to position button The position will be displayed in the center of the chart view and marked with an arrow symbol Please note that i
198. f you prefer to plot routes manually from the beginning to the end or if routes created automatically require editing use the manual route planning and editing functionality of the ECDIS Using the functionality you can create new routes edit existing routes edit route schedules add control points check routes etc To create a new route do the following 1 open Start Route GoTo Route Voyage Planning Finder EM To Port B ALGER ARZEW NL ARZEW Algeria ANTOFAGASTA CALDERA ANTOFAGASTA Chil CALDERA Chile ind COPENHAGE KOBENHAVN COPE YSTAD Sweden KOBENHAVN COPENHAGE KOBENHAVN COPE YSTAD Sweden Figure 75 Route gt Route Planning tab 2 field and press OK Enter name of a new Route NewRoute 0000000000000 Figure 76 Create New Route dialog Open the Route gt Route Planning tab and press the New button The Create New Route dialog will In the Create New Route dialog enter the name of the new route to the Enter name of a new Route 3 The new route will be created and added to the routes list The ECDIS will switch to the route edit mode You can start plotting the route waypoints and enter other route information More details about plotting waypoints see below Start Route cofo Route Export 4 m ilex Voyage Planning Finder Import Se HCM NECNON NR LZ PrintRoute Charts SESS Parameters b WPT CP Schedule WPT CP Schedule Dangers Cautions Total
199. fasie dos eonsscn tosta raien uM aoi 53 check POIS cenere ee re E 170 coastal weather download ssssssssussse 9 color differentiation teSt ee eccccsesssssseseseeeeeceeeeeeeeaaeeaes 22 conning station position eene 20 COD Vert COOROIBODOS acbesio tie stesse abies qat etant ne as eauedi aal edEe 176 Coordinates CODnVQOLL ei o ero ot va Flos Foo dee tage Uva b ene oboe tions 176 copy user permit to file sseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenennnn 35 create mariner ODI CC auioe epi err re GviF IER CU OUI d READ eb ERN IR RL 64 CTC A OMS ose EE EE p Eee canssa UP Det coa Roma E Ted Oud 77 custom weather download ccccccccsssssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 93 cyclones display vicccscsanaurnwansmsaracinnmininamvvcewdmauaciwamians 104 danger objects guard ZOne eessssssssssoeeeereesssssssssssseeeerree 132 dangers and cautions indicator esee 11 data display type indicator ssssssseeeeeeeeeee 10 data management database display anesitevediuiuseraxmactus nitet a up Ub p awEp 20 database installation sseeeeseeees 28 ENC 9 97 dd usines uin set esee vos to see ooa See ENC S 57 data PG CSE ODDO esque cratered tod er eee ieS 30 new version of database sse 33 data synchronization Dinge Fe 26 OO e 24 irs M EEE E E EE PM Q 26 BS UE E e 23 dead TECK ONIN ys sisssccaresseanacdarsass
200. file do the following 1 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Copy user permit button The Copy S63 User Permit dialog will open Dynamic Auto Import 4 milex Licensing Updating S57 Database Name Convert Install Media Copy user permit Apply S63 cell permits Apply SA Certificate 57 source data Processing Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Licensing Turn off the errors report Find databases Figure 27 Data gt Import S57 tab 2 In the Copy S63 User Permit dialog select a folder where to save the user permit file and press the Copy button The user permit will be saved to a UserPermit txt file NEW VOLUME E Figure 28 Copy S63 User Permit dialog 3 After the user permit is saved to a file you can send it to a Data Server together with the data request The Data Server generates individual data licenses using your user permit data To apply S 63 cell permits do the following 1 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button The Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog will open 2 n the folder tree select the folder where the cell permits file is stored The file name will be displayed in the pane to the right Select file with obtained Cell Permits for S63 data 2 ENC Licencing Test 2a Test 2b Test 2c Test 2d Test 2e Test 2f Test 2g ooo asad cop Figure 29 Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog 3
201. g After the data has been received weather data come from the weather server as data packages entries for weather data requests in the Weather Packages tab become entries for the received weather data packages To be able to use the data you should unpack and load them to the ECDIS In the Weather gt Weather Packages tab you can display detailed information about the data requests and received data packages download a weather package to the ECDIS in case it was received by e mail initiate a send receive operation in case it is not done automatically display weather data received in a package on the chart delete a package and save a package as a grb or an xml file Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Forecast for Status 10 02 2009 11 13 Global ECMWF 50 km Tropical Cyclones Ready sike 10 02 2009 11 12 Coastal Request Global ECMWF 50 km Tropical Cyclones Ready 581 kb iA no mnn 34310 Ea Mada Beet lakal EPR 4d C Leas Tenmimnl Punime Denis TT Lk zl J ImportJwP Send Receive Display Delete Save Package Details Global ECMWF 50 km ressure Temperature Dew Point Temp Wind Precipitation Cloud Cover Total Waves Swell Waves falid from 20 02 2009 12 12 6h creen 044 41 806 N 001 18 988 W 044 35 263 N 001 07 107 W Figure 117 Weather gt Weather Packages tab gt The following data packages ha
202. ge type is selected the ECDIS will parse all types of messages coming from the device gr e Press the Apply button to add the device to the devices list or Cancel to cancel the operation After the device has been added to the devices list press the Save Settings button in the Config gt Input Output tab for the changes to take effect 6 Enter the password in the Password required dialog and press OK The changes will take effect To edit parameters of a device do the following 1 Select the device in the list and press the Edit button The Talker Setup dialog will open 2 Inthe Talker Setup dialog change the device parameters 3 Press the Apply button to add changes to the devices list Press the Cancel button to cancel the operation The Talker Setup dialog will close 4 Press the Save Settings button in the Config gt Input Output panel for the changes to take effect You can restore previous settings unless you have pressed the Save Settings button in the Config gt I nput Output tab Once the Save Settings button has been pressed previous settings cannot be restored To restore settings press the Restore Settings button Last update December 11 2012 17 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 5 Enter the password to the Password required dialog and press OK The changes will take effect To delete a device do the following 1 Select the device in the list and press the Delete button
203. ger If the category is NLT the bearing from the own ship should always remain more or equal to the bearing of the clearing line The Not defined category is used if the clearing line is drawn through two marks and the own ship location control is carried out using the range line between the two marks rather than the bearing to one of the marks e Danger highlight a point or area object highlighting a danger e Event a point object indicating the position of the own ship at the moment of some event e Mariners feature a point line or area object used to highlight an area on the chart that should attract attention of the mariner because of some effect it can have on navigating across it e Mariners Note a point object presenting textual information from the mariner related to certain coordinates Depending on the importance of the information you can set two categories of the Mariners note information for general information or an unimportant note and caution for important information danger instructions or orders e Manufacturers feature a feature or information added by the manufacturer of the ECDIS Examples are a caution or information symbol for cursor picking to read out the information on the alphanumeric display additional chart information not available in the ENC manufacturers value added feature etc e Position a point object indicating the own ship position fix The position fix can be
204. h relative to the moving vessel Also called apparent wind this is the wind speed as felt when standing on the moving ship When the reference field is set to T Theoretical calculated actual wind data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the vessel s bow centerline and the wind speed as if the vessel was stationary On a moving ship these data can be calculated by combining the measured relative wind with the vessel s own speed S MWV x Xl a2 x x3 a4 A5 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt DECRE NEN mi Wind speed units K km h M m s N knots Status A data valid V data invalid EN Last update December 11 2012 181 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Time date position course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver D RMC hhmmss ss nc Illis d YYYYY YY a x x Re XXXXXX ee qm a a hhbecB sens No Field Description Comments 1 hhmmss ss UTC of position fix 2 A Status A data valid V navigation receiver warning 3 TIR Latitude 4 a N S 9 yyyyy yy Longitude 6 a E W E NN E OR NN sem meum 000000 ep mem o o gt ROT Rate of turn Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 IMO Resolution A 526 Rate of turn and direction of turn ROT x x A hh lt CR gt lt LF gt me ree o emn omm Status A data valid V data invalid RTE Routes Stan
205. hart view To add a waypoint to the waypoints list do the following 3 Press the Add Waypoints button in the Itinerary tab Move the mouse pointer to the waypoint position in the chart view and left click holding down the SHIFT key The waypoint will be plotted on the chart as a violet circle and added to the itinerary Outpress the Add Waypoints button To edit the waypoints list do the following 1 2 To remove a port waypoint from the list select the port waypoint and press the Remove button To move a port waypoint down or up in the list select the port waypoint and press the Move up or Move down d button To clear the list remove all ports waypoints press the Clear All button When the Highlight Ports option is checked all ports in the list are displayed on the chart as white circles and the port selected in the list is shown as a violet circle To change the screen position so that the port selected in the list were in the screen center press the Go to button It will also be marked with an arrow To calculate the route do the following 1 Add all ports and waypoints you want to include in the route edit the ports waypoints list and press the Calculate button The ECDIS will calculate the shortest route of all routes available by taking into account your current draft The calculated route will be marked on the chart as a yellow line To add restrictions to the route calculation by disabli
206. hart view use the navigation mode see chapter 7 5 1 Navigation Mode In this mode the ECDIS holds the own ship in the chart view automatically Chart level changing An alarm is activated when the chart under the own ship symbol or under the chart view center in case the own ship symbol is out of coverage is scaled to a chart with a different scale level The alarm is given to notify you that the ECDIS is working with a more or a less detailed chart To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message The alarm is active for at least 30 seconds Dangerous AIS A dangerous AIS target is detected Alert messages An ALR alert message is received from an input device Input device is lost Signals from one of the external devices registered in the Config Input Output tab are lost The name of the device is indicated in the alarm message To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Safety contour is not available The safety contour cannot be defined by the ECDIS in the current chart view If the safety contour is not defined the ECDIS is not able to notify you about such dangerous situations as crossing the safety contour or danger of grounding In this situation you should pay special attention to the chart data and aids to navigation The alarm is deactivated when the ECDIS defines the safety contour Not for use with Position device A small scale chart is currently displayed in the chart view and it cannot be use
207. hat will indicate the restricted zone on the chart To plot a point left click in the chart view to delete a point right click on the point to move a point left click on the point to capture it with the mouse pointer move the point to a new location and left click to release it 3 To save the added restriction press the Save restriction button that has appeared in place of the Add restriction button 4 Confirm or cancel the operation To confirm the operation press the Yes button the restriction will be added You can add as many restrictions as you like 5 To remove all manually entered restrictions press the Remove all E Ga eee restrictions button Renove alres a You can only remove all the added restriction 6 Once you have added all your restrictions recalculate the route press the Calculate button This time all added restrictions will be taken into account To save the route do the following 1 Press the Save as Route button The Create New Route dialog will open Enter name of a new Route KOBENHAVN COPENHAGEN Denmark YSTAD OK Cancel Figure 74 Create New Route dialog Last update December 11 2012 71 QA MARI NAYVMARING AY MARINE 2 Enter the route name and press OK User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 The new route is added to the routes list in the Route gt Route Planning panel where you can analyze check and correct the route if necessary 6 4 2 Manual Route Planning I
208. he connection setup the data request will be sent and data received and downloaded automatically 3 If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request confirmation dialog 2 A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx xml 3 Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no 4 You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder 38 Weather subscription is renewed automatically every time you receive a new weather package Last update December 11 2012 88 5 ac CNAvwARINED User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The ECDIS will load the data automatically Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request confirmation dialog A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c
209. he installer 8 2 1 AIS Targets Data Information of all AIS targets with which the contact has been established is displayed in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab The tab is made up of two panes one of the panes contains the list of all AIS targets and the other displays detailed information about a specified target Echo Sounder AIS Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization lt ea n x Targets Diagram Monitor arge Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Pici EU RTen13 Order inflow Position report Static and voyage data Meeting point info ee RESTITIT Dist to targets MMSI 273366010 273359440 AKADEMIK TRYOBE Dist to dang targets COG 034 2 SOG 0 0 kn type Vedse z CPA and TCPA 999999923 ALEKSANDR SU Name sid CPA TCPA 3 02 NM 40m 36s C0G 124 0 SOG 5 6 kn type Vest nie COG SOG HDG ROT 242 4 0 0 kn 122 0 0 0 inani oe I Meeting time Range Bearing 3 24 NM 311 9 023 0 0 kn type Vedse T i F rd targets ype of ship 249926000 ATLANTIC ELAN arc aree COG 120 9 S0G 0 0 kn tune Vege Backward targets Acknowledge Acknowledge A Close Displays Go to meeting point Show Received Messages Figure 188The Info gt AIS Monitor tab To view a target s information select the target in the targets list The information is displayed in two tabs the Position Report tab and the Static and Voyage Related Data tab On the Position Report
210. he red dashed line in the centre of the CDS 2 When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS there is no collision risk and the CDS is not shaded The Figure 217 shows that own ship has made a course change to starboard and will therefore pass astern of the target with a distance slightly above the specified CPA limit 1 163967 x6 1 SHIP 16 51 03 2009 01 28 65 45 673 N 031 12 548 W esoc 20 0 ecos 017 0 1 ae Unk Not for use with position device f No official data available Refer to paper chart Alarm ARPA Anti Collision Own Input Units iren Setup and Sonar Tool um ship Output andTime Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 Maximum CPA NM TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min w Target Vectors Apply Parameters Figure 217 Course change by the own ship to avoid collision Last update December 11 2012 162 NAVMARING LE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 An alternative evasive action by the own ship is a speed reduction here from 20 to 14 knots Figure 218 in order to achieve the specified minimum CPA distance with a minimum deviation from the original track line The third alternative is a combination of course and speed change f No official data available Refer to paper chart System Alarm ARPA Anti Collision Setup and Sonar Tool 1656 1524 1524 1524 1518 1514 Own Input Units ship Output andTime Y
211. heights of each tidal day observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Low Water MLW A tidal datum The average of all the low water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Lower Low Water MLLW A tidal datum The average of the lower low water height of each tidal day observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mercator Projection The Mercator projection is a conformal projection devised by Gerhardus Mercator in 1569 Similar to a cylindrical projection in that the horizontal and vertical distances are stretched towards the poles Unlike the cylindrical projection the vertical and horizontal stretching of the chart preserves shape and direction Due to increasing distortion towards the poles Mercator charts are not very useful for representing cartographic information towards the poles Lines of latitude and longitude are straight lines on the Mercator projection On Mercator charts rhumb lines can be drawn as straight lines because the Mercator projection preserves bearing MMSI See Maritime Mobile Service Identity 198 SAY MARINE MOB See Man Overboard National Marine Electronics Association NMEA This organization has determined a standard 0183 to which all data transmission to and from marine peripherals must conform The NMEA issues standards for interfacing marine electronics devices Pronounced nee ma Not to be confused with NEMA National Electrical Manufactur
212. highly recommended to download weather data when not in operational mode The ECDIS implements the functionality allowing you to use Jeppesen Marine Weather service Using the weather functionality you can download weather and cyclones forecasts display weather data on the chart as well as analyze routes in terms of weather conditions along them and set alarms based on specified values of weather parameters Weather forecasts are produced as GRIB files and cyclones forecasts as XML files The forecasts are made for a specified period of time and you can see the weather parameters change within the time period for which the forecast was created The forecasts include data for a number of weather parameters such as pressure wind precipitation etc The parameters can be displayed on the chart separately Readings of weather parameters are provided at regular intervals of time The time for weather display can be set with a special time tool If there is no reading of a weather parameter for the time set for the parameter display the parameter value will be interpolated To get access to downloading weather data you will have to download subscription first Subscription provides information on weather products and weather parameters available to you You can download weather data over the Internet using the HTTP connection or by e mail 6 6 1 Weather Subscription After you have subscribed to the Weather Forecast Service you should download weathe
213. hing has fallen over board you can use the Man Overboard functionality Using the functionality you can plot a symbol in the accident position and monitor it as the own ship moves To use the MOB functionality do the following 1 Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel move the mouse pointer 4 over the scale indicator and press the MOB L J button The Man Overboard mode is turned on a Man Overboard symbol is plotted in the current own ship position and the position coordinates are recorded as a MOB entry in the logbook As the own ship sails the range and bearing to the MOB position are constantly updated and shown on the range and bearing line Figure 232 MOB 2 The MOB symbol is being updated until the MOB button is pressed To stop symbol updating the MOB position and delete the symbol outpress the MOB button 9 2 2 Position Fix Functionality The position fix functionality allows plotting a symbol in the own ship current position to mark this position To use the Position Fix functionality do the following 1 Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator and press the Fix position button 2 A Fix Position symbol is plotted in the current own ship position and the position object is added to the mariner objects database see chapter 6 2 Mariner Objects Figure 233 Fix symbol 9 3 Log Book The ECDIS contains an automatic log book function The log book
214. hts sectors and their visibility distances in the chart view To turn on and setup the lights sectors display do the following Both true motion and relative motion modes work only together with the navigation mode on Last update December 11 2012 129 C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 Open the Chart Chart Presentation tab and switch to the Light sectors tab Chat Chart Manual 4 5 ex Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors iv Real length Highlight m safety contour 50 m M Highlight sectors s Gion a sinptfed Safety depth 20 All sectors 2o Shallow contour White sectors Deep contour 10 0 MENU CIC Figure 175 Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Light sectors tab 2 To turn on the display of the limits of light sectors with the length corresponding to the actual visibility distance of the lights check the Real length checkbox The visibility distance is not calculated it is taken from the light attributes and corresponds to the bridge height of 5 meters 3 To turn on the highlight of light sectors in the chart view check the Highlight sectors checkbox Sectors display is limited with the sectors visibility distance 4 Select the sectors to be highlighted in the Highlight section a To highlight sectors of user specified lights select the Chosen sectors option T
215. ical value Theanti collision functionality requires setting the following limits e he distance maximum CPA and time TCPA limit between the own ship and a target at which the target is activated in the anti collision display and the user is recommended to start evaluating calculating and carrying out collision avoidance actions in case the collision risk exists e The critical distance minimum CPA distance or radius of CPA limit circle and time TCPA critical at which the user has the minimum time to take decisions on collision avoidance actions The above described parameters are set in the Config Anti Collision Tool tab Last update December 11 2012 159 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The table below describes changes in graphic elements of the anti collision display brought about by changes in time and distance between the own ship and targets The user set minimum and maximum limits of distance and time are compared to the actual CPA and TCPA of the own ship and targets and the distance and time between the own ship and targets Actual CPA and TCPA and time and distance values are displayed in the Info gt AIS tab for AIS targetsa and in the Info gt ARPA targets gt ARPA targets tab for ARPA targets nna mm ime Anti collision display on CPAaaua lt CPAmax AND TCPA actual lt TCPAqmax CDL is highlighted with red TCPAaaua lt TCPAqi CDS is off CDL is displayed Distance lt CPAn
216. idcceraiviniokedsaedsvanictnindedanareswedensianiul dicted ashedeasdvivabelwabisviuietuesedubeliandddeubiarens tite 14 E d s B RENE diana ide cui tels E E 19 ECES ETU Mew IH EET TUIS 16 SE NE 100518 0100 NH ST HOHER EC TENDER ERES 16 3 1 1 Adding editing and deleting input output devices ccccceeececeseeeccsseeeceeseeseeeseesseaseeeees 16 oe IEC IS Si al INE acisini nea iaai aeai 18 MEO nero ucc P EE E 18 OSEE S o abeam 20 3 3 1 Measurement Units and Time saserans vidt iu eaae Vadit diua temaiadnavaniunbeteundeunieraiennididisasivsaceiansenbnayadens 20 dod User Interface Language Setup cccccscccccssscecceesececcesseecceeeecseseesseseeessseeessagseesseaseneess 21 3 9 9 Volume SE WMG e aeaiedacon pisani aid acsuepiditaiueied esee tedio ogiid aaratexupauodisuciet ixdaemodisiiua ainai e 21 3 3 4 vcicAS e 1 C HP 21 3 919 SSF IE DE TB Donee iba E A AEE E E ARA Em PEDE Gane Ib DITE BER OH rete A eu RE HUE RARU 22 3 3 6 color Difearentaton SU E D UU D TIS 22 34 Updating depo DIueamisneteumti iiM CHESTER En RpEerTM at piso en EA DIL V NE EHEFETAEPOEH RA DUAL iets 23 Aa te CEU PE 23 3 5 1 OM ON SUID rea EEEE E T E E E 23 Sud aynehronization MonlOr POR T mmm 24 3 5 3 Routes Synch oniZalON eR RIT ini E ii 26 3 6 System Diagnostics TOO B uu erani rens prati stre din reb unda et td qam a dimer biens etu ta or a opm edi as 26 Jyrezpi cis cr esa
217. iew the Databases drop down list is not displayed in the Data gt Auto Updating tab 3 Set the maximum return email size select an option from the Maximum return email size drop down list The option should be used if there is a limitation on the email attachment size from your email provider or the answer file needs to be stored on a floppy disk Check with your email provider and set the required size The updating server will then divide the replies into several emails in order to comply with these limitations 4 Save the updates order in the folders tree in the left hand pane select a directory to which the order file will be saved and press the Save order button Confirm the operation The order file will be saved in the specified directory 5 Send the order file as an attachment to updates c map no It is very important that you send the new order file to the updates server and not the same file as before as this will result in duplicate update being received 6 After a short period of time you will receive the answer from the Updates Server with updates attached to it Save the update files to a data storage device and connect the device to the system 7 To install updates select the folder where the updates files are stored in the folders tree and press the Get updates from directory button The updates will be extracted from files and registered in the database 6 1 3 Updating Log Review Updates During the updating proces
218. iew databases are listed in the Registered Databases pane all registered and added to the view databases are listed in the Databases in View pane Auto Import lt fl x Updating S57 Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Dynamic Licoasing Licensing Databases Registered Databases Databases in View ChartletsBase 1 _ Add Database Professional 380 Remove Database Nic Figure 21 Data gt Add Remove Database tab 2 To add a database to the view select the database in the Registered Databases list and press the Add Database button The database name will be moved to the Databases in View list and the data from the database will be displayed in the chart view 3 To remove a database from the view select the database in the Databases in View list and press the Remove Database button The database name will be moved back to the Registered Databases list and the data removed from the chart view 4 To refresh the Registered Databases and Databases in View lists in case they were modified using external tools press the Refresh button 11 Generally databases are automatically added to the view in the process of registration Last update December 11 2012 29 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 4 2 Licensing Data Cartographic data stored in chart databases produced by Jeppesen are protected from unauthorized use by licenses Licenses allow viewing all charts ava
219. ilable for a specified area in the database without licenses you can only view small scale charts Licenses are available for worldwide coverage or any combination of Zones Areas or Cells You have to purchase and install licenses for the coverage you have selected The entire world coverage is divided into 9 Zones Each Zone is divided into several Areas Some Zones are also divided into Cells 4X4 degrees and special areas You may have a license for any combination of Zones Areas and Cells Zones are specified by their numbers from Zone O World coverage to Zone 10 Areas are specified by Zones to which they belong and their numbers in the Zones e g Zone 1 Area 3 Cells are regarded as Areas and their numbering continues after the numbering of Areas in a Zone For example the first Cell in the Zone 2 is listed as Zone 2 Area 7 As there are six Areas in that Zone Areas following the Zone 2 Area 6 are actually Cells To obtain a license for the coverage you need for a voyage you should come to your charts supplier with your eToken and after settling purchase formalities you will be provided with the licenses file You can also order licenses by e mail or by phone To do so you will have to provide your System ID number to your chart suppliers IMPORTANT The System ID is necessary for issuing licenses It is unique for your system and stored in the eToken Each license is issued for a specified System ID You will be able to us
220. iles with the route extension e RTE WPL Routes are saved in files with the rte extension Unlike the route files intended for the ECDIS only rte files can be imported to many devices 4 In the folder tree window select the folder where the route will be saved If in the folder there are other route files they will be displayed in the panel to the right from the folder tree To delete a route file from the files list select the file press the DELETE key and confirm the operation 5 To export the route press the Export button If the route is exported successfully the message Route was exported successfully will appear and the file name will be listed in the files list pane To import a route from a file do the following 1 Open the Route Export Import tab and switch to the From To File tab 2 In the folder tree select the folder where the route file is stored All route files stored in the selected folder will be listed in the pane to the right from the folder tree In case the file you need is not on the list make sure you have selected the right folder and check the file format selected in the formats drop down list The format set in the formats drop down list should be the same as that of the route file you want to import 3 Select the route file and press the Import button The route from the file will be imported to the EXZST I ECDIS and its name will be displayed in routes List of Routes list BW
221. ime of prediction defines the length of the anti grounding guard zone which is the distance the own ship will cover for the specified time proceeding with the current speed b Dangers safety distance enter a distance value to the Dangers safety distance measurement units are set in the Config Units and Time tab The guard zone will be build using the set distance 3 To turn the display of the guard zone in the chart view on check the Guard Zone Sector checkbox To turn the guard zone display off clear the checkbox 4 Select the guard zone angle in the drop down list to the right from the Guard Zone Sector checkbox The angle of the guard zone can be set between 5 and 90 degrees By reducing the angle to 5 degrees you will only have warnings of danger objects in front of the vessel 5 To enable highlighting of danger objects located inside the guard zone check the Danger Objects Inside Guard Zone checkbox 6 After you have set the anti grounding alarm parameters press the Set Parameters button for the parameters to take effect When the anti grounding alarm with the guard zone and highlighting of danger objects inside the zone are activated all objects with depths less than the set safety contour value will be highlighted in red inside the guard zone The danger objects are also added to the dangers and cautions lists If a danger object is found in the guard zone the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes red and is called Dangers
222. in 8 5 5 Indication of Collision Risk The risk of collision of the own ship with a target is defined in the anti collision display functionality by the position of the own ship speed vector in relation to the CDS and CDL e If the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS the distance at the CPA will be less than the specified minimum CPA distance e lf the end of the own ship speed vector lies directly on the CDL the distance at the CPA will equal zero which means that the vessels will collide In both cases there is a risk of collision To indicate the collision risk the CDS is shaded orange If the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS there is no collision risk and the CDS is not shaded Last update December 11 2012 160 _ NAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The table below shows how graphic elements of the anti collision display change depending on the collision risk Change condition mae CDS is not shaded The own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS CDS is shaded orange The own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS 8 5 6 Example and Recommendations for the Anti collision Display Use Consider two vessels own ship and a target on collision course The range from the own ship to the target is 7 5 nautical miles and the bearing from the own ship to the target is 037 The target speed is 15 knots and the course is 270 The own ship speed is 20 knots and the cour
223. ine gt User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS E Mail SMTP POP3 Automatic connection type If you set the E Mail SMTP POP3 e mail connection option the ECDIS is acting as an e mail program and is using standard incoming and outgoing data transfer protocols In the Setup Connection window you can configure protocols settings in the E Mail Parameters branch of the connection parameters tree mi Setup Connection CS Value E Mail SMTP POP3 J Communication type Data center Europe Timeout s Attachment size Kb 120 1000 E Mail Parameters Automatic send receive 5 Check reply interval min SMTP outgoing e mail Reply to address Server name Port User name Figure 120 Setup Connection window E Mail SMTP POPS3 communication type E Mail Inbox via MAPI Automatic connection type If you set the E Mail Inbox via MAPI connection option the ECDIS will use the e mail program installed on your computer to send data requests and receive weather data files For the ECDIS to be able to use your e mail program the program should support MAPI Messaging API The ECDIS then processes received weather data and loads weather packages automatically E Mail Folder Send Recv Semiautomatic connection type In case you use the E Mail Folder Send Recv e mail connection option you need to set paths to two folders Send folder Send path and Receive folder Receive path Folders are set in the Folder Parameters
224. ing distance and bearing data to the Observation table Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data past track and vector Reckoning Position fix Distance NM Bearing Fix time Underwater awash rock RpNo2 k Calculate Remove AIl gt i Saa JIA Remove RemoveAll Position N42 42 658 E052 33 446 Change Position Discrepancy Result N00 00 000 E000 00 000 Accept Position Figure 151 Navi gt LOP Position fix tab entering observation data 2 To enter the distance to the observed point double click in the Distance field to make the field editable and enter the distance value The measurement units are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab 3 To enter the bearing from the own ship to the point double click in the Bearing field to make it editable and enter the bearing value 4 To set the observation time double click in the Fix time field the current time will be displayed Correct the time value so that it corresponded to the observation time if necessary 5 To specify the device used to make the observation double click in the Tool field to make it editable and select the device from the devices drop down list Depending on the specified device the error correction for the device is used in the position calculation 6 To add an additional observation for a reference point select the point in the Reference points list and press the Add button to the right from the Observation table a new observation
225. ing results of measuring bearings and ranges to the reference objects Calculating the position Accepting the calculated position as the new own ship position Additional parameters configuration is available corrections for constant errors of measuring devices To plot reference points in the chart view do the following 1 2 Press the Select reference point button to switch to the object selection mode In the chart view point the mouse pointer at the observed object and right click on it The window with the list of all objects under the pointer will open In the objects list find the observed object and double click on it to select The Would you like to name the reference point window will open where you can enter the reference point name Ji Navigational systen ETHER ESTE ELS Lu Si d J Caution area 4 Coverage 4 Unsurveyed area amp Land area J amp Horizontal datum st Sea area named we v r B r Figure 149 List of objects under the mouse pointer Enter the reference point name in the Would you like to name the observation point field and press the OK button You may leave the point without a name just press the OK button and press Yes in the You did not give a name to the reference point Would you like to proceed anyway message window The reference point will be added to the Reference points list and a reference point symbol Hei will be displayed in the chart view The p
226. int checkboxes The Check points panel will close and the check points editing mode will turn on Plot the checkbox in the chart view point the mouse pointer to the reference object and left click The check point will be plotted in the chart view The check point is connected with the own ship with a range and bearing line The values of the range and bearing are displayed in the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view The T letter near the bearing value means true bearing and the R letter means relative bearing 04 01 407 N 009 11 358 E Figure 231 Control points in the chart view To remove a check point open the Check points panel and clear the checkbox corresponding to the check point you want to remove To remove all check points press the Clear All button 9 1 3 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer To turn on the display of the range and bearing from the own ship to the mouse pointer open the Check points panel and check the Cursor DIST BRG checkbox The range and bearing are displayed in the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view 7 Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines The calculation mode is set in the Check points panel see chapter 9 1 2 Check Points Last update December 11 2012 170 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 9 2 Man Overboard and Position Fix 9 2 1 Man Overboard Functionality In case someone or somet
227. ional information tools A 139 anti collision display See anti collision display ARE qe 146 echo SOUNGSE 138 radar image overlay sese 148 navigational panel esses 125 navigational tools Check POUS mersa i E 170 ERBExexadenieuetigs See electronic range and bearing line OS DOOR upon eisteceeerenetenceseis See log book TAN OV CLO OAL Mec 171 navi calculator See navigation calculator POSION ab C ET 171 new version of database sse 33 objects information esssssssseeeeeeeen nnne 43 on screen KEY DOALG sx tnasicniuentacub pierrot deanei serani onei ere 14 overview weather download sssesesssssesesseeseeeeesrereeeeeee 9 own ship jor mre T ET 114 POS MIO 22250009 E E E E E tt Mirac ENDE E E 114 secondary past LACK scctstecd acsuncrinneseeatiaceviawnd ease 115 2 T EEI TOT 115 VEDCIO OSATEN NAET E AE E IELO CUIR ER ED SR PRIMER 115 own ship parameters sese 19 periodic date indicator eeeessssseeeeseeeeeeel 10 pitacy ANLOLMIAUION ecenin enkore Eea 113 A BACK E E E E A E A 174 plot waypoints in chart view ccccccesssessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 73 position C OFLC COON sesser 123 position discrepancies esee 124 POS NO a ui cuber tu oc Riu iua DONT E ui
228. isplay expired licenses before date 4 2 4 Dynamic Licensing Jeppesen Marine provides its clients with a new service dynamic licensing Dynamic licensing gives clients the possibility to pay for licenses for single charts that were actually viewed rather than for licenses for a whole database or a chart collection gt To activate the dynamic licensing service do the following 1 Contact Jeppesen Marine and subscribe to the dynamic licensing service You will be registered on the server In the subscription databases and chart collections available to you will be specified 2 To activate the service send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or in case of a local network from the server computer see chapters 6 1 1 Automatic Updating and 6 1 2 Semi automatic Updating 3 n response the updates server sends updates for already licensed datasets if there are any and the dynamic licensing initialization answer The initialization answer contains e The System ID of the system the answer is intended for e Indication of an action to be performed Activate or Stop the service or Change the service terms e Credit value which is a part of the overall bridge credit e Mandatory report date for not reported charts if a chart is not reported before the date the access to all data both reported and not reported datasets is denied and can only be resumed after the chart use is reported and confirmed 4 The
229. it only collision danger line is displayed 12 The collision danger line disappears from the screen when the target s closest point of approach has been passed i e the TCPA value in the Info gt ARPA Targets gt ARPA targets tab is unreachable t No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 Alarm ARPA Anti Collision Own Input Units o Setup and Sonar Tool be ship Output and Time Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min h Radius of CPAlimitcircie NM 1 0 Maximum CPA NM TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min iv Target Vectors Apply Parameters SHIP 17 07 11 2009 01 28 65 50 569 N 031 10 139 W lt esos 20 0 m 048 0 Not for use with position device Figure 227 The collision danger line disappears Last update December 11 2012 167 m CNAYMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 13 The own ship can now change the course to come back to its original track line f No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 SHIP 17 09 29 2009 01 28 65 51 300 N 031 09 948 W 2soc 20 0 kn coe 000 0 Not for use with position device Navi Calculator Target number 1 CPA TCPA 1 14NM unreachable Distance 14NM Bearing from own ship 271 Latitude Longitude 65 51 320 N 031713 378 W C0G S0G 270 0 15 0kn 2009 01 28 13 09 29 Aurora Figure 228 Own ship returns to its original course Last update December 11 2012 1
230. ith parameters and press Open The parameters will be loaded and displayed in the corresponding fields of the Ship Response window The Inspect Ship Position function operates with specific ship dimensions and other parameters The parameters are set using the Ship Response Options setup tool Last update December 11 2012 112 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 To save changed parameters and close the Ship Response window press OK To close the window without saving changes press Cancel 6 8 Piracy Information Use information about pirate assaults to plpan your route Piracy information is now available in ECDIS as a database supplementary section gt The piracy information section provides the following data e name type and flag state of assaulted vessels e date and location of incidents e description of incidents e URL of the internet site providing additional information about incidents e note on the latest piracy incidents To access the Piracy Information supplementary section you have to install a license for the data A piracy information license is installed the same way as a data set or area license Licenses are installed in the Data gt Licensing tab For more details see chapter 4 2 Licensing Data After the license has been installed turn on the display of the Piracy Information supplementary section Go to the Chart gt Chart Settings tab select the current database in the Supplement
231. ith the value of 100 is 100 times as large as the chart scale Last update December 11 2012 46 4 C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS al Z colors panel In the Z colors panel you can select one of the three palettes for depth layers presentation The Show hide colored Z layers option see above must be switched on Figure 43 3D Window Z colors panel Besides the 3D window control buttons you can arrange the 3D view by zooming it in zooming it out and rotating it To zoom the view in or out rotate the mouse wheel forward or backward respectively To rotate the view in the horizontal plane hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the view in the vertical plane hold the right mouse button and move the mouse If you change the view of the chart zoom in zoom out or scroll the chart the 3D view will be changed automatically The 3D window can be closed and resized as a standard MS Windows window 5 6 Setting up Chart Display This chapter describes how to configure the chart display The settings described here configure the chart appearance and the content displayed in the chart view In addition to the chart display settings there is a set of navigational chart settings The navigational chart settings configure the chart display so that it would be more convenient to monitor the own ship navigation The navigational settings include chart orientation true and relative motions modes best
232. its for the device offsets are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab Last update December 11 2012 20 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 To set the measurement unit for distances select the unit in the Distance Units list The setting is applied immediately 3 To set the measurement unit for speed select the unit in the Speed Units list The setting is applied immediately To set time parameters do the following 1 To set the time zone select the time zone from the time zones drop down list For the setting to take effect press the Apply button 2 To set the daylight saving enter the value in minutes to the Daylight Bias field For the setting to take effect press the Apply button 3 Tosetthe time format select the format in the Date Format list The setting is applied immediately 3 3 2 User Interface Language Setup ECDIS supports three languages for the user interface English Russian and Italian To set the interface language do the following 1 Open the Config System panel Figure 13 larm Anti Collision Own Input Units A System AIS Targets un Setup arge Tool Ship Output and Time Display Palettes Language Sound volume Day English United Kingdom Dusk C Night On screen keyboard Senica mode Figure 13 The Config System tab 2 Select an interface language in the Language drop down list 3 Forthe changes to take effect restart ECDIS 3 3 8 Vol
233. ject move the mouse pointer to the chart view and plot the line nodes using the left mouse button You can perform the following operations with the nodes To add a new node left click in a selected position the node will be plotted in the chart view To move a node left click on the node to capture it move the mouse pointer with the node to a new position and left click to plot the note To delete a node right click on it To insert an intermediate node left click on the line between two nodes the new node is created in the position of the pointer The node is attached to the pointer and you can move it Move the node to its position and left click to plot it in the chart view To add a node in the beginning or in the end of the line when you plot a line object adding nodes one after another the mouse pointer and the last node are linked with a line marker that indicates the length and position of the next line section To add a node to one of the line edges move the mouse pointer to the edge node the marker line will connect the pointer and the node now you can plot new nodes e Area object to plot an area object plot the object nodes in the chart view Nodes of area objects should be edited in the same way as nodes of line objects 6 To save the new mariner object press the Save button The object will be added to the objects list To cancel the object creation outpress the Edit button and say no to saving the
234. ject will be displayed in the chart and added to the Manual Update History list the Added action will be added to the object actions list To add a manual update to the chart from a Notice to Mariners do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab 2 Inthe databases drop down list select a database to which you want to add a manual update 3 Press the Add New button The Add New Object dialog will open Type Point C Line C Area Search Find Obstructions and foul areas d Obstructions in general d Snags stumps a Wellheads a Diffusers 3Em a fish havens s foul areas v From Notice to Mariner Figure 62 Chart gt Manual Update tab Add New Object dialog 4 Select an object from the objects list To find an object use the Search function enter the name of the object to the Search field and press the Find button 5 After selecting the object set the object geometry type Select a Point Line or Area option The geometry types that are not available for the specified object remain dimmed 6 Set the From Notice to Mariner checkbox and press the OK button The Add New Object from Notice to Mariner dialog will open B Add New Object from Notice to Mariner Fa Database Professional Notice 111 Source Producing Agency 8L Topografische Dienst Netherlands Source Identification code 10B 7 Cancel Show Figure 63 Add New Object from Notice to Mariner dialog Select the dat
235. l 3 Coastal 500 000 150 000 028 212E9360 Intended usage 2 Last update applied date 02 11 2008 Coastal Approach 150000 50000 Issue date 24 09 2005 Approach 50 000 15000 Edition Number 1 Harbor 15000 5000 Total number of updates 12 BE 5000 Apply Mark All Clear All _ 029 Z12E9630 040 Z12E9640 Figure 69 Data gt Chart Catalogue tab chart information pane 5 To use the Find option for searching charts enter the name of the source paper chart to the Find field As you are entering the name symbols charts which have the symbols you are entering in their names will be selected in the catalogue Keep entering the chart name symbols until you find the right chart 6 3 2 Viewing Chart Boundaries by Scale Levels All charts in the Jeppesen Marine chart database are divided into groups according to their scales and intended usage The groups are called scale levels see chapter 5 2 Scaling the Chart View Using the Chart Catalogue function you can display boundaries of charts in the chart view by scale levels To display chart boundaries by scale levels do the following P 2 3 Open the Data gt Chat Catalogue tab Select a database in the databases drop down list In the Chart Boundaries section check checkboxes next to the scale level names and press the Apply button Boundaries of charts assigned to the selected scale levels will be displayed in the chart view Use the Mark All button
236. l miles RAD NM turning radius at the waypoint in nautical miles Great Circle if the checkbox is set route legs are considered orthodromies if the checkbox is not set route legs are considered loxodromes Figure 81 Route Parameters window Change Settings tab 6 4 4 Route Plan The route plan can be viewed only in the route edit mode To view the plan of a specified route do the following 1 Open the Route Route Planning tab 2 Select a route in the routes list and press the Edit button The route edit mode will be switched on 3 In the route edit mode the route plan WPT table control points CP table and the route schedule Schedule table are available Start Route Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import I ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria auE ntBoute Ly P b WPT CP Schedule Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m WP LAT RAD NM XTD NM SPD k RL DIST NM DTA NM TIG 36 46 730 N 003 04 252 E 0 054 0 027 18 0 Y 0 6 183 8 ALGER Algeria 2 36746 409 N 003 04 887 E 0 054 0 189 18 0 Y 0 3 183 2 3 36 46 399 N 003 05 256 E 0 054 0 216 18 0 w 2 7 182 9 v v 36 48 893 N 003 06 775 E 0 054 0 108 18 0 2 3 180 2 5 36 49 802 N 003 04 181 E 0 054 0 162 18 0 2 8 177 9 Figure 82 Route gt Route Planning tab route edit mode Waypoints table 4 The f
237. lay can be regarded as a cone shaped collision danger region in which the user selected safety margin is violated if the relative vector terminates inside the sector It can be transformed to appear in the true motion display as shown in Figure 211 and is hereinafter referred to as the Collision Danger Sector CDS F F F k l PPC E i ri Ya Fr li Fl F F i F ki Pa E F LT i Li F e d k F hy Hs Li me Pi zu m l essere d MUN F acm mom om Rm RR RU F ae hk R m A E Aum MO EDO USO USO SO NUDO NUS GEO GS GAS A GNO m m no mn i ee ee eee SSS oe l TTE Um eS a eo ae a a ld te ee E ow oa I Geom RR Ge Ge GR Se SSS SSS RR RR GR SSS RR de Ge SSS Ge Ge Ge SSS SSS SSS SES i O 1 T Beyan Target nee So zx E Owmghip MM Le Relative s SOO Vector Figure 211 Collision danger sector CDS red in true motion display as it appears from transformation of collision danger sector as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an ARPA radar Last update December 11 2012 156 T NAVMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The CDS has identical properties as the CDL and can thus be displayed to any acquired target in a true motion overview Figure 212 and Figure 213 show how the OOW easily can identify the exact amount of evasive action required to pass with a minimum safety distance equal selected CPA limit Traffic scenario identical to Figure 2
238. le directly in the window To save the changes press the Save button to reset the file to its initial contents press the Reset button To close the window press the Close button xml version 1 0 encoding utt B 7 rook egaction nama DRAectuallsation egatting nama SogRMS eyalua Q 1 valuaz z satting sactionz section name gt Radar 7 setting name BrggMS 2 evaluert 3 valuez amp settingz setting name BrgCorrection z cvalue gt 0 0 lt value gt c setting setting name DistRMS gt cvalue gt 3 75 lt value gt setting gatting nama DistCorraction gt eyaluaQ 0 valuas e satting z tactian egaction nama DirFindar 1 gt zgatting nama BrgRMS gt value 1 valuez settings setting name gt BrgCorrection z xvaluezo Q value x settingz section section name DirFinder 2 gt setting name BrgRMS value 0 1 value c setting zsgtting name BrgCarrectian eyaluacQ 0 valuaz z satting z sactions e raat a _ Save Reset Close Figure 158 LOP Position fix advanced parameters window gt Before the start of a new manual position fix operation clear all previous observations only if the observations are not to be used in this operation To do so press the Remove All button to the right from the Observations table Last update December 11 2012 121 CNAVMARING LET User s Manual for NAVMARINE
239. line will be added to the table You can enter observation data to the new line 7 To remove an observation select it in the Observation table and press the Remove button to the right from the table 8 After the observation data have been entered the line of position LOP built using the data is plotted in the chart view with the time of observation displayed on the line LOP s with different observation time are advanced to the time of the latest observed LOP When advancing a LOP the own ship course changes speed changes and set and drift between the two lines are accounted for Advanced LOP s are marked with a TPL mark Figure 152 LOP Figure 153 LOP Figure 154 LOP Range Arc Bearing Line advanced bearing line 3 f the time is not set position calculation is impossible The Calculate button remains dimmed The type of position fix you are using defines which fields of the observation entry should be filled For example for a fix by bearings Bearing Fix time and Tool fields should be filled and for a fix by ranges only Distance Fix time and Tool fields should be filled Last update December 11 2012 119 CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To calculate the observed position do the following 1 To calculate the own ship position press the Calculate button The position will be calculated and plotted in the chart view as a NE symbol The position coordinates and the position offset from the c
240. list However the chart legend provides additional information chart units in the Chart Units section and the current settings of the dataset display in the Current Display section Object m ilex Information Chart Legend Information at position 36 49 489 N 000 12 977 E Chart Units Production Information Depth in Meters __ Edition Date 2005 03 26 Last Update 2008 11 08 Height in Meters Sounding Datum Not defined Vertical Datum Mean sea level Source ID 46 Quality ES of confidence U data not assessed Horizontal Datum WGS 84 Edition Number 3 Update Number 33 Scale 350000 Source Instituto Hidrografico de la Marina IHM Spain Status Non Official Current Display Projection MERCATOR SafeCont Unknown SafeDepth 2 0m MagneticVariation 0 75 Calc Mode Great Circle Presentation library v 3 4 Figure 39 Object Info panel Chart Legend 5 5 Additional Chart Windows The ECDIS provides the possibility to use additional chart windows besides the main chart window The additional windows are the look ahead window and the 3D window 5 5 1 Look ahead Window The look ahead window is a chart view window You can use it at the same time as the main chart view window and have two different views of the same area To open the look ahead window do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 2 In the New Window section press the Chart button Th
241. lors mean the following Blue the Check route tool has not yet checked the leg Red the Check route tool has found dangers along the leg presence of cautions does not affect this highlighting Yellow the leg is a rhumb line with the length of more than 195 Miles and the tool is unable to check it No color the Check route tool has found no dangers Set default route parameters to set parameters of the route that will be used as default when the route is created press the Parameters button the Route Parameters window will open Switch to the Default Settings tab set necessary parameters and press the Apply button for the changes to take effect The following route parameters are available in the tab SPD kn speed on the leg used by the ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from one waypoint to the next one in knots Route Parameters XTD NM allowable deviation from the track Change Settings Default Settings along the leg from one waypoint to the next in SPD kn nautical miles XTD NM RAD NM RAD NM turning radius at the waypoint in nautical miles Great Circle Great Circle if the checkbox is set route Show WP legs are considered orthodromies if the oe checkbox is not set route legs are considered N loxodromes Show Named WP only Schedule Show WP turns on the display of waypoint symbols in the chart view if the checkbox is
242. m for example Navstar GPS is used continuously and manual observation is for check the position by another than GPS data the aging is not applied to LOP measurements taken in different time In the Dead Reckoning mode we assume that Speed Over Ground error SOGerr affects to the aged measurements in SOGerr DeltaT D sin BRG COG for bearing measurements covariance and SOGerr DeltaT cos BRG COG for distance measurements Last update December 11 2012 190 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt Common examples of manual LOP fixes based on 3 bearing lines 1 Three reference points with bearing differences of 120 equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship Figure 242 Three reference points bearing difference is 120 equally distant from DR position a If the time of measurements is the same lines of position are equally accurate the observed position is in the center of the error figure and the figure is a circle Figure 243 Observed position in the center of the error figure Last update December 11 2012 191 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS b If the time of measurement is different lines of position are not equally accurate anymore due to measurement aging For example if one LOP was measured earlier than the other two the observed position moves to the intersection of the later measured LOPs Figure 244 Observed position near the interse
243. me each day the Scheduled download is the solution The Scheduled download option allows downloading all weather products listed in your subscription To download weather data using the Scheduled download option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Press the arrow near the button to open the download options menu Select the Scheduled option The Weather Download Request dialog will open Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages 4m 4 5 15 av se 1008 14 00 Monday Go Today asl he Pc vds gie Overview Qy Open Grib Coastal en Cyclones Inspect Ship Pos Download v Settings Expandinfo gt gt ImpotJWP S LL Oston Overview Coastal Custom Figure 114 Weather Weather Presentation Figure 115 Weather Weather Packages Easy Mode Download button Download button 3 The Scheduled download option is available only for e mail communication types Last update December 11 2012 94 C NAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 In the Weather Download Request dialog you can add products to the request set products parameters remove products from the re
244. mic licensing do the following 1 Make sure that the Enabled Dynamic Licensing checkbox in the Data Dynamic Licensing tab is checked 2 Scroll the chart view to the chart you want to open and zoom in The chart will be opened and added to the non reported charts list The price of the chart will be deducted from the credit rest value To view the non reported charts list press the Non Reported button and to view the reported charts list press the Reported button In lists names and data access expiry dates are displayed To refresh the data displayed in the Data Dynamic Licensing tab press the Refresh button 4 The use of charts should be reported to the server within a specified time the mandatory date of the next report If you fail to report the charts you will be denied access to both reported and non reported charts To resume the access to data all charts should be reported and confirmed 5 To report the use of charts request updates using automatic or semi automatic updating functionality see chapters 6 1 1 Automatic Updating and 6 1 2 Semi automatic Updating Reports on the use of dynamically licensed data are sent automatically together with the update request and the confirmation answers containing new credit rest value new date of mandatory report and expiry date for all reported charts are sent back with updates To change terms of the dynamic licensing service or to terminate the service do the following 1
245. moved automatically setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the Custom Base or Custom Standard Presentation parameters not mentioned in the table belong to the parameters group marked with Last update December 11 2012 49 CNAVMARINGE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display Text settings To set the Custom Display type do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 2 Inthe Display Type drop down list select the Custom option The list of object classes that you can select to be displayed will open piso CC EN 3 Select the object classes you want to be displayed To select an object class Administration area Named check the checkbox to the left from the object class name All objects of the Aiport area selected object classes will appear on the screen immediately sien Anchorage area Beacon cardinal Beacon isolated danger 4 b Set by Save OVCustom Delete 5 To set one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations select the Figure 48 Chart 2 configuration name in the drop down list Data Display tab Custom display type 4 To save the current configuration of the Custom Display enter the name of the configuration to the drop down list at the bottom of the Display Type section and press the Save button 6 To delete one of the previously saved Custom
246. n tomen Water depth relative to the transducer in meters 2 X X Offset from transducer in meters distance from transducer to keel gt DTM Datum Reference Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Local geodetic datum and datum offsets from a reference datum This sentence is used to define the datum to which a position location and geographic locations in subsequent sentences are referenced Latitude longitude and altitude offsets from the reference datum and the selection of the reference datum are also provided S DIM GOCGl 82 X3 84 X X Xb 80 3Xx7 0C005 Dhlh s cBo hb not processed not processed not processed Last update December 11 2012 178 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt GGA Global positioning system GPS fix data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Time position and fix related data for a GPS receiver GGA hhmmss ss 1111 2 a VAPUAmP AAT ds i xt KR eR a Mt a Sa M x ox xxxxl hh CR LF No Field Description Comments 1 hhmmss ss UTC of position 2 IRI Latitude degrees and minutes 3 a N S 4 yyyyy yy Longitude 5 a E W GPS quality indicator Number of satellites in use 00 12 may be different from the not processed number in view Horizontal dilution of precision ox Antenna altitude above below mean sea level geoid Units of antenna altitude meters 11 X X Geoidal separation the difference between the WGS 84 earth not processed
247. n attribute Quality symbol Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating the quality of the electronic chart The setting only works for the All Other display type The quality symbols correspond to so called zones of confidence There are six categories of the confidence zones The categories are defined by the quality of survey in particular by the positional accuracy the depth accuracy the seafloor coverage and typical survey characteristics The categories are the following in brackets the position accuracy is given as an example A1 5m A2 20m B 50m C 500m D worse than 500m and U data not assessed For the S 52 presentation the quality symbol looks as an ellipse with a u letter inside if the data are not assessed or as a triangle with the zone of confidence mark inside for other zones For the C Map presentation zones of confidence are indicated with a dashed line To find out the category of the zone of confidence open the Object Info panel with a right click in the chart view and select the Quality of Data object in the objects list Check the Category of zone of confidence in data attribute in the Attributes pane to the right Picture symbol Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the Pictorial representation attribute Low accuracy ind Turns on display of special symbols indicating that the position of an object is defined with low accuracy the QUAPOS attribut
248. n checkboxes both options can be set at the same time e More than the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is more than the set depth limit e Less than the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is less than the set depth limit 4 After the depth alarms parameters have been set press the Apply button To set a target lost alarm do the following 62 The depth value received from an input device is displayed in the navigational panel in the following format DPT 30 0m where 30m is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom Depth information is displayed in the graph in the Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab Last update December 11 2012 133 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 Open the Config gt Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab 2 Check the Target lost alarm checkbox to set an alarm for loss of ARPA targets and the AIS lost alarm checkbox for loss of AIS targets 3 Settings are applied immediately 7 6 4 Alarm Conditions List gt The following alarm conditions are processed in ECDIS Position device is lost The signal from the positioning device is not being received To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Ship is out of coverage The own ship is not in the chart view The alarm is deactivated when the own ship is in the chart view again To avoid the own ship out of the c
249. n for all alarm conditions check the Buzzer On Off checkbox To switch to the Silent Mode clear the checkbox and confirm the operation The silent mode is indicated in the chart view the Silent mode notice is displayed in the upper left corner of the chart view Last update December 11 2012 130 _ CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units m Setup AE Tool Ship Output and Time Antigrounding alarm Alarms Time of prediction 1 min Dangers safety distance 0 100 NM iv Guard Zone sector 90 iv Danger objects inside Guard Zone Set Parameters Figure 176 Config gt Alarm Setup tab Buzzer On Off checkbox 7 6 1 Alarms and Warnings Panel When an alarm is activated a message describing the alarm is displayed in the Alarm Conditions indicator and the Alarms indicator starts flashing Alarm Soest ORIOLE not avail red to attract attention If the message is not displayed completely because SHIP 14 56 44 20n0 n of the lack of space move the mouse pointer over it to open a tool tip with the complete message text Figure 177 Alarms and Alarm The alarm is added to the alarms list To open the alarms list and view all Conditions indicators with the alarms activated at the moment click on the Alarm indicator alarm message tooltip L SAlanns 1 Warnings a Unknown Datum 18 59 43 1 ARPA lost 18 59 14 ag Lag lost 18 58 06 s Echo Sounde
250. n the Weather Time Series panel you can see the evolution of specified weather parameters in a single point or along a specified route IMPORTANT To create time series for a specified route weather data currently downloaded in the ECDIS should cover the geographical area along which the route goes The time period of the weather forecast should cover the time scheduled for navigating along the route see chapter 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule To create time series for a single point do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Point on Chart option Figure 133 Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Build for s Display 6 Hours fe Point on Chart 6 Hours Route 12 Hours E 1 Day Point on Chart L Locate Apply Figure 183 Weather Weather Time Series tab time series for a point Last update December 11 2012 106 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 Press the Locate Point on Chart button and plot a point on the chart by left clicking in the chart view The point is highlighted with a yellow ring Oo The point coordinates are displayed in the Lat and Lon fields of the Point on Chart section The coordinates can be edited 3 Select a time range of the time series on the Display drop down list The range has been extended up to 2 days Figure 133 4 Sel
251. na ug tas 171 position of instruments sssssssssseeeeeeeeeneneneeeeeeenennnnns 19 position source indicator eeeeeesssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeennns 8 position sources dead reckon E us cu teca cuantos tbid UE DIE 117 manual position TIX e erri tort oin ain 117 position correction eie eo entero tro bro ee ER Ita Ebr Eee bbrb es 123 position discrepancies sees 124 primary and SeCONAALY cccccccccccccceeeessssseeeeeeeeees 116 DEP ETE AEE I EE I EAEE E E cad oU M T AE 55 quick access buttons sesesssssssseeoeeereesssssssssseseerereerreessssss 12 radar display indicator ccccccssssssesessseecceeceeeeeeeeaeeees 10 EER T A E E E m Tm 148 reme mONO aeeiiaii ea e E 129 POD ee E 174 route critical points sssseeoeeeeesesessssssssesesseetrerressssssssseses T FOULS edit mode iL uia eere korr oda Ha EU saute Cou Siu Eo US EORR KERN ERAS 74 toute export 16 Mle ecceri er ien dren 79 route monitoring o i c PARETI E T A A A 135 poa OEE E V A 136 roue Paes aemnnsaaconcbene aoudurse RUDI 76 route planning ALUELLA ANIC 4 carers tag T thee 69 critical POINTS PTT Em 71 export route to TCs scwsiesccicnomaneavoonsasderbaveeavorndaerneascaaees 79 CXDOPL LOA Y IDE morerei qoo Erer a EES red ESS 80 port froni devit Eieren RE iro Era i tux 80 MANUA sses See manual route planning TOUTS AM NN TE 76 CEE e E Serene M 78 route 95 ME dle seeren ie datos Ser erare
252. nce to go from the current waypoint to the end waypoint Figure 183 Route Monitoring panel BTW Bearing to the next waypoint from the own ship depends on the own ship current position BWW Bearing from the current waypoint to the next waypoint DWP Distance from the current own ship position to the next waypoint XTD Cross track distance on the leg the value is positive if the own ship is to the left from the route and negative is the own ship is to the right from the route Ifthe indicator is green the actual XTD is less than the planned XTD on the leg Ifthe indicator is red the actual XTD exceeds the planned XTD on the leg WPT List of waypoints that are not passed yet select a waypoint in the list and in the TTG and ETA lines below the time to go to and the estimated time of arrival to the selected waypoint are displayed respectively TTG Time to go from the current own ship position to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list ETA Estimated time and date of arrival to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list Last update December 11 2012 136 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 7 3 Go to Waypoint Function The Go to Waypoint function allows you to plot one waypoint that will be your destination For example if you are approaching a pilot station and port control suggests you drop anchor at some position and wait for the pilot there you may use the Go to waypoint function to
253. nd go to the Own Ship tab and then to the Position of Instruments tab 2 Select the Echosounder in the instruments list Last update December 11 2012 138 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Syst AIS Targets s dee Setup arge Tool Ship Output and Time Own ship setup Position of instruments Conning station Xoffset 20 0 m Yoffset 0 0 m Select instrument Radar 3 Xoffset 0 0 m Bearing repeater starboard Bearing repeater port s Yoffset 0 0 m Echosounder Z offset 00 m Advanced Save settings Restore settings Figure 187 Config gt Own Ship gt Position of Instruments tab 3 Set the offset of the instrument along the X Y and Z axis in the offset fields NOTE that the password is required to save the settings 4 Save the settings by pressing the Save settings button 8 2 AIS The ECDIS implements the full support for the Automatic Identification System Using the AIS functionality you can receive and view AIS data of the AIS targets located at a specified distance from the own ship and display the data in the chart view You can also receive messages from the AIS targets and send the own ship AIS data and other messages to other vessels IMPORTANT For the ECDIS to be able to receive AIS data the AIS receiver should be registered in the ECDIS The registration is carried out in the Config gt Input Output tab This can only be done by t
254. ndSonar Tool Output and Time Anticollision ON OFF Figure 222 Further decrease of vector length 8 By using the ERBL the user can easily determine the amount of escape action necessary to pass astern of the target with the required safety margin 1 0 NM i e 60 degrees to starboard The TCPA Critical parameter must reflect the maneuvering characteristics of the ship VLCC will need more time to change its course than a HSC f No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 SHIP 17 03 07 2009 01 28 a 9549 650 N 031 12 489 W esos 20 0 k coe 000 0 F 1 798 NM from to 060 6 240 6 65 50 528 N031 08 678 W Eae ia Setup andSonar Tool Output and Time Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min Radius of CPA limit circle NM 10 Figure 223 Use of the ERBL tool to assess the maneuver Last update December 11 2012 165 CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 9 Own ship has now changed course so that it will pass astern the target at a slightly less distance than the CPA limit 1 66776 x15 SHIP 17 04 02 2009 01 28 f No official data available Refer to paper chart 65 49 868 N 031 12 042 W esoc 20 0 k ecos 048 0 56 Unk 2 388 NM from to 127 8 307 8 65748 392 N 031 07 503 W tem Ham ARPA Ics Me x Setup andSonar Tool ship Output and Time 7 Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 1 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Figure 224 The
255. nding lt unknown gt Added 2 10 2009 0 Update Information Wellheads c4 Extrascl Author of update TK Ei e Date of review 02 10 2009 09 27 50 4 Added 2 10 20090 Date of update 02 10 2009 09 26 58 X Deleted 2 10 2009 gt Removed from display Highlight Reject Figure 58 Chart gt Manual Update tab manual updates history 3 To expand the list of objects click on the plus sign next to the dataset name To collapse the list of objects click on the minus sign next to the dataset name 4 To expand the list of actions performed with an object click on the plus sign next to the object name To collapse the list of actions click on the minus sign next to the object name 5 To view detailed information about entries of the manual updates history tree select the entry The information will be displayed in the pane to the right from the History pane 6 To hide a manual update object select its entry in the updates history tree and press the Removed from display button The object is hidden and the Removed from display button remains pressed To display the object again select it in the history tree and outpress the Removed from display button 7 To highlight the updated object in the chart view double click on one of the actions that have been performed with the object or select the action in the actions list and press the Highlight button The ECDIS will highlight the object in the position an
256. ndling operations are available in the Weather Packages tab e Downloading weather packages to the ECDIS Import of weather packages is only necessary in case you are using the E Mail Manually via attachment communication type With the E Mail Manually via attachment communication type you will have files with weather packages saved in some location on your computer To be able to use the data you will need to load the files to the ECDIS To load weather packages press the Import JWP button in the Open dialog select the packages files and press the Open button The files will be loaded to the ECDIS e Viewing extended information about a data request or a data package To view expanded information about a data request that is being processed or a received weather package select the package in the packages table and press the Expand Info button the button label will change to Hide Info The information will be displayed in the window below To hide the information press the Hide Info button Last update December 11 2012 96 Av _ NAVMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Initiating the send receive process The Send Receive button initiates the data exchange procedure for a data request in case it is not done automatically The data exchange procedure includes sending the weather data request to the weather server and receiving and proceeding weather data packages The automatic send receive should be set through the Setup Connecti
257. ne The information displayed for each license includes expiry date coverage and license code You can get a list of licenses that expire before a specified date To view the list of licenses expiring before a specified date do the following 1 Open the Data gt Licensing tab 2 In the Databases drop down list select a database 12 Note that when you enter information in the Data Set or Area Name field you will only find Zones and Areas Cells are also listed as areas in this list All Cells Areas and Additional Areas within a Zone have a unique number For example the cell 94B in Zone 1 will be listed as Zone 1 Area 91 Last update December 11 2012 31 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 Press the Display expired licenses before date button to open the pane where you can view the licenses expiring before a specified date 4 n the date field enter the licenses expiry limit date and press the Display expired licenses before date button In the list below all licenses that expire before the specified date will be displayed 4 mex Dynamic tuner Auto Import fl Chart Add Remove Licensing Catalogue Database icensing Updating S57 System ID Databases C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Professional Loo n Display expired licenses beforedate 06 2010 gt Zone 0 Display expired licenses before date Licenses list Add Licenses from file Figure 24 Data gt Licensing tab D
258. ne below Select one of the routes in the Select Route pane Select a time step of the time series in the Step drop down list 1 3 6 and 12 Hours options are available 4 Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters To select a parameter tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name To unselect a weather parameter clear the checkbox 5 After the parameters have been checked the graphs of the parameters development in time along the route will be built in the graph pane A point on a parameter graph shows the value of the parameter at a specified time for the point on the route where the own ship is supposed to be at that time The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis vertical axes are different for each weather parameter and represent the parameters magnitude 6 When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the pointer position In the parameters list the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right of each parameter The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow vertical line New feature in 5 0 84 program version Last update December 11 2012 107 CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation AlarmArea Time Series Packages Build for C l Displays Hours
259. ned distance from the chart view center the chart is redrawn and the ship symbol is moved to the initial position in the chart view In the relative motion mode the own ship symbol stays in the same position in the chart view and the chart moves as the own ship position changes 2 To turn on and setup the true motion mode do the following 1 In the Navi gt Navigation Data tab press the True button in the Ship motion mode section In the true motion mode the chart is stationary and the own ship symbol is moving When the ship reaches a pre defined point inside the chart Tue view it jumps backwards and the chart is redrawn V Ship in center Ship Motion Mode The own ship redraw area in the True motion mode is defined automatically Figure 172 Navi 2 However you can set your own ship redraw area using the Ship Redraw Area Navigation Data tab function Ship Motion Mode 2 To set a new ship redraw area press the Set button in the Ship Redraw Area PEOR section An initial pre defined redraw area will appear in the chart view The Ship Redraw Area area is indicated with a green internal and a red external boundary circles 3 The red boundary is the boundary where the ship will appear each time the O o o screen is redrawn To configure the external red boundary use the upper slider IEEE in the Ship Redraw Area section 4 The green boundary is the internal limit of the ship redraw area When th
260. ng data and replaces the deprecated HDT sentence S THS x xl a2 hh lt CR gt lt LF gt e mee O ome memes Heading degrees true TLL Target latitude and longitude Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Target number name position and time tag for use in systems tracking targets S Thhhy Ex itli ii S VAR TS a c c hhmmss ss a a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Last update December 11 2012 183 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS DECRE NNNM MONI CON pom mem 0000000 soe o NEN yyyyy yy Target longitude ew eqe temo s pse 0 I Target status L Lost tracked target has been lost Q Query target in the process of acquisition T tracking DNUENNL TII gt TTM Tracked target message Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 IMO Resolution A 820 1995 and MSC 64 67 Annex 4 Data associated with a tracked target relative to own ship s position 10 12 13 1 2 4 6 7 8 9 11 S TTM xx R ARK ar Arar S5 XuX 5 Rex Gy Oea ya hhmmss sst at ENNeCR lt LF mej fas 0 oen i Poe ewa s zoe meme eem 0 0 DMCENUCCTTT HR NN ep bemm o se wm o e 0 0 je eeen 0 DNUNNUTII TT c NN NN ox Time to CPA min increasing EE LRL CI NN NN je bee Last update December 11 2012 184 r Cin AINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS DECRE NN NN 12 Target status L Lost tracked target has been lost Q Query target in the process of acquisition T Tracking po fe Referenc
261. ng passages do the following 1 Open the Disabled passages tab and check the passages you want to close for route calculation Last update December 11 2012 70 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Disabled Passages Arctic Bering Sea Arctic North Sea Route LI Arctic North West Passage L Buran Channel East River N Y LI English Channel v Inshore traffic allowed V Use rivers v Highlight AX MarkAll Clear all Figure 72 Route gt Route Finder tab Disabled Passages tab In order to allow or forbid sailing through all passages use Mark All and Clear All buttons To allow using inshore traffic zones for route calculation check the Inshore traffic allowed checkbox The route can be calculated outside Traffic Separation Schemes but can be shorter To allow using rivers for route calculation check the Use rivers checkbox If the Highlight checkbox is ticked the passage will be marked on chart when selected 6 To scroll the screen to the selected passage press the Go to Position button The passage will also be marked with an arrow symbol 7 Once you have added all your restrictions recalculate the route press the Calculate button This time all added restrictions will be taken into account To add restrictions to the route calculation by plotting them in the chart view do the following 1 Press the Add restriction button Ada restriction 2 Draw a line or an area t
262. nings tab there is a list of all currently active warnings Warnings are removed from the list as soon as the warning condition is cleared In the Alarms and Warnings panel you can also acknowledge all AIS and ARPA targets To acknowledge AIS targets press the Ack all AIS button to acknowledge all ARPA targets press the Ack all Targets button Last update December 11 2012 131 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 6 2 Antigrounding Alarm The ECDIS allows to set an anti grounding guard zone ahead the own ship All objects entering the guard zone and considered to be dangerous activate the alarm To turn on and setup the anti grounding alarm do the following 1 Open the Config Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Antigrounding alarm tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units nom Setup MS Lione Tool Ship Output and Time Buzzer On Off Antigrounding alarm Alarms Time of prediction 1 min Dangers safety distance 0 100 NM iv Guard Zone sector 90 M iv Dangerobjects inside Guard Zone Set Parameters Figure 179 Config Alarm Setup tab Antigrounding alarm tab 2 Setthe anti grounding guard zone area it can be defined either by the time of prediction value or by the dangers safety distance the zone with the bigger area is considered as the anti grounding guard zone a Time of prediction enter a time value to the Time of prediction field default time is 5 minutes The t
263. nitor Position Device TCP IPport2001 10sec Autopilot TCP IP port 2002 10 sec Restore Settings Save Settings _ Figure 6 Config gt Input Output tab To add a new talker do the following 1 To add an input output device press the New button The Talker Setup dialog opens Talker Setup Device Name Device Type Position Device Talker ID Communication line Baud rate COM1 Communications Por 4800 Retransmission line Baud rate Y 4800 M Timeout 10 Ignore CRC Figure 7 Talker Setup dialog A special input output configuration file io lines xml may be used for input output setup The file contains description of communication lines and is located in the C ECDISDATA Config folder If the file is used the input output interface is slightly different than that without the configuration file The differences will be described as special notes in specific features descriptions Last update December 11 2012 16 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 Set the device parameters in the Talker Setup dialog Device Name Name of the transmitting device Device Type Choose the type of the transmitting device from the drop down list TalkerlD Talker identification Communication line Baud rate Select the communication channel and the channel baud rate from the corresponding drop down lists Retransmission line Baud r
264. nization data Data type type of data that should be synchronized can be Databases Updates Manual Updates Mariners Objects Routes Own Ship Configuration or Chart Data Manual indicates if the task was carried out automatically Manual No or manually Manual Yes Attempts done number of attempts to perform the task when the number reaches five the task metadata are cleared Navi Synchronization Calculator Monitor Computer Info Synchronization Status Computer name N A Synchronization status Stopped Computer role N A Current state Stopped no synchronization is available Synchronization log Tasks to perform Failed tasks _ Clearlog Sync OFF Figure 17 Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab Tasks to perform tab Last update December 11 2012 25 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS In the Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab the Synchronization indicator is presented to help monitor synchronization The indicator shows the current state of the synchronization process Corresponds to the Disabled able to synchronize with remote computers current state the synchronization tool is disabled the local computer can only receive synchronization data from other local network computers and carry out synchronization but it cannot send synchronization data to other computers Corresponds to the Ready to start synchronization current state the local Sync ready Ms compute
265. ntieiisniae ierit Hei uitio 129 chart OPIS TALON oireisiin ied ida ccna onda uk s uUFU dr abe ao ei 128 chart presentation MOdeIS ccccccccceecccceeaeeesssseeeeeeeeeees 47 chart scale and quick access buttons panel 12 chart scale DIllel a escort reposo ea n Rp EbM o EUE CUT AD dE QNI opas 12 chart updating PUG OVA eas semet etatem end catu EE LED EE 56 n 57 VIENDE NC 58 Mariner objects eeseeeseesessss See mariner objects TOVIC Wy E EDT LED E Dr aUted o REED DUIS eU dE 57 SEMA LOMA C eceran eee 56 charts catalogue chart boundaries by scale level 68 SAR m T 67 charts display UD WT T 45 DOORIBIOIERS oes ceni eisasetacc ooa S arbi rebua i ses eE t 43 ehari legend ee ee onere en gusten ne ee ne 43 depth areas SCID S oracio Sra sitesi doo ko gU CHEN DR E UD Ced do Roa 51 depih SN Sosire rdinara as erdum ie cou ivi ER SUE E 52 look ahead WindOwWw 2 eoe eee o aee toa eese tenes 44 objects INfFOPMALION ccceeeseeccecceeceeeeaaseeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 43 jb UIT H CNAN NETT 23 wl n 4 BC ON OE VA i onc eine b at t omietuscr ice oc decr etai adus 40 ivo Tr C See chart display setup supplementary db dui eos de etat breite Eo box petet bte trita bte 50 CS SC MUM OSs oooasosccodbrscs
266. nts are used for the anti collision display Own Ship the symbol of the own ship displayed in the position received from the primary positioning device Target the symbol of a target displayed in the position received from the target detection device Own Ship Speed Vector Target Speed Vector vector predicting the position of the own ship target where the own ship target will be in a specified time proceeding at the current course and velocity For your convenience the own ship speed vector is highlighted with a thick line and a green circle CPA limit Closest Point of Approach a circle with a radius equal to the minimum CPA set in the Config gt System Anti collision tab If the own ship symbol enters the circle the distance between the own ship and the target is less than the set CPA limit Collision danger sector CDS if the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the collision danger sector the own ship is going to pass the target at a distance less than the set CPA limit Collision danger line CDL if the end of the own ship speed vector lies on the collision danger line the own ship and the target are on a collision course 8 5 3 Configuration of the Anti collision Display The Anti collision display is configured in the Config Anti Collision Tool tab To configure the anti collision display do the following Last update December 11 2012 158 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARIN
267. o longer receiving valid position data The target is represented by a lost target symbol Low Water The minimum height reached by a falling tide Lower High Water LHW The lowest of the high waters of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Moon and the Sun Lower Low Water LLW The lowest of the low waters or single low water of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Moon and Sun Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Magnetic Variation The degree to which the magnetic north differs from the true north This data is available from the Current Chart indicator Man Overboard MOB Mark that can be placed on a digital chart to indicate emergency location The ECDIS will track that location to aid in returning the boat to MOB coordinates Maritime Mobile Service Identity MMSI MMSI Numbers are a series of nine digits transmitted over a DSC radio path in order to uniquely identify ship stations ship earth stations coast stations coast earth stations and group calls These identities can be used by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the general telecommunications network principally to call ships automatically Mean High Water MHW A tidal datum The average of the higher high water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Higher High Water MHHW A tidal datum The average of all the high water
268. o minimum passing distance Figure 206 shows the collision scenario Figure 198 with simultaneous display of CDL and relative vector as it can be imagined from radar display a N E ppc Own Ship V Target Relative Vector Figure 206 Collision risk interpretation in 1 true motion Tip of own ship s vector touches the collision danger line to target 2 relative motion The relative vector has direction towards centre of own ship Figure 207 shows that the safety margin can be introduced by a circle that is located at the centre of own ship with radius equal the user selected CPA limit In the relative motion display of an ARPA radar the safety margin is usually set by utilizing the variable range marker VRM Lal i d F d F a s a i P a AM PPC i r E Ea hy F T PF Hn PF Hs F E a M Ld ag k r Hi g k k a i y 2 n Ta Te T F a h F k i i Own sii r Tamel E Safety margin um Relative CPA limit Vector Figure 207 Introduction of safety margin representing a minimum passing distance at closest point of approach Last update December 11 2012 154 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The solution to pass a distance equal to the selected safety margin CPA limit astern of target is shown by a course change to starboard which deflects the relative vector so its extension becomes a tangent to th
269. o specify a light in the chart view move the mouse pointer to the light the pointer will change to the target EH pointer with a tip Select light sectors and right click on it The sectors of the light will be highlighted To unselect the light move the mouse pointer to the selected light the pointer will change to the target EH pointer with a tip Unselect light sectors and right click on it The highlight of the light will be cleared To highlight sectors of all lights select the All sectors option To highlight only white sectors select the White sectors option To highlight all light sectors in the area press the Static button o o0 95 To highlight only sectors visible from the own ship press the Ship button Display of lights sectors covering the own ship position only works in the navigation mode When the navigation mode is off this function is automatically switched to the static mode 7 6 Alarms The ECDIS provides the system of alarms which announces by audible and visual means conditions requiring attention When an alarm is activated it is displayed in the Alarms panel and the Alarm button starts flashing red IMPORTANT No use of the Silent Mode is allowed while the own ship is underway as it may affect safety of navigation The audible indication can be enabled or disabled only for all alarm conditions there is a general alarm buzzer control in the Config Alarm Setup tab To allow using audible alarm indicatio
270. o the ECDIS see chapter 6 6 Weather Forecast Download In the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the Toggle Weather button This button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view In the Weather gt Weather Packages tab select the loaded data package in the packages table and press the Display button The data will be displayed in the chart view If you can t see the data make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather data When the display of weather data is on values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view To turn the display of data from a weather file do the following 1 In the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the Toggle Weather button This button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view When the button is pressed the ECDIS opens grb or xml files that were opened last If there were no weather files opened or you need to open different files use the Open Grib and Open Cyclones buttons The Open Grib button opens grb files with weather forecasts saved there and the Open Cyclone button opens xm1 files with cyclones data To open a file press the Open Grib or Open Cyclones button in the Open dialog select the file to open and press the Open button The data from the file will be displayed in the chart view If you can t
271. ode off left click on the Scale state indicator The indicator should become orange 4 You can also turn the best scale mode off by clearing the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel The true wind is wind relative to a fixed point on the earth The relative or apparent wind is the speed and true direction from which the wind appears to blow with reference to a moving point Last update December 11 2012 127 CNAYMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 5 3 Chart Display Palettes The ECDIS implements three color palettes The palettes are set to provide better conditions for viewing charts under various illumination conditions The palettes are Figure 167 Day palette Figure 168 Dusk palette Figure 169 Night palette To set one of the palettes do the following 1 Open the Config System tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units System y Setup MS laneta Tool Ship Output and Time Display Palettes Monitor brightness control e Day Default value 128 Dusk Ll 128 Night Set Restore default value Service mode Figure 170 Config System tab Display palettes 2 In the Display palettes section select one of the palettes The selected palette will be applied to the chart view immediately 7 5 4 Chart Orientation The chart view can be oriented to the true North up to the own ship course up or to the route up To set the char
272. of the AIS targets display depends on the targets distance and time from the own ship The activation distances and time are configured in the Config gt AIS tab To configure the activation distances and time for AIS targets do the following Last update December 11 2012 142 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 System AIS Targets om Setup g 10 Open the Config gt AIS tab Figure 193 Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Tool Ship Output and Time v Auto activation Use own transmitter as source of position V Truescale symbol Meeting point Distance to Dangerous Activation CPA TCPA to Dangerous Eres 0 500 NM 0 500 0 500 NM seo 0 500 NM 150 min ital v Show meeting point AIS targets visibility range AIS zones display M f v 25 000 000 25 000 NM Show AIS targets activation range cR Fo ae 0 500 NM Set Show AIS targets danger range v Pasttrack Reset Past track interval 30sec Pasttracklength 5min gt M Figure 193 Config gt AIS tab activation distances and time settings Check or uncheck the Auto activation checkbox if the checkbox is checked the Distance to Activation field becomes editable and you can set the value of the distance to activation different from the distance to dangerous approach value if the checkbox is unchecked the value of the distance to activation is set the same as the value of the distance to dangerous approach To be able to use th
273. oint coordinates are displayed in the Position fields below the Observation table To change the reference point position type in new coordinate values and press the Change button The reference point will be moved to the new coordinates In the Reference points list you can move points up and down select a point and press the Up button to move the point up in the list or Down button to move the point down in the list To remove a point select it in the list and press the Remove button To remove all points press the Remove All button Observation Points Underwater awash rock Coastline SIRES SIA Remove Remove All Figure 150 Navi Manual Observation tab Observation Points list gt Reference point plotting is only possible if the Navi gt Manual Observation tab is open and the Select reference point button is pressed If any other or no tab is open right clicking in the chart view opens the Object I nfo panel f the reference point is a point on land select the Land area or the Coastline object and the reference point symbol will be plotted in the position of the mouse pointer on the land or at the coast line Last update December 11 2012 118 _ CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To enter observation results do the following 1 The observation data are entered to the Observation table To enter the data for a reference point select the point in the Reference points list Now you can start enter
274. ollowing information is automatically entered and appears in the waypoint table as you plot waypoints on the chart WP Waypoint number cannot be changed LAT Waypoint latitude LON Waypoint longitude RAD NM Assigned turning radius at the waypoint Expressed in nautical miles Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window XTD NM Cross Track Distance XTD deviation from the track along the leg from this waypoint to the next The XTD value is used for determining dangers and cautions along the route Expressed in nautical miles Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window SPD Assigned speed on the leg from this waypoint to the next Expressed in knots Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window Last update December 11 2012 76 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e RL A choice of whether Rhumb Line v or Great Circle sailing will be applied from this waypoint to the next To switch between the Rhumb Line and Great Circle sailing click in the sell Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window e DIST xx The distance from this
275. on function see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup Displaying weather data on the chart The Display button displays weather data received in a specified weather package on the chart To display weather data select a weather package in the packages list and press the Display button IMPORTANT If a package is deleted without saving data to a GRIB or XML file the Save button you will not be able to recover the data To get the deleted weather data you will have to request and receive them once more Deleting a weather request or a weather data package The Delete button deletes specified weather packages from the packages list To delete a package select it in the packages list and press the Delete button Saving data to a GRIB or XML file The Save button allows saving a specified weather data package to your computer The data package is saved as a GRIB or an XML file weather forecast data are saved to a GRIB file and cyclones data are saved to an XML file To open the files use the Open GRIB and Open Cyclones buttons on the Weather Presentation Easy Mode panel see chapter 6 7 Weather Forecast Display 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup Weather forecast data are transferred over the Internet In the ECDIS you can use either HTTP Internet or e mail connection The ECDIS uses the HTTP Internet connection by default and has to be connected to the Internet to be able to transfer data The connection with the weather server has to
276. oning device provides coordinates in a coordinates system different from the chart coordinates system a position correction is required For example the positioning device provides coordinates in the S 42 coordinates system for plotting the own ship on a paper chart and the electronic chart is made in the WGS 84 coordinates systems usually all digital charts are made in the WGS 84 system in this case the own ship position in the chart view is incorrect A coordinates correction should be provided to the ECDIS to display the own ship symbol in the correct position The coordinates system of the positioning device is set in the device itself the electronic chart coordinates system is displayed in the navigational panel see chapter 7 7 2 Route Monitoring Panel If the positioning device and the chart have different coordinates systems a position correction should be introduced IMPORTANT The position correction is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password To introduce a position correction do the following 1 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab The position correction values are entered in the Position Corrections section Position Correction Lat 5 000 2 Enter the correction for the latitude to the Lat field and the correction for the ioa 1009 longitude to the Lon field To add the correction value to the coordinate enter the plus sign in front of the value to subtract th
277. oordinates where the parameters readings were done e mE B EE GE 5G G9 B9 Bg ED ED En E amp D G9 amp mw tu tH 58 07 195 N 005 47 462 E Weather Weather Weather Weather lt EMeEx Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 15 02 2009 00 005 Sunday Go Today Area Cont Symb Text Wind vectors Precipitation Swell waves Total waves 4 gt gt Step 1o Weather Legend l Temperature Temperature value label in selected units Isotherms in selected units R 38599 AAE RS TSNTRUROR UR SER 87 BN E Legend F Figure 128 Display of the temperature using the Text type symbols loa L 0 6 5 To select measurement units for the display of a weather parameter double click or press the ENTER key in the Measurement Units field of the weather parameter when the legend is open the Measurement Units column is hidden The drop down list with measurement unit options will appear in the cell Open the drop down list and select one of the measurement units Some symbol types cannot be used to display specific weather parameters For example Contour type symbols cannot be used to display wind speed and direction or precipitation data If a symbol type cannot be used for a weather parameter it is grayed for that parameter All symbol types available for a parameter can be used in the chart view at the same time Last
278. ositions with the specified coordinates in the chart view press the Show button 3 Select a measurement unit for Distance Nautical Miles Statute Miles or kilometers in the drop down list near the Distance field 4 Select the mode of calculation Great Circle or Rhumb Line in the Mode drop down list Press the Distance Bearing button 6 The calculated values of distance and bearings to and from will be displayed in the Distance Bearing To and Bearing From fields 7 Toclear the calculator press the Clear All button To solve the direct geodetic problem do the following Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Distance Bearing panel 2 Enter coordinates in the Start Point section Enter the distance value in the Distance field and select a measurement unit for distance nautical miles statute miles or kilometers in the drop down list to the right from the field Enter the Bearing to and Bearing from values Select the mode of calculation Great Circle or Rhumb Line in the Mode drop down list Press the Calculate End Point button to calculate coordinates of the end point The end point coordinates will be displayed in the End Point section To show the line connecting the start point and the end point in the chart view press the Show button 7 To clear the calculator press the Clear All button Last update December 11 2012 175 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To calculate great circle points
279. our EN m Deep contour 10 0 m J Isolated dangers a acd Plain depth contour Set Parameters Figure 47 Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Presentation models 2 Inthe Presentation section select one of the presentation models The selected model will be applied to the char view immediately 5 6 2 Display Type The Display Type option is used to choose the required level of detail to be applied to the chart The ECDIS implements four display categories Base The Display Base is that part of the Standard Display which should be permanently retained on the display It consists of coastline high water own ship s safety contour to be selected by the mariner indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour indication of isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges overhead wires etc and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation traffic routing systems scale range orientation and display mode units of depth and height In addition to the objects set a specified set of chart presentation parameters is used Custom Base Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or removed from the base set of parameters The last chart presentation parameters settings are saved in the system Standard The
280. overage for a geographic area The coverage is made up of the electronic charts joining to each other For example you have purchased a license for the English Channel Zone 1 Area 10 It means you have a continuous coverage for all waters in and around the English Channel It looks as if you have a single chart for the whole English Channel and some part of this chart is displayed on the screen 1 17142182 j Finitanrid Figure 35 Chart coverage for the area of the English Channel Zone 1 Area 10 Each Zone Area and Cell is made up of a set of electronic charts copies of paper charts with different scales If you wish you may switch on the display of borders of the source paper charts But usually it is not necessary 5 1 Moving around the Chart View The coverage of a geographic area with electronic charts consists of a set of charts that make up one single chart and some part of this single chart is displayed on the screen like in Figure 36 When moving around the chart you are as it were moving the chart under the screen Last update December 11 2012 40 CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Figure 36 Electronic chart with a part of it on the screen To move around the chart you can use three ways e Left click in a position on the chart and the chart will be scrolled so that the position becomes the center of the screen e Move the mouse pointer to the upper lower left or right border of
281. play of chart elements in the chart view Chart elements that can be displayed selectively are divided into four groups depth elements text elements light sectors and other elements To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Text settings tab In the tab there is a list of chart text elements Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors CMAR Light info Periodic date S52 Safety contour Text important Text generic iv National text Mariner s notes Shallow contour Deep contour 10 0 5 0 m 52 simplified i igati i p Safety depth 20 i Text other iv Aids to navigation tooltip 2 0 m m Set Parameters Figure 52 Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Text settings tab 2 To display an element in the chart view set the checkbox to the left from the element name to hide the element from the chart view clear the checkbox There are the following elements in the Text settings tab Light info Turns on the display of characteristics of lights The information of a light is displayed next to the light symbol If the setting is off the information about a light can only be obtained from the Object Info panel Periodic date Turns on the display of objects with a p
282. ply SA Certificate dialog will open 2 Inthe folder tree select the folder where the certificate is stored The certificate file stored in the selected folder will be displayed in the pane to the right Apply SA Certificate 2 ENC Licencing iho crt 3 4 Authentication Parti E Testa Ft Test 4b E Test 4c amp Test 4d H Test 4e H Test4f Message log Apply certificate _ Restore certificate Installed certificate info Close Figure 31 Apply SA Certificate dialog 3 Select the certificate file and press the Apply certificate button The certificate will be applied and the message A new SA certificate public key has been installed The certificate is valid to dd mm yyyy or unless the SA issues a new one for security reasons will appear In case there was an SA certificate previously installed the new certificate will override the previous one 4 You can restore the previous SA certificate To do so press the Restore certificate button and confirm the operation The previous certificate will be restored Last update December 11 2012 36 6 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 5 To view information about the currently installed SA certificate press the Installed certificate info button The Information about installed certificate window will open The following information on the current SA certificate is available the certificate issuing organization the Issued by fiel
283. quest set geographic areas for which forecasts are required set periods for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings i Weather Download Request ForecastFor 44 aer 2008 Downloadat 42 00 Total 9450 kb Save Request Load Request Delete all scheduled Send Request Cancel Figure 116 Weather Download Request dialog Scheduled request dialog 3 Set the data request add products from the Add new product drop down list select product parameters in the Products field set data coverage in the Coverage field select the forecast period in the Period field and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download the Setup Easy Mode procedure 4 Youcan save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later To do so press the Save Request button in the Save As dialog indicate the location where the file will be saved enter the file name and press the Save button The request configuration will be saved to an xml file 5 To download a previously saved request configuration press the Load Request button in the Open dialog select the request configuration file and press the Open button The request configuration will be loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog 6 After the request has been configured in the Download at bo
284. r Download ND ae eeepc cesta eo RR TE E i HEP ENS 97 Last update December 11 2012 3 CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS br Weather Forecast Es DIS erria aa AE a EEA E R E 101 6 7 1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data seeseeeseesseeeess 101 6 7 2 Beo a EEES e E E A E N E AP E E E A E te etre N 104 6 7 3 Display of es Sc 02 19 g ecreis S 105 6 7 4 Weather TMe SOS S sinteni E Laon fuat UPC Red iA 106 6 7 5 Weather Alarm Alea MERE E rs 108 6 7 6 Comparison of ROUGES cccccccccsececceececsescecsseeceeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaseeseeesseeeessaeeesseeeseuseseeessaes 109 6 7 7 MPEC ONN FP OSHON sarn aE tre EE E ete eae ene ree ee 110 OS Piracy IM Ora E tercer 113 T Se TN i EI E E A E A OTO A A E A A P TE A EE EATE OT 114 L1 Q QwnGhip ssc llega e Passed M e ETE 114 Qu POSU SOM Cols ogre erent ee ee nee centr T rr try MUR n fepe IVa IE ree ere ee ee ert 116 1 2 1 Primary and Secondary Position SO EBS s csiod ems neonisennabelaessuoiuncaientaaduneduidentheaunnahad wells 116 1 2 2 Dead FeSO len PPP TE eene 117 1 2 3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPS ccccccccseeeeeceeeeeeceeseeeceeeeesseaeeeeees 117 7 2 4 FPOSIBOI Oe UA tipi gece pctecins dmt e erica eats nce FPE EE ens let cud nen toes UpA EUM DNE T Ced 123 12 9 Position Discrepancies RRTNEUINRUR 124 EE o9 0th ie Emm 124 7 4 Navigational Data Display and SOUrCES cccccc
285. r Indicator Indicator Display Indicator Indicator Indicator Close Button Scale Status Data Display Periodic Date AlS Targets Dangers and Warnings Alarm Conditions Indicator Type Indicator Indicator Display Indicator Cautions Indicator Indicator Indicator Figure 2 Indicators panel Position Source indicator has the following states Last update December 11 2012 8 i CNAVMARIN 3 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The Position Source indicator is situated in the Navigational panel It indicates which position source is being used at the moment for displaying the own ship symbol in the chart view The indicator turns orange if the Primary Position Source fails and the Secondary Position Source is used see chapter 7 2 1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources GPS CCRP The currently used position source is a GPS receiver set as the 2 CCRP h t primary or secondary position source in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position Sources tab The indicator displays the name of the position source as it is registered in the Config Input Output tab M POS The currently used positioning method is dead reckoning see chapter 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning gt Source Scale indicator has the following states The Source Scale indicator turns orange if the scale of the current chart the chart under the own ship or under the center of the chart view is twice or more as large or as small as the original chart scale The
286. r is ready to receive synchronization data and carry out synchronization Sync run Corresponds to the Synchronization in progress current state synchronization is j running on the computer Corresponds to the Waiting for remote synchronization to finish current state synchronization is in progress between remote computers of the local network and the local computer is waiting its turn for synchronization 3 5 3 Routes Synchronization All data types are synchronized between the network computers automatically However synchronization of routes may require additional actions on the part of the user Route planning is supposed to be done on the Route Planning Station computer Synchronization of routes between the Route Planning Station and the Master computer should be done manually To synchronize routes manually do the following 1 Open the Route Route Planning tab 2 In the Synchronize routes with drop down list select the computer to synchronize routes with and press the Synchronize routes with button A synchronization task will be created and added to the list of tasks to perform 3 The task is performed using the same procedure as for automatic synchronization tasks 3 6 System Diagnostics Tools The new function has been implemented for complex diagnostics of the system and saving the results in the form of a report Start up test might not be enough for exhaustive diagnostics of the system In this case us
287. r lost 18 58 06 a6 Wind lost 18 58 06 AckallAIS Ackall Targets Figure 178 Alarms and Cautions panel Alarms tab Activated alarm triggers sound indication and Alarms indicator flashing To stop the sound indication and indicator flashing the alarm should be acknowledged There are several ways to acknowledge an alarm To acknowledge an alarm do the following 1 Click on the alarm message in the Alarms panel 2 Open the alarms list click on the Alarms indicator and left click on the alarm entry The loud speaker symbol is removed and the entry is moved to the last position in the list the next alarm entry is highlighted 3 To acknowledge other alarms use UP and DOWN arrow keys to select alarm entries and ENTER or SPACE keys to confirm the acknowledgement After it has been acknowledged the alarm is deactivated and its entry is deleted from the alarms list if the alarm condition is not true anymore otherwise the alarm is deactivated but its entry remains in the alarms list In some cases alarms are deactivated automatically after the alarm condition disappeared Besides alarms there is another category of situations demanding attention on the part of the user warnings Warnings are notices to the user which do not require acknowledgement and do not trigger the alarm buzzer In case there are active warnings the Warnings indicator becomes yellow Click on the indicator to open the Alarms and Warnings panel In the War
288. r s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 The Custom Base display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the Base Display type By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings 4 The Custom Standard display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the Standard Display or All Other types By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings In the table below the use of chart presentation parameters for the display types is presented Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display Depth settings Two shades Safe contour only Isolated dangers in unsafe waters Shallow pattern Safe depths Plain depth contour Other settings Plain borders NOAA navaids ENC boundary T T Chart boundary Overscale id T Scale boundary Lat Lon grid 4 the parameter is mandatory for the display type when the display type is turned on the parameters are set automatically setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the Custom Base or Custom Standard the parameter is not mandatory for the display type when the display type is turned on the parameter is not set automatically but it remains set if it was set before setting or removing one of the parameters doesn t change the current display type the parameter is not mandatory for the display type when the display type is turned on the parameters are re
289. r subscription to the ECDIS Last update December 11 2012 85 C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Weather subscription information includes the list of products you have subscribed to For each product the following information is provided type of the geographical weather model validity period coverage area limit forecast period and time step and a list of forecast elements provided for each product pressure temperature and so on You are allowed to download only those weather products that are listed in your weather subscription To download weather subscription do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Subscription option from the drop down menu The Weather Subscription window will open with a message that the subscription is not found Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Download v Settings Expandinfo Import JWP Display Unsubscribe Setup Easy Mode Figure 100 Weather gt Weather Packages tab 2 To obtain subscription press the Request Subscription button in the lower left corner of the Weather Subscription window ll Weather Subscription px The subscription was not found Press the Request Subscription button to obtain it Request Subscription Figure 101 We
290. r the track points to be recorded to the route The page currently displayed in the Log Book panel cannot be deleted as well as pages for the day before and the day after Last update December 11 2012 173 NAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS IMPORTANT Imported log book page overwrites the page with the same date 9 3 2 Log Book Play Back Using the play back functionality of the log book you can view the log book entries animated in the chart view To play back the log book do the following 1 Open the Log Book panel Date 2009 05 08 From 00 00 To 23 59 Ship stime amp GM x Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 0 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 07 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 0 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 0 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 04 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage manna am amn smn am an Refresh AddRemark GoTo Position SaveAsRoute Print Cleanup Export Import iv Remark Hints Figure 237 Log Book panel play back controls 2 Open the log book page you want to play back To do so set the date and the time period at which the data were recorded in the log book in the Data and the From and To fields 3 Select the replay speed in the Replay speed drop down list The replay speed
291. range is from the specified CPA limit to 20 0 nautical miles 6 Set the TCPA limit enter a value to the TCPA limit field If the target will reach the CPA to the own ship in time equal or less than the TCPA limit the target is relevant for the collision risk evaluation The allowable input range is 1 0 to 30 0 minutes For the anti collision display functionality to start processing the target the TCPA between the own ship and the target should be less than the specified TCPA limit and the distance between the target and the own ship should be less than the specified maximum CPA 7 Set the critical TCPA enter a value to the TCPA Critical field The critical TCPA is the minimum time needed for the own ship to carry out a maneuver for safe passing the target The TCPA critical is only used if the distance between the target and the own ship is less than the minimum CPA distance The allowable input range is 1 0 to the specified TCPA limit value To turn on the display of speed vectors of all activated targets check the Target Vectors checkbox To activate all selections or any changes which are made after the initial selection press the Apply Parameters button 8 5 4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits The indication of the approach of targets to the own ship to the specified time and distance limits is used to warn the user that the distance and time between the own ship and the target have reached a crit
292. re detailed information e Speeds Directions summary information about time speed and direction of a selected current stream is given Graph Speeds Directions TE Sen Die ot 14 0C 1 91kn 30 00 00 0 1 60kn 30 00 15 0 1 18kn 30 00 Flood 01 0 2 12kn 30 00 16 0 0 22kn 30 00 Flood 02 0 1 97kn 30 00 17 0 0 78kn 195 00 Ebb 03 0 1 27kn 30 00 18 0 2 27kn 195 00 Ebb 04 0 0 31kn 30 00 A AFA n8 a omm om c Figure 98 Tidal stream information Speeds and Directions table 6 5 3 Astronomical Information Information about celestial bodies is available in the INFO gt Astro Info tab To access information about celestial bodies do the following 1 Open the Info Astro Info tab Echo Sounder Radar System Astro Tides Navi Synchronization Diagram Info Calculator Monitor urc Time Reset Time Astronomical Info In UTC Format 2009 10 02 08 21 Sun Moon Planets sorta troche imei Altitude 30 79 Standard Transit Civil Twilight Nautical Twilight GMT 05 00 Bogota Lima Quit z Azimuth 66 67 Rise 2009 10 02 10 58 Bearing 93 93 Daylight bias O min Latitude N 39 30 700 Longitude W 075 33 400 Duration 11 43 hours Results In UTC Figure 99 Info gt Astro Info tab Transit 2009 10 02 16 49 Bearing 179 28 Altitude 46 72 Set 2009 10 02 22 41 Bearing 265 45 36 The graph can
293. records all events that occur during a voyage as well as the own ship positions and configuration changes The log book also has a playback feature to allow a voyage to be recreated in a controlled environment Together with the main ship log book the ECDIS keeps the ship track log The main log book contains entries of all classes System Track Voyage User records ARPA targets and AIS targets whereas the track log only contains entries of the Track class The difference between the main log and the track log is that in the main log records Track entries at regular intervals and the track log records all Track entries coming from the primary and secondary position sources 9 3 1 Viewing Log Book Entries To view the log books do the following 1 Open the Log Book panel 2 To view the main log press the Main Logbook toggle button and to view the track log press the Complete Track toggle button Both logs share the same user interface If there are differences in functioning of an interface element for the main log and the track log it will be mentioned in the element description Last update December 11 2012 171 6 10 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Date 2009 04 17 7 From 00 00 i To 23 59 ship stime z GM x Start Play Back Cycle playback Replay speed x1 bsc nc n d can Aaa z Date Remark 2009 04 17 21 27 0 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn 2009 04 17 21 26 05 DR 43 0
294. required at all times in all geographic areas and all circumstances It is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation Display Scale Ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground normalized and expressed as for example 1 10 000 Dongle Small hardware device that unlocks the ECDIS Dongle Number Similar to the Serial Number a Dongle Number is attached to the Dongle made up of 20 digits in the following convention 1234 123456 1234 123456 DR See Dead Reckoning Draft The extent to which a boat protrudes into water The draft of a boat may vary due to changes in weight and changes in water salinity Drift The cumulative effect of wind and current on the ship DSC See Digital Selective Calling Ebb Current Ebb Movement of tidal current away from shore or down a tidal river or estuary Echo Sounder See Sounder 196 Av Aii Electronic Chart Display and Information System ECDIS A hardware software data marine navigation system that meets the specifications of the International Hydrographic Organization IHO An ECDIS is the only electronic system allowed to replace paper charts under the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea SOLAS Electronic Chart System ECS A system comprised of navigation software navigation data system hardware An ECS is any combination of hardware and software that displays marine charts electronically The term ECS is
295. resets the time to the current time The current time is displayed for the time zone selected in the Time Zone and Daylight bias drop down list Time format for the date and time display in the date and time field is set using the drop down list in the upper left corner of the tab Time format for the display of astronomical information is set using the drop down list in the lower left corner of the tab 5 Astronomical information is displayed in the three tabs inside the Info gt Astro Info tab the Sun Moon and Planets tabs e Sun Provides information about the current position and height of the sun above the horizon as well as about the sunrise twilight and sunset for the input date The information is presented in three tabs Standard Transit Civil Twilight and Nautical Twilight e Moon Provides information about the current position and height of the moon above the horizon also includes information on the rising decline and the following phases of the moon for the input date The information is presented in two tabs Moon Transit and Moon Phase e Planets Provides information about planets selected in the planets drop down list including the current position the height above the horizon the rising and the decline for the input date for the specified planet 6 6 Weather Forecast Download IMPORTANT Weather downloading procedure can take considerable time during which other functions of ECDIS are not available It is
296. rface language ucseeere cd esee eteseveia eum a essi est eta vup dad 21 volume SC OUND P M 21 OV Ae ACI AL OM soei eriei e enon aee 11 voyage monitoring TIMMONS ERE E ERR E 135 jii MT TET 136 PISCINE 76 Vova e ae nede csv niit aceto tradet EE 78 Waypoint 2O X XXX 137 weather download setup confieure CONNECHON si cteencnscscasiaicncatsieewiicteeesearioeeans 97 E Mail Folder Send Recv communication type 99 E Mail Inbox via MAPI communication type 99 E Mail Manually via Attachment communication type IQ 100 E Mail SMTP POP3 communication type 99 Internet HTTP communication type 98 test COMME CTO Mo rocade nir anria 100 206 NAVMARING J anti weather forecast alarm AC eds oe er pdeo tenti E vot pater uM EePb Duo IVse e Dobdd es Dal Lee cients 108 inspect ship position eeessssssseseeeeeeeeen 110 POULS COMM AT IS OM secca eode tatus ER 109 WRG eds eis ei NETT 106 weather forecast display con IE AON eseis aite od aderenti 101 eM Tel FO S NE E E TET 104 LOS SITUGHLIOD ecdesv pesa AA E 105 UIT T FO NITET 101 weather forecast download coastal download iiie tet rere Prae be bye ee os brEkI avoid 9 custom CO Wil OAC ve eene o aber rEEH Eo SP RETE vrER EE Savon ERR ari a 93 Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Ea y VOU aic noe abad uu DUU
297. rm conditions see chapter 7 6 Alarms There are no alarm conditions currently The alarm conditions indicator where descriptions of alarms are displayed is empty If the alarm indicator is flashing red there is an alarm condition Descriptions of alarm conditions are displayed in the alarm conditions indicator To acknowledge a condition left click on the alarm conditions indicator To open the alarms panel left click on the alarms indicator In the panel the list of all current alarms is displayed 2 4 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Panel Move the pointer over the scale indicator to expand the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel Current Chart Scale 1 166316 2 1 4 Overscale factor Zoom In Zoom Qut Chart Scale Edit Field Original Chart Scale Best Scale b Best Scale Man Over Board position y ra Fix own ship position ERBL tool Check Points tool Figure 3 Quick access panel Last update December 11 2012 12 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The quick access buttons provide operative access to specific ECDIS functions The Man Overboard button plots a MOB man overboard position symbol on the chart at the own ship current position The Fix on ship position button plots a fix position symbol on the chart at the own ship current position The ERBL tool button launches the electronic range and bearing measurement tool ERBL The Check Points tool but
298. rogram might not be able to calculate parameters of the meeting point Then the explanation will be shown on the Meeting point info tab saying one of these Calculation failed Might be because there is no current route at the moment Own ship far away from route e AIS far away from route 9 New feature in 5 0 84 program version Last update December 11 2012 140 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Own ship target is outside the pre defined corridor around the route Meeting point far away from route The meeting point exists but lies outside the pre defined corridor around the route e Meeting point does not exist Own ship has already met the target or cannot catch it up Meeting point calculations might be impossible due to own ship motion backwards invalid AIS data etc The same information about the meeting point with an AIS target can be shown in an independent window To do so double left click as shown in Figure 190 or right click the symbol of a target in the chart view Figure 191 f 3 AIS KERET Position report Static and voyage data Meeting point info l Meeting point 59 50 022 N 030 32 475 E Meeting point time 11 04 2013 20 39 01 Time to meeting point 4m 7s Distance mark 1360 0 Km Meeting Caution area info point Figure 191 Meeting point information window and point indicator on the chart An ar
299. rt the set of attributes of the object may include additional information attributes such as for example the object name textual information picture and other attributes that are not required to be displayed in the chart To get access to this information use the Object Info function The function displays attributes of objects in a separate panel the Object Info panel To open the panel right click in any position in the chart view The Object Info panel will open with a list of all objects that were under the mouse pointer when you right clicked in the chart There are different types of objects They are point line and area object types Hence a position in the chart can be shared by numerous objects of different types All objects that share the position where you right clicked will be listed in the Object Info panel If you need information about a particular object right click on the object The object will be listed in the Object Info panel together with all other objects under the pointer Object 4 milex Information Chart Legend Information at position 36 49 489 N 000 12 977 E 4b DataSet Z12AJ930 Professional Attributes Navigational system of marks DataSet filename Z12AJ930 C00 Caution area Chart Title DEL CABO DE GATA AL CABO DE LAS 44 Coverage HUERTAS Y DEL CABO MILONIA AL 44 Depth area CABO IVI 44 Horizontal datum shift parameter DataSet source type Non official 44 Sea area named water area Source iden
300. rt Boundaries by Scale Levels ccccccccseseecceeseeeceeseeecseeecseuseesseaseesssageees 68 04 Route uaa ANI FIOtING Mit mE 69 6 4 1 EROS Route PlanniN sensns a a aaia 69 6 4 2 Manual Roe Fanni PORE IET E OO LL T2 6 4 3 KOU mio MOTO eR UE 14 6 4 4 EEPE a PRU EU rS 16 6 4 5 Adang Cnical POINTS NR EO DUET TT 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule ciicicdsaadendiiidasaidavivenddiecimwilavsddwsndcudwantbevbuesudeahiaedlsaienead dubdaeadsudiwesdhdadne 78 6 4 7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File iuuenem nans rnb ione taces aaa uc ad eta eerta domns 79 6 4 8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a DeVICE ccccccceccccesceeceseeceeeeseeeesaeeeseeessees 80 6 5 Tides and Tidal Streams Data scsi sicrvatessctsaienteannieavieietantionratenadorsniiaisieasisastudvatanaiyalesieeaatensieaentuieanionsis 81 6 5 1 A cien e E E EOS TERME 81 6 5 2 Toal streams Monna IS DE TN TENE 82 6 5 3 sige qe ae erst Mle fe ag 119 dE a DU I UR 84 66 Weather duei o Ee ne otT T TENTE 85 6 6 1 Weather I SCM ON PNE Emm t 85 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download Ne en a neem ere ene E ae eran ee eer err err rere 88 6 6 3 Overview and Coastal Download ssssssssssssssssssee eene nennen nnne nnne nnns nnns 91 6 6 4 RAN sR Roi MNT E EE OT DE 93 6 6 5 scheduled DOoWhlOBE ces enucacctnnusaszesscencennacasccacalsc otic suem et niii and lap Riu ne cs eit Une obe Mae peas 94 6 6 6 vveather Fackages Handige EE Ei 96 6 6 7 Weathe
301. rt view may be overloaded with data The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the overloading One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view Chart elements that can be displayed selectively are divided into four groups depth elements text elements light sectors and other elements To display or hide elements from the Depth settings group do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Depth settings tab In the tab there is a list of depth elements Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors iv Two shades Shallow pattern 52 nananana 50 Safety contour 5 0 52 simplified _ Safety depth 2 0 Shallow contour 2 0 Deep contour 10 0 iv Safe contour only iv Safe depths Isolated dangers a in unsafe waters Plain depth contour Set Parameters Figure 51 Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Depth settings tab 2 To display an element in the chart view set the checkbox to the left from the element name to hide the element from the chart view clear the checkbox There are the following chart elements in the Depth settings tab e Two shades Only two depth areas are to be highlighted in the chart view safe and unsafe water areas The safe water area is separated from the unsafe water area with the safety contour set in the Contours section of
302. rway BREST BALTIMORE Irelai BREST France BALTIMORE Irelan DOVER HARBOR United K DOVER HARBOR U CALAIS France Route1 TH MARSTRAND Sweden Figure 182 Route gt Start Voyage tab 2 Select a route in the table of routes in the left hand part of the tab To show the route in the chart view press the Show Route button To hide the route press the Hide Route button 3 Indicate the waypoints of the route between which route will be monitored In the From table select the start waypoint and in the To table select the end waypoint Table headers will display the time of departure from the start waypoint and the time of arrival to the end waypoint in the brackets 4 f the system is connected to an autopilot check the Autopilot ON OFF checkbox and the ECDIS will start sending NMEA sentences in the APB format autopilot sentence B to your autopilot 5 To switch to the route monitoring mode press the Start Voyage button The ECDIS will start monitoring the own ship on the route In the route monitoring mode the route is shown in red the voyage information panel is displayed under the navigational panel and the Voyage indicator state changes according to the current voyage situation Also when in the route monitoring mode the Destination approached and Exceed deviation alarms can be activated if set in the Config gt Alarm Setup gt Alarms tab 6 To quit the route monitoring mode outpress the Start Voyage
303. rx c map no You will receive data files in the response e mail Save the files to any location on your computer Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup Last update December 11 2012 92 r CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 6 6 4 Custom Download The Custom download option allows downloading all weather products listed in your subscription To download weather data using the Custom download option do the following 1 2 E 9o Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Press the arrow near the button to open the download options menu Select the Custom option The Weather Download Request dialog will open Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mod Weather Weather Weather Weather _ Weather Presentation Easy Mode Pre
304. s ARPA targets from the chart view All navigation information is displayed Left click on the indicator to remove the information from the chart view No navigation information is displayed Left click on the indicator to restore the last Navinfo display state Navinfo gt Periodic Date indicator has the following states The Periodic Date indicator shows if objects which are active only in specific periods of time during the year are displayed only in the periods when they are active the indicator is green or are always displayed in the chart view disregarding their activity periods the indicator is orange see chapter 5 6 7 Other Settings Periodic date Periodic The Periodic date setting is set The Periodic date setting is not set Radar Display indicator has the following states The Radar Display indicator shows if the radar image display is on or off see chapter 8 4 Radar Image Overlay Left click on the indicator to turn the radar image display on or off The radar image display is on The radar image display is off Last update December 11 2012 10 CNAVMARIN 3 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS gt AIS Targets Display indicator has the following states The AIS Targets Display indicator shows if the AIS targets display is on or off see chapter 8 2 2 AlS Targets Display Left click on the indicator to turn the AIS targets display on or off AIS The AIS targe
305. s 28 4 1 Installing and Displaying DATaDelSBS sserecnssin esas aa vaa Ra x td aatcudtea ak Rd ka dra dl n pa E vac dau 28 4 1 1 dns inis Eee Isi cT TOU ET a iaaiiai 28 4 1 2 NS Oe MO 1 SIS Boausebduiedcisnsrsidihlnsid i mua id paie imb d dat a E RD NNNM 29 SC ERES ABI er EH 30 4 2 1 MS te Licenses Mantdliy er n 30 4 2 2 Installing Licenses tom PB seeirsirirsirioenin niniin oa ENR a abs uated 31 4 2 3 Viewing Installed EICBITSBS six iain insaccteseustoannendaandijeaiaaaiustaanlsuaatacdbdliudanedidmedtanddieenteonsentnaniisueladsutaus 31 4 2 4 Bene eae E gp ME UT E UE 32 4 3 Installing New Version of the Database sssessssssssssseeeenneeenn nennen nnne nnne nnns 33 44 Licensing Software Modules cate cate sanatsnaretecncon seach ride san seeetstenssadiand udzosecumsusseridadedurenadsandiasisamndeiates 34 Eo BE ey ii OE Cl aiaa dase aE aia 34 4 5 1 Bh of ENC Data MEM 34 4 5 2 Carde Media SUNDO eiei E T 9f 4 5 3 MPO orto ge te 0 o E cc 38 4 5 4 Updating Imported S 57 EIE EE 39 Last update December 11 2012 2 CNAVMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 9 CAPT OPPE T PHI HHCHE ERECTO 40 5 1 M ving ARE th Chant is TE S III LUE 40 a2 eT ME uta VION TO mA 41 aa Las 0 1 ene et CE 43 5 4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend iuusazs om tica do qudd A dt Ugu AI Fuit d dab ln CER cu ih boa d 43 5 9 Additional Chart WINGOWS EU 44 5 5 1 Look ahead WINKO
306. s the updates log is kept where the list of updated datasets is recorded as well as the list of all changed objects In the list of changed objects objects are grouped by hydrographic organizations that issued the updates by datasets to which the updates were applied and by numbers of files in which the updates are stored You can view the both lists in the Data gt Auto Updating gt Updating Log Review Updates pane To view the list of updated charts and a complete list of updated objects do the following 1 Open the Data gt Auto Updating tab and press the Updating Log Review Updates button The Updating Log and Review Updates panes will open Dynamic Auto Import 4 E fl x Licensing Datahasen Updating S57 Databases Professional Updates log Review Remark Refresh Clear Highlight SemiAuto Name Status Number H0 Estonian Maritime Administration EMA Updating Z14A50JA Accepted 2009 10 02 13 21 EE203001 Z14A50PA Accepted 2009 10 02 13 21 3 43 Book update No 009 Edition 1 Date 2009 714A513A Accepted 2009 10 02 13 21 RESARE 654 Added Moved Updating Log Book update No 010 Edition 1 Date 2009 Review Updates Z214A513A Accepted 2009 10 02 13 21 HERPES MEAM Fa Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Licensing Auto Updating zd Figure 57 Data gt Auto Updating tab Updates Log and Updates R
307. s accepted an entry about it is added to the logbook The manual fix entry may look as follows Date 30 03 2009 From 00 00 To 23 59 Ship stime amp amp M x StartPlayBack Cycle playback Replay speed x1 Main Logbook f Complete Track iv System Track Voyage v Userrecords v Targets AlS targets s Type Man obs positie 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 48 00 42 51 994 N 009 13 686 W reliable Updat Man obs positic 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 46 57 42 51 707 N 009 13 768 W reliable Man obs discre 30 03 2009 13 48 0 distance and bearing shift 0 377 NM 194 1 Fix RMS 0 009 NM Man obs measu 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 46 34 42 52 746 N009 11 093 W distance 2 2 e ee Se eee eee ee o mtm ms eee ee eee ele SaveAsRoute Print LogBookArchie _ M RemarkHints Figure 157 Log Book panel manual fix entries To configure additional manual position fix parameters do the following 1 Open the MODevices config xml file where you can enter values of RMS and fixed corrections for observation devices To do so open the Config gt Own ship gt Position of instruments tab and press the Advanced button The Editing of LOP Position fix function advanced parameters Do you wish to continue message will appear Press the YES button the MODevices config xml file will be opened for editing in the LOP Position fix advanced parameters window 2 Edit the fi
308. s the chart so that the own ship stayed in the chart view The navigation mode status is indicated with the Navigation mode indicator see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel when the navigation mode is on the indicator is green when the navigation mode is off the indicator is orange To turn the navigation mode on off do the following 1 To turn the navigation mode on left click on the Navigation mode indicator The indicator should become green EL NN The chart view is scrolled so that to display the own ship symbol in the chart view 2 To turn the navigation mode off left click on the Navigation mode indicator The indicator should become orange navigation mode is on 7 5 2 Best Scale Mode When in the best scale mode the ECDIS displays the chart with the largest scale existing for the given region The best scale mode works only together with the navigation mode The navigation mode turns off if you left click in the chart view while the To turn the best scale mode on off do the following 1 To turn the best scale mode on left click on the Scale state indicator see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel The indicator should become green and the indicator label should change to the Best scale in the chart view the chart with the best scale will be displayed 2 You can also turn the best scale mode on by ticking the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel 3 To turn the best scale m
309. scale mode and the display of lights sectors The settings are described in the chapter 7 5 Navigational Chart Settings 5 6 1 Chart Presentation Models There are three chart presentation models available for the presentation of the chart e C Map The presentation model is based on the INT1 standard e S 52 The presentation model is based on the IHO S 52 standard e S 52 Simplified The S 52 chart presentation model with simplified symbols for buoys and beacons The C Map presentation model is not based on official standards If this model is used in the chart view there is the Non standard chart presentation is used notice displayed in the upper left corner 25 2 Xm Ee m exl zU Figure 44 C Map presentation Figure 45 S 52 presentation model Figure 46 S 52 Simplified model presentation model The C Map presentation model is used by default Last update December 11 2012 47 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS To set one of the presentation models do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Chart Chart Mariner Settings Presentation Objects CMAP 52 52 simplified _ ole x Manual Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors iv Two shades Shallow pattern iv Safe contour only iv Safe depths Safety contour 5 0 m Safety depth 2 0 m Shallow cont
310. se Show To show a selected route in the chart view select the route in the routes list and press the Show button The chart view will be scrolled and zoomed so that to display the whole route on the screen Print To print a selected route select the route in the routes list press the Print button and select the route table to be printed out from the drop down menu The table will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print Charts To view the set of charts covering a selected route select the route in the routes list and press the Charts button Borders of charts covering the route will be displayed in the chart view Synchronize routes To synchronize routes between the local and remote computers after changes have been made to one of available routes save the changes return to the Route gt Route Planning tab switch the route edit mode off in the Synchronize routes with drop down list select computer to synchronize with and press the Synchronize routes with button The synchronization task will be added to the tasks list and executed in its turn for details on the data synchronization see chapter 3 5 3 Routes Synchronization 6 4 3 Route Edit Mode In the route edit mode you can edit the route plan change route parameters add control points to the route and
311. se contains supplementary data layers they will be listed in the pane below Last update December 11 2012 50 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 To display a supplementary layer data set the checkbox to the left from the section name The data will be displayed immediately To hide a supplementary layer data clear the checkbox near the data layer name 5 6 4 Depth Areas Presentation Depth areas presentation is configured in the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab in the Contours section In the section values of three contours are set the safety contour the shallow contour and the deep contour The value of the safety depth is also set here The contours values are used in the ECDIS for distinguishing on the chart display between the safe and the unsafe water and for generating anti grounding alarms Chart Chart Mariner fate Settings Presentation Objects Manual Update Presentation Depth settings Othersettings Textsettings Light sectors C MAR iv Two shades Shallow pattern een en Safety contour iv Safe contour only iv Safe depths 52 simplified J Isolated dangers S Plain depth contour Shallow contour 50 m Safety depth 2 0 m 20 m Deep contour 10 0 m Set Parameters Figure 50 Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Contours section To set the contours values do the following 1 Open the Chart Chart Presentation tab
312. se is 000 1 The Figure 216 shows the display of the cone shaped collision danger sector CDS and the collision danger line CDL to the target in true motion The user defined target selection criteria are e CPA Limit 1 0 NM e Maximum CPA 2 0 NM e TCPA Limit 24 min e TCPA Critical 6 min Last update December 11 2012 161 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 163967 x6 1 SHIP 16 50 27 2009 01 28 65 45 473 N No official data available Refer to paper chart 031 12 560 W esoc 20 0 kn ecos 000 0 Not for use with position device 1524 151 151 v Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 Maximum CPA NM TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min Target Vectors Apply Parameters Figure 216 The display of the cone shaped collision danger region and line to the target in true motion The green circle with the centre at the own ship position shows the tip of the own ship speed vector This is in order to make it visually easy for the user to determine the amount of evasive action needed to satisfy the selected CPA limit When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS the sector is shaded orange color to highlight the importance of the target for the collision risk evaluation The Figure 216 shows a traffic situation when own ship is on a direct collision course with the target as the tip of the speed vector lies on the CDL t
313. se is issued and the license expiration date Select a license to view the path to the license file the license coverage and the license code in the lower window of the pane me ole x Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic AME rN Auto Import fl Catalogue Database Licensing Updating S57 System ID Databases C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Professional Professional Issue 402 License expires in 03 2010 Add License manually Display expired licenses before date License file path H Licenses Professional usr Licenses list Zone 0 License EA8DA721DA5044B6 Add Licenses from file Fin d licen _ Apply license Figure 23 Data gt Licensing tab Add Licenses from file 6 To install licenses select the license file with licenses to be installed and press the Apply license button Licenses will be installed and registered automatically The licenses installation process will take a few seconds Upon completion a message Licensing completed will appear 7 After the license has been installed the licensed data is displayed on the screen immediately 4 2 3 Viewing Installed Licenses You can view the list of all licenses applied to a specified database To do so To view the list of installed licenses do the following 1 Open the Data gt Licensing panel 2 Inthe Databases drop down list select a database Press the Licenses list button The licenses list will be displayed in the licenses list pa
314. se pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view 3 Turn the ERBL mode off To measure the range and bearing between any two points in the chart do the following 1 Turn the ERBL mode on In the chart view range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as orange dashed lines The ERBL center is in the own ship position 2 Point the mouse pointer to the first point and left click the ERBL center will be fixed in this point 3 Point the mouse pointer to the second point The range and bearing to and from values are displayed in the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view 4 To release the ERBL center left click in the chart view the center will be fixed in the own ship position again 5 Turn the ERBL mode off To fix a range around the own ship do the following 1 Turn the ERBL mode on In the chart view range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as orange dashed lines The ERBL center is in the own ship position 2 Measure the required distance from the own ship using the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view and right click The range will be fixed around the own ship and will move as the own ship moves 68 Measurement units for ranges are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab 6 Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines The calculation mode is set in the Check points panel see chapter 9 1 2 Check
315. sector and line are scaled accordingly t No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 133553 x7 5 SHIP 16 57 04 2009 01 28 65 47 641 N 031 12 489 W esos 20 0 m ecos 000 0 m Alarm ARPA Anti Collision us o Input Units Agex Setup and Sonar Tool ship Output andTime Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min le Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Figure 220 The length of the own ship speed vector is changed to 3 minutes 6 When the actual TCPA is less than the specified minimum TCPA the CDL is highlighted in red bold to attract the attention of the user Further decrease in the length of the own ship speed vector is required An evasive escape action should be urgently considered by the user t No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 133553 x7 5 SHIP 17 02 08 2009 01 28 65 49 324 N 031 12 489 W esos 20 0 in ecos 000 0 iod dace ARPA Targets SONAR Targets Target number 0 02NM 05m 57s Latitude Longitude 65 51 315 N 031 08 918 W COG SOG 270 0 15 0 kn Time 2009 01 28 13 02 08 Name Aurora Figure 221 The TCPA is violating the TCPA Critical value the collision danger line gets bold red 7 Vector length is decreased to 1 minute and ECS display is zoomed in to see more details Last update December 11 2012 164 CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS f No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 Eae UE System setup a
316. sentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 15 12 2008 14 007 Monday Go Today Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Figure 111 Weather gt Weather Presentation Figure 112 Weather Weather Packages Easy Mode Download button Download button In the Weather Download Request dialog you can add products to the request set products parameters remove products from the request set geographic areas for which forecasts are required set periods for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings mcs Addnew product EH Global ECMWF 150 km mio Tropical Cyclones x Worldwide o Forecast For 15 nex 2008 Downloadat 44 01 Total 19kb Save Request Load Request Send Request Cancel Figure 113 Weather Download Request dialog Custom request dialog Set the data request add products from the Add new product drop down list select product parameters in the Products field set data coverage in the Coverage field select the forecast period in the Period field and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download the Setup Easy Mode procedure You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later To do so press the Save Request button in the Save As dialog indi
317. set the required point and proceed there without the full route planning procedure To use the Go to Waypoint function do the following 1 Stop the voyage if you are in the route monitoring mode 2 Open the Route Go To tab Start Route Go To Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Set WP Show Start Check route iv Autopilot ON OFF WPT LAT N 53 05 418 WPT LON E004 58 252 Figure 184 Route gt Go To tab 3 Press the Set WP button to switch to the waypoint plotting mode Plot the waypoint in the chart window or enter the waypoint coordinates in the WPT LAT and WPT LON fields 4 Release the Set WP button when pressed its name changes to Save to quit the waypoint plotting mode 5 If the system is connected to an autopilot check the Autopilot ON OFF checkbox and the ECDIS will start sending sentences in the APB format autopilot sentence B to your autopilot 6 To switch to the route monitoring mode monitoring of the route to the waypoint press the Start button To quit the route monitoring mode outpress the Start button when pressed its name changes to Stop 7 To check the route from the own ship to the waypoint press the Check route button The route from your vessel to the waypoint will be checked in the same way as in the Route Planning tool two additional panels will appear the Dangers and the Cautions panels The check route function only works in the route monitoring mode
318. ss Tides Bathymetric Measurement of the depth contours and slopes of the floor of a body of water sea lake ocean or river obtained through topographic charting Beam Ship width Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Bearing BRG The angle between the direction of the boat and the reference direction expressed in degrees with a notation of True or Magnetic Variation T or M Due north corresponds to 0 degrees east to 90 south to 180 and west to 270 For compass bearings the reference direction is magnetic North For true bearings the reference direction is true North Bearing from Ship to Cursor This data is an aid in route making and planning Bering from ship to cursor is expressed in degrees with a notation of True or Magnetic Variation Bookmark A saved combination of chart selection zoom level and position on the chart Created with the Set Bookmark command it may be returned to at any time with the Go to Bookmark command Bow The front of a ship Broadcast Notice to Mariner BNM See Local Notice to Mariners LNM Cartesian Coordinates Also known as Rectangular Coordinates A two dimensional plane contains an x axis and a y axis Negative x coordinates lay to the left of the y axis and positive x coordinates to the right Negative y coordinates lay below the x axis and positive above the x axis Chart Nautical term for maps used in nautical navigation th
319. ster Chart Charts where the chart information is stored as a rasterized image Examples are raster charts are Raster Plus RPL BSB and GeoTIFF Rasters are the scanned images of the original paper chart Rate Of Turn ROT The speed at which heading is changing 199 SAY MARINE Rhumb Line A Rhumb Line is a line of constant bearing Unlike great circles rhumb lines are usually not the shortest path between two points on a sphere Part of the utility of rhumb lines is that they can be drawn as straight lines on Mercator projections Rhumb lines have the advantage of being easy to navigate because they follow a constant bearing The parallels of the earth are examples of rhumb lines Rhumb lines are undefined values at the poles A rhumb line of sufficient length will usually tend to spiral around the earth towards a pole forming a loxodrome Such spiraling rhumb lines will form a logarithmic spiral on a polar stereographic projection ROT See Hate Of Turn Route Desired path of travel created on a chart or grid and consisting of starting ending and any number of interim waypoints The ECDIS can instruct a properly connected autopilot to steer along the path of a Route Scale See Zoom Scroll To move different parts of a long list into view using the arrow buttons or scroll bar Also scroll is often used as a synonym for pan Selected Target Target selected manually or automatically for the display of de
320. surement units are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab in the Depth Elevation Size units section Echo Sounder Synchronization Monitor 10min 9min Figure 186 Info gt Echo Sounder Diagram tab 2 The diagram field double click in any position in the diagram field and the own ship position corresponding to the time and depth values in the identified diagram position will be marked in the chart view with an arrow A mark to clear the highlight press the Clear highlight button Using this option you can mark such things as special places or fish echoes 3 The current draft graph the red dashed graph represents the current draft of the own ship The data for building the graph come from the Config Own ship tab 4 The depth below keel graph the black solid graph represents the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom The data for building the graph come from the external echo sounder To display sounding marks in the chart view do the following 1 Open the Info Echo Sounder Diagram tab 2 Check the Marks ON OFF checkbox The sounding marks will be plotted in the chart view as the own ship proceeds 3 Select the interval of the marks plotting in the intervals list 4 To delete all previously plotted sounding marks from the chart view press the Reset button For the depth to be more precise set the echo sounder sensor offset from the own ship keel To do so 1 Open the Config panel a
321. t Find Close Find Search selected category only Search category names only Figure 18 System diagnostic report Last update December 11 2012 27 Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 4 INSTALLING DATA 4 1 Installing and Displaying Databases 4 1 1 Installing Databases Installing chart databases on your system includes copying the databases to the system hard disk and registering them in the ECDIS application Installing can be done in the Data gt Databases tab To install a database do the following 1 Open the Data gt Databases tab Chart Add Remove Dynamic D Auto Import tab Catalogue Database lconsing Licensing E Updating S57 Registered DB Available databases ChartletsBase Issue 1 Professional Issue 380 TestBase Issue 1 4 Peck integrity Check signature Unregister database Find databases Register database Check signature Figure 19 Data gt Databases tab 2 Connect the data storage device with the database to the system and press the Find databases button Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system All detected databases are listed in the Available databases pane name and issue number Signature check in progress 3 Select the database name in the Available databases pane the Register B database and Check signature buttons become active The Check signature button only becomes active if the
322. t is required that the selected log book entry had position information in the remark field otherwise an error message will appear To create a route using the current log book entries press the Save as Route button The Select Route Name window will open enter the route name to the Output Route Name field and press the OK button Last update December 11 2012 172 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The route will be created and added to the existing routes You can edit the route in the Route gt Route Planning tab 11 To print the log book out press the Print button The log book will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the log book using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print 12 Sometimes user remarks can be too long and not fit in the log book Remark field To view the remark tip when pointing the mouse pointer at the remark check the Remark Hints checkbox 13 To delete a log book page press the Cleanup button the Cleanup logbook window will open In the Cleanup logbook window select pages you want to delete press the Delete selected button and confirm the operation The selected log book pages will be deleted 14 To export a log book page to a file display the page in the Log Book panel and press the Export button the Export day log book dialog will open In the dialog select the fol
323. t select the Zone or the Areas for which the license is generated Your selection will be displayed in the Data Set or Area Name field above the list 5 Enter manually or copy and paste the 16 digit code to the License String field Last update December 11 2012 30 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 6 Please ensure that you have an eToken connected to the system The eToken must be the one used during installation 7 Press the Add License button The process will take a few seconds Upon completion a message License has been added successfully will appear Press OK 4 2 2 Installing Licenses from File If you have a license file you can install all licenses stored in the file using the Add Licenses from File function To install licenses from file do the following 1 Connect the removable data storage device with license file to the system License files should be stored in a folder named Licenses for the ECDIS to be able to detect them Open the Data gt Licensing tab In the Databases drop down list select the database for which you are applying the license Press the Add Licenses from file button to open the pane for adding licenses from file Qu dx eS dw Press the Find licenses button to start searching for license files on all removable devices connected to the system All detected licenses are listed in the upper window of the pane the name and issue number of the database for which the licen
324. t size in the Attachment size field The attachment size is the maximum size of a data pack that can be attached to an e mail sent to you relevant for all e mail connections In case the set attachment size is less than the size of the ordered weather package the package is broken down into several data packages that are sent to you in several e mails Set the parameter to 0 or 1 if you want weather packages of any size to be sent to you in one e mail Set communication parameters in the Communication parameters section Depending on the type of communication you selected in the Communication type option you will be given a possibility to configure a set of parameters specific for the selected communication type After you have configured connection you can save settings for further use press the Export settings button in the Save As dialog window indicate location where the file with settings will be saved enter the file name and press the Save button The settings will be saved to an xm1 file To load previously saved settings press the Import settings button in the Open dialog window select the xm1 file with saved settings and press the Open button The settings from the file will be loaded The following communication types are available Internet HTTP Automatic connection type If you set the Internet HTTP communication type the ECDIS will use the standard HTTP protocol to send requests and receive weather data You c
325. t view and the Deleted action X Deleted ij be added to the object actions list 6 2 Mariner Objects Mariner Objects is a tool developed for the mariners to be able to plot their own notes and marks to the chart Mariner objects are entered to an independent chart layer Thus they do not affect other ECDIS functionality and are used exclusively to display mariner s notes There are seven types of mariner objects available in the ECDIS Mariner objects are the following There are chart objects that can be created using manual updating but cannot be edited or deleted The objects are Unsurveyed area Pontoon Hulk Floating dock Dredged area Depth area Land area line area f you edit a manual update object all changes are done in the Extrascale dataset If you edit a chart object all changes are done in the chart dataset Last update December 11 2012 62 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e Clearing line a line object a straight line drawn through leading marks A ship moving along such line will clear certain dangers or remain in the best channel The line can be drawn though one or two marks There are three categories of clearing lines available Not more than NMT Not less than NLT and Not defined If the category of the clearing line is NMT the bearing from the own ship to the mark should always remain less or equal to the bearing of the clearing line for the ship to clear the dan
326. t view orientation do the following 1 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Chart Orientation 2 Inthe Chart Orientation section select one of the four orientation options D a To orient the chart to the North up press the North Up button The chart Course Up will be oriented to the North up This option is available in all modes Heading Up b To orient the chart to the own ship course up press the Course Up button Route Up The chart will be oriented to the own ship course up This option is only available if the Navigation mode is on Figure 171 Navi gt c To orient the chart to the own ship heading up press the Heading Up Navigation Data button The chart will be oriented to the own ship heading up This option is tab Chart only available if the Navigation mode is on Orientation section d To orient the chart to the route up press the Route Up button The chart will be oriented to the route which is being monitored This option is only available is the Route Monitoring mode is on To switch between the night and the day palettes press the F12 key Last update December 11 2012 128 MET n CNAYMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 5 5 True and Relative Motion There are two motion modes for the chart display true motion mode and relative motion mode In the true motion mode the own ship symbol moves across the chart view and the chart stays in the same position As soon as the own ship reaches a predefi
327. t view scale is 1 100 000 charts of the Coastal level are displayed When the current scale is 1 40 000 charts of the Approach level are displayed The ECDIS application changes charts in the view automatically when you set a new current view scale corresponding to a different scale level Besides that an alarm may be given at the change of the scale level Last update December 11 2012 41 7 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS When changing the current view scale of the chart it may differ from the original chart scale If the current view scale is larger than the original chart scale the view is overscaled if the current view scale is smaller than the original chart scale the view is underscaled For example the original chart scale is 1 50 000 and the current view scale is 1 20 000 The current view scale is within scale range of the Approach E scale level and the chart of this level is displayed However the scale of this chart is 1 50 000 which is 2 5 times as small as the current view scale Such situations may be dangerous as you are expecting more detailed information at the set current view scale whereas the source paper chart wasn t supposed to have the expected detail level You may be relying too much on the chart and get into an accident The ECDIS has an indicator that informs you about the underscale or overscale of the current view to avoid accidents There are several methods for changing
328. t was lost while inside the set Lost Target Alarm Range If the target was lost while outside the range no alarm is generated AIS lost An AIS target is lost Dangerous target A dangerous ARPA target is detected Hardware errors A hardware error occurred Last update December 11 2012 134 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 7 7 Route Monitoring 7 7 1 Route Monitoring Mode The route monitoring mode is switched on automatically when the voyage on a specified route is started When in the route monitoring mode the ECDIS monitors the proceeding of the own ship along the route and notifies you in case the own ship deviates from the route approaches a waypoint or a control point etc Before you can start a voyage along a route the route should be created and edited using the route planning tools in the Route gt Route Finder and Route gt Route Planning tabs see chapter 6 4 Route Planning and Plotting To switch on the route monitoring mode do the following 1 Open the Route Start Voyage tab Start Route GoTo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Start Voyage fa Reverse Route Autopilot ON OFF Routes Settings Show Route HideRoute 7 WPTlabels Bearinglabel Speedlabel 7 WOL Route Name F From 2009 02 11 13 35 To 2009 02 11 19 16 gt Peer Seu Pin ARENDAL Nonway MARSTRAND Swec VERE Arendal Marstrand2 ARENDAL Norway MARSTRAND Swec ARENDAL No
329. tab the following target information is displayed e MMSI A unique 9 digit number that is assigned to a DSC radio station e Ship Name Name of the AIS target in case the target has any name e CPA Closest point of approach to the own ship e CPA Time to the closest point of approach e Type of ship Type of the AIS target e Lat Lon Latitude and longitude of the AIS target e Position accuracy accuracy of the AIS target positioning e COG Course over ground Last update December 11 2012 139 i NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e SOG Speed over ground e HDG Heading of the AIS target e ROT Rate of turn e Nav Status Navigation status of the target e g Under way using engine e Range Bearing distance and bearing from the own ship to the target In the Static and Voyage Related Data tab the following target information is displayed e IMO Number the IMO assigned target number e Call Sign a unique designation for the transmitting station e Ship dimensions length and width of the target e Position ref point defines the precise location of the positioning device on the target four parameters are used A B C and D Figure 189 e Type of pos device the type of the device defining the target position e ETA estimated time of arrival of the target to its destination e z Figure 189 Draught draught of the target Parameters defining e Destination
330. tailed alphanumeric data information and text in a separate user dialogue area The target is represented by a selected target symbol SENC See System Electronic Navigational Chart Set The cumulative effect of wind and current on the direction of a ship Slack Water Slack The state of a tidal current when its speed is hear zero especially the moment when a current changes direction and its speed is zero Sleeping AIS Target AIS target indicating the presence of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location The target is represented by a sleeping target symbol indicating the vessel s orientation No additional information is presented until the AIS target is activated Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS SOG See Speed Over Ground Sounder also known as Fish Finder or Echo Sounder A Sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect the distance to the sea floor calculating the time interval between signal transmission and the detected reflected signal Source Scale The original scale of a paper chart from which an electronic chart is derived Standard Display Level of information that should be shown when a chart is first displayed on ECDIS The level of the information it provides for route planning or route monitoring may be modified by the user according to the user s needs STW See Speed Through Water Speed Over Ground SOG SOG is the actual fixed geographic sp
331. te of turn received from the gyrocompass The ROT line is not on the panel if no gyrocompass is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab 5951 WGS 84 The number of the source chart for the chart under the own ship or under the chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage and the chart coordinates system In the frame lower the suitability indicator is displayed The indicator shows if the chart under the own ship or under the chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage is suitable for navigation The indicators color means the following Green the values are received from the primary positioning device and other external devices Orange the values are received from the secondary positioning device e Red the external device providing the data fails and no data is coming to the ECDIS 7 4 2 Navigational Data Sources The same navigational data can come from various external devices In ECDIS only one source of data can be used Position Heading Data sources sources Sources To view navigational data sources do the following POS GPS2 1 Left click on the Position Source indicator in the Navigational panel The ads s Position Heading and Data sources panel will open HDG Kurs 2 Open the Data sources tab The list with navigational data in the left column udi Ez and their sources in the right is displayed in the tab WIND ROT K 3 To close the panel press the Close button in th
332. the Search function enter the name of the object to the Search field and press the Find button 5 Geographic objects can have various geometry types After selecting the object set the object geometry type Select a Point Line or Area option The geometry types that are not available for the specified object remain dimmed 6 Clear the From Notice to Mariner checkbox if it is set and press the OK button Adding manual updates from notices to mariners is described below The Attributes pane will open where you can set the values of the new object attributes Mariner Manual HB fl x Settings Presentation Objects Update 5 4 21443310 Ge Obstruction wp Added 2 10 2009 0 e Extrascl e Obstruction H Added 2 10 2009 0 X Deleted 2 10 2009 Category of obstruction Scale minimum Removed from display Ls 2 Highlight je Value crib Figure 60 Chart gt Manual Update tab adding new object editing attributes 7 To setan attribute value select the attribute in the attributes list and enter the value to the Value field or select it from the drop down list if available 8 Set the object coordinates either plot the object in the chart view using the mouse pointer or set the object coordinates in the Metrics pane To open the Metrics pane press the Metrics button To return to the Attributes pane outpress the Metrics button Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects
333. the button is vertical the panel is pinned down when the pin is horizontal the auto hide mode is on and the panel collapses after you move the mouse pointer out of it Back to previous chart view restores the previous chart view coordinates and scale x Close panel closes the panel The buttons are located in the upper right corner of each panel Figure 4 Clear Highlight Restore Down Auto Hide Back and Close panel buttons 2 On Screen Keyboard To turn the on screen keyboard on do the following 1 In the Config gt System tab set the On screen keyboard check box The Keyboard button will appear in the lower right corner near the Menu button 2 Press the Keyboard button A keyboard will appear Figure 5 On screen keyboard 3 Place the insertion point to a field where you need to enter information and use the on screen keyboard to type the text 4 To close the on screen keyboard press the Close button in the upper right corner of the keyboard Last update December 11 2012 14 _ NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 8 Hotkeys List The following hotkeys are used in the ECDIS Table 2 Hot keys La MOB mode On Switch Standard All Other display types Switch palettes Night Day Page Zoom out down Last update December 11 2012 15 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 ECDIS SETUP 3 1 Input Output Data about the own vessel position course spee
334. the last action performed with the object or select the last action and press the Highlight button The object will be selected and you can start editing it To edit the object attributes press the Attributes Edit button The Attributes pane will open where you can edit the object attributes After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The object appearance will change to reflect the attributes changes and the Modified action Modified Will be added to the object actions list To edit the object metrics press the Metrics Edit button The Metrics pane will open where you can edit the object metrics The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by gt Moved window and press OK The object will be moved to the new position and the Moved action be added to the object actions list will To delete an object select it and press the Delete button Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action X Deleted iy be added to the object actions list To edit a chart object do the following 1 Select the object in the chart view Right click on the object to open the Object Info panel find the object entry in the objects list and double cli
335. the maximum scale at which the object starts to be displayed in the chart view Scale minimum the minimum scale at which the object is displayed in the chart view if the attribute is not set the object is displayed at all scales Category category of the object often defines the object appearance Object name the name or the number of the object Local time time of the observation clear the checkbox in the Local time field and the attribute will be ignored User s remark information related to the object and entered by the user Input identifier name or initials of the object author Position finding method for Position only select method of the position determination from the drop down list Orientation for currents only direction of the current in degrees Current strength fro currents only speed of the current in knots o Plot the object in the chart view Point object move the mouse pointer to the chart view and left click in the selected position to plot the object To move the object left click in a different position the object will be moved to the new position You can also drag the object to a different position To do so left click on the object to capture it with the mouse pointer drag the object to a new position and left click once more to plot the object there Last update December 11 2012 65 ia CNAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e Line ob
336. the own ship at which AIS targets become visible When targets cross the distance limit they are displayed on the chart Turn the function on check the checkbox enter the value to the edit field and press the Set button When the checkbox is checked the visibility range is displayed in the chart view as a circle with a blue dashed boundary see Error Reference source not found If you want all AIS targets to be displayed irrespective of their distance from the own ship turn the AIS targets visibility range function off altogether clear the checkbox the AIS targets visibility range section will become grayed and all AIS targets in contact with the own ship will become visible Turn the display of AIS zones on or off check or clear options in the AIS zones display section AIS zones are displayed as circles with the center in the own ship position and with radiuses corresponding to AlS targets activation distances The AIS targets activation range is displayed as a blue circle and the AIS targets danger range is displayed as a red circle If the display of AIS targets is off the AIS zones are not displayed either To turn on the display of AIS targets past track check the Past track checkbox The past track is updated with the interval set in the Past track interval drop down list Last update December 11 2012 Figure 194 AIS zones display CNAYMARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 11 Switch on the Show meeting point op
337. the route left click on the symbol and holding the mouse button Time can be changed by the step set in the Step field in the time setup tool in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab gt To read the Inspect Ship Position panel you need the following information 1 The Inspect Ship Position panel consists of two parts the informational part and the polar diagram part 2 Inthe informational part you can see the following data Date and time of the ship position in the upper part of the panel r L Inspect Ship Position 11 02 2008 16 00 UTC Coordinates of the ship position in the upper part of the panel 050 18 424N 006 18 095W Roll pitch and heave values estimated using the swell and total 30 waves data in the lower part the left column T Weather parameters values of those weather parameters are 10 displayed that are checked in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab in the Meteo Parameters table You can also see presentation of such weather parameters as total sea swell and wind as special symbols The parameters are represented as colored arrows in three corners of the panel Roll Temperature 7 6 C The dark blue arrow in the upper left corner represents the _ pitch 0 8 5 8s direction and period of total sea Heave 0 2m 1 2s The blue arrow in the lower left corner represents the Figure 139 Inspect Ship direction and the period of the swell Position panel
338. the screen the pointer will change to a thick black arrow W Left click to move the screen in the direction of the arrow along the chart e The Go to Position function Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab in the New Center section enter coordinates of the point you want to be moved to the center of the screen the latitude to the upper field and the longitude to the lower field Press the Go to Position button the chart will be scrolled so that the indicated position becomes the center of the screen 5 2 Scaling the Chart View All source paper charts used for creating electronic charts have different compilation scales The original scale of an electronic chart is the compilation scale of the paper chart digitized to create the electronic chart The scale at which the electronic chart is displayed on the screen usually differs from the original scale and is called the current view scale Use the Original Scale option of the Chart Viewing Tools panel to synchronize the original and the current view scales of the chart if necessary The same geographical area can be covered by several charts with different scales Which chart is displayed at the moment depends on the current view scale All charts included in the database are divided into groups according to their scale called scale levels The currently displayed chart belongs to the scale level corresponding to the current view scale The levels are as follows For example when the curren
339. ther gt Weather Time Series tab routes comparison 6 7 7 Inspect Ship Position The Inspect Ship Position function allows assessing a specified position of your ship on the route in terms of weather conditions To assess a ship position you need the time of weather forecast to be the same as the time at which the vessel will reach the specified position route schedule To assess the ship position on the route do the following 1 2 Display a route in the chart view Download weather data for the region covering the route see chapter 6 6 Weather Forecast Download Make sure that the time period of the weather forecast covers the time scheduled for navigating along the route Set the own ship parameters in the Ship Response dialog To open the dialog in the Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the Ship Response Options button details about the Ship Response Options dialog see below Set the time of the weather forecast display in the time setup tool of the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab The time should be within the period of time scheduled for navigating along the route Route Route Planning tab edit mode Schedule table The own ship symbol will appear on the route at the position where the own ship is supposed to be at the indicated time the position is calculated using the route schedule data and the own ship planned speed To change time schedule of the route go to the Route gt Ro
340. tically registered in the database To see which datasets have been updated and to access the list of updates use the Updating Log and Review Updates functions 6 1 2 Semi automatic Updating Semi automatic updating is an alternative to the fully automatic updating When using the Semi Auto Updating function you should create and save a request for updates send it to the updates server by email receive the updates by e mail as well and apply them to the database manually To download chart updates by e mail and to register them manually do the following 1 Open the Data gt Auto Updating tab and press the SemiAuto Updating button The SemiAuto Updating pane will open The updating service is a fully automatic service provided by Jeppesen Marine and replies are sent within 10 minutes unless there is some delay over your email provider Last update December 11 2012 56 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Dynamic R Auto Import Licensing Licensing Updating S57 Databases Professional sss Auto Updating NEW VOLUME E SemiAuto Updating Updating Log Get updates from directory Smeodr order iew Updat PPM Maximum return email size Sadia v Figure 56 Data gt Auto Updating tab Semi Auto Updating function 2 Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop down list If only one database is in v
341. tification 46 code Source producing Instituto Hidrografico de la Marina IHM agency a ee sm ha oe BS d 1 Figure 38 Object Info panel The Object Info panel consists of two panes the pane displaying the list of objects and the pane displaying the attributes of a specified object To display attributes of an object select it in the objects list 20 In the case the mouse wheel has no effect left click in the chart to return the active focus to the chart view Last update December 11 2012 43 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS The first object in the objects list is the dataset the electronic chart that was under the mouse pointer when the Object Info panel was opened Double click on the object in the list to highlight it on the chart To clear highlighting press the Clear highlight button pul If an object symbol is against a yellow background it means that the object has been updated by means of auto update RTU P If an object symbol is against a blue background it means that the object is a mariner object In the Object Info panel you can also open the Chart Legend pane To do so press the Chart Legend button To close the chart legend and return to the objects list outpress the Chart Legend button The Chart Legend pane provides information about the dataset Partially this information is the same that you get in the Attributes pane when you select the dataset in the objects
342. ting point located on the chart NN New target type recognition NEN Meet target calculations and indicators on the chart System diagnostic utility implemented System Diagnostics Tools on page 26 The function abolished to read the value of the vertical offset Echo Sounder on page 138 of the echsounder from DPT sentences RTE and WPL remain as the only supported outgoing AIS APPENDIX B sentence types AIS on page 139 Last update December 11 2012 7 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 2 ECDIS INTERFACE 2 1 Starting and Terminating the ECDIS NAVMARING To start the ECDIS application turn the system power on To terminate the application press the Close button in the upper right corner of the application window The termination of the application turns the system power off 2 2 Main Window The ECDIS starting window looks as follows North and Motion Chart Scale and Quick Alarm Condition Mode Indicator Indicators Panel Access Buttons Panel Indicator Close Button Y Time and Date D l OO O Positioning System a Indicator Sensor Information and Status Panel Current Chart Indicator Own Vessel Symbol T 4d F Functional Buttons hA MENU Menu Depth Elevation Mouse Pointer Mouse Pointer Units Indicator Coordimates Figure 1 ECDIS Main window 2 3 Indicators Panel Source Scala Navigation Mode Navigation Info Radar Display ARPA Targets Voyage Alarms ECDIS Indicator Indicato
343. tion Monitor Data synchronization is an automatic process over which the user has no control Information about the current synchronization status is displayed in the Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Computer Info Synchronization Status Computer name N A Synchronization status Stopped Computer role N A Current state Stopped no synchronization is available Synchronization log Tasks to perform Failed tasks Clear log Sync OFF Figure 15 Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab In the Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab the following information is displayed e Computer name name of the computer unique identifier of the computer in the local network e Computer role role of the ECDIS computer e Synchronization status status of synchronization tool on the computer Active ECDIS receives incoming synchronization data and sends outcoming synchronization data Stopped ECDIS cannot receive incoming data nor can it send outcoming synchronization data Disabled ECDIS receives incoming synchronization data but cannot send outcoming synchronization data e Current state current state of synchronization process on the computer Disabled able to synchronize with remote computers the synchronization tool is disabled th
344. tion to activate the target motion prediction function and indication of the meeting point on the chart see AIS Targets Data on page 139 12 Enter the corridor width value into the Min distance from route filed within which the prediction function will be effective Depending on the presence of the AIS target signal and the distance between the target and the own ship there are the following types of AIS targets Table 3 AIS target types Symbol name and description Distance to the Display Own Ship AIS Targets Sleeping target AIS targets visibility A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of range an object equipped with an AIS in a certain location Active target distance to activation A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional graphically presented information including a vector speed and course over ground the heading and ROT or direction of turn indicator if available to display actual initiated course changes Dangerous target distance A symbol representing an AIS target activated or not dangerous which has approached the own ship closer than the approach specified distance to the dangerous approach CPA CPA to Dangerous TCPA TCPA to Dangerous Lost target AlS targets visibility A symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS range target before reception of data was interrupted Selected target AIS targe
345. tive I Enable poucas SOMIceS Lat 0 000 Ship in center Set Primary position source Lon 0 000 Chart Orientation x Apply corrections es Swap position sources rog Position Discrepancies Course Up ro Pri Sec 0 262 NM Heading Up iuto Route Up Pri Man Iv Show secondary v True scale ship image Figure 145 Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position Source section 2 You can also set position sources in the Position Heading and Data sources panel To open the panel left click on the Position Source indicator Open the Position sources tab This tab is the same as the Position sources tab in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab and all actions in one are immediately repeated in the other 1 2000 x50 SHIP 19 59 14 2009 09 11 A Position Heading Data ERR CORP NEES Sources sources sources 36 15 230 N AUTO 000 09 997 E esos 10 0 kn ecoc 315 0 Swap position sources eupG 325 09 Kurs Secondary position source STW 8 0kn Primary position source GPS2 GPS1 9 DFT Wind ROT 0 0 iv Show secondary pip 5951 WGS 84 Data not assessed Figure 146 Position sources tab 3 In case the positioning device you want to set as a primary position source is already set so there is no need to change anything If the positioning device is not set as a primary position source select it in the Last update December 11 2012 116 _
346. to mark all the scale levels and the Clear All button to unmark all the scale levels Last update December 11 2012 68 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS er Navimjo P Pernodic ted ous TL Alarm Safety contouris nota X 1 Nc official data ayallanlg Rater to paper chart f s J W9 ak rn POSER r_a ee 1 4763925 x0 63 SHIP 12 58 37 200 10 02 No6 standard chart predpatation s Ul T f T TH Silent mode I P723 O Y a 36 09 605 N Gar S 005 25 218 W hn ii Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Professional Ministerio de Defensa Naciow 3 Ministry of Transport Maritin 3 Hellenic Navy Hydrographie S Department for Planning and latituta Idragrafiea della Mari Norwegian Hydrographic Sen Janoesen Norway A S Dynamic Auta Uicansing Databases Licensing 887 Find Figure 70 Data Chart Catalogue tab boundaries of coastal and coastal approach charts 6 4 Route Planning and Plotting 6 4 1 Automatic Route Planning The ECDIS provides the possibility to automatically plan and plot the route The route is calculated using the database of pre planned routes connecting a number of ports of the world To plot a route automatically do the following 1 Open the Route Route Finder tab Start Route m Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Portlist Itinerary Disabled Passages Search By Port
347. ton opens the Check Points tool 2 5 Functional Buttons Menu The functional buttons menu is made up of eight buttons each opening a functional panel To open the buttons menu move the mouse pointer over the Menu indicator in the lower right corner of the chart view The menu stays open while the mouse pointer is hovering over the menu When the mouse pointer is out of the menu it is collapsed automatically To open a panel press the corresponding button Only one functional panel can be opened at a time To switch to another panel press the button opening the other panel To close an opened panel outpress its button Opens the Chart functional panel holding the following tabs Chart Settings Chart Presentation Mariner Objects and Manual Update ROUTE Opens the Route functional panel holding the following tabs Start Voyage Route Planning Go To Route Finder and Export Import Opens the Info functional panel holding the following tabs Echo Sounder Diagram AIS Monitor Targets Radar Image System Info Astro Info Tides Info Streams Info Navi Calculator and Synchronization Monitor Opens the Log Book functional panel Opens the Navi functional panel holding the following tabs Navigation Data Own ship past track and vector Dead Reckoning and LOP Position fix Opens the Data functional panel holding the following tabs Chart Catalogue Add Remove Database Licensing Dynamic Licensing Databases Auto Updating
348. truments tab Here you can set the precise location for all positioning devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab as well as radar and other devices onboard the own ship Measurement units for the own ship parameters are set in the Config Units and Time tab Last update December 11 2012 19 4 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Alarm Anti Collision 74 Input Units m Setup AD d Taget Tool Ship Output and Time Own ship setup Position of instruments Conning station X offset 10 m Yoffset 0 0 m Select instrument X offset 0 0 m Y offset 0 0 m Advanced Savesettings Restore settings Figure 11 Config gt Own ship tab Position devices tab 2 Set the conning station offset from the center of the vessel e Conning station X offset Distance from the conning station to the centre of the vessel along the X axis e Conning station Y offset Distance from the conning station to the centre of the vessel along the y axis 3 Select a device in the Select instrument list and set parameters for the device The parameters are e X offset Distance from the vessel conning station to the device along the x axis e Y offset Distance from the vessel conning station to the device along the y axis 4 After the parameters have been entered press the Save Settings button enter the password and press OK 5 To restore previously saved settings press the R
349. ts display is on The AIS targets display is off Lows j Y ARPA Targets Display indicator has the following states The ARPA Targets Display indicator shows if the ARPA targets display is on or off see chapter 8 2 2 AIS Targets Display Left click on the indicator to turn the ARPA targets display on or off ARPA The ARPA targets display is on ARPA The ARPA targets display is off Dangers and Cautions indicator has the following states The Dangers and Cautions indicator shows if there are dangerous objects or cautions inside the Guard Zone see chapter 7 6 2 Antigrounding Alarm Dangers There are no dangers in the guard zone or the anti grounding alarm function is off There are dangerous objects inside the guard zone Left click on the indicator to open the Dangers Dangers and Cautions panel Dangers list is displayed in the Dangers tab There are cautions inside the guard zone Left click on the indicator to open the Dangers and Cautions panel Cautions list is displayed in the Cautions tab Dangers gt Voyage indicator has the following states When in the route monitoring mode the voyage has been started the Voyage indicator displays warnings regarding the own ship proceeding along the route see chapter 7 7 Route Monitoring The route monitoring mode is off Voyage The own ship is on the route Voyage Off course The own ship course deviates from the route
350. ts visibility A symbol representing the manual selection of any AIS range target for the display of detailed information in a separate data panel Last update December 11 2012 144 CN Av MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Symbol name and description Distance to the Display Own Ship NOTE All AlS target symbols are oriented to the targets course Active and dangerous target symbols have additional features heading lines and velocity vectors Heading line is a solid line with the turn indicator at the tip it only shows the targets heading and does not give any information on the targets speed Velocity vector is a dashed line with minute marks on it it is extending in the direction of the target course for a length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship s velocity vector Symbols of AIS targets with available CPA are drawn with solid lines if CPA is not available symbols are drawn with dotted lines B AIS Aids to Navigation ATON Active ATON real virtual on position AIS targets visibility range A symbol representing an active ATON on position Active ATON real virtual off position AIS targets visibility A symbol representing an active ATON off position panel Lost ATON real virtual A symbol representing the last valid position of an ATON before reception of data was interrupted AIS targets visibility range Yes Selected ATON real
351. ulator press the Clear All button To convert coordinates from one datum to another do the following 1 Open the Info Navi Calculator Datum Transformation tab Echo Sounder AIS Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization 4 q x Diagram Monitor 5 5 image info Info info info Calculator Monitor Show Clear All Distance Bearing Great Circle Datum Transformation Start Point N 00 00 000 E000 00 000 From Datum wessa End Point To Datum wasz2 e N 00 00 002 Transform w000 00 009 Figure 241 Info gt Navi Calculator tab Datum Transformation tab Enter coordinates in the Start Point section Select the original datum in the From Datum drop down list Select the target datum in the To Datum drop down list pL o E Press the Transform button and read converted coordinates in the End Point section To view the line connecting the start point and the end point press the Show button 6 To clear the calculator press the Clear All button Last update December 11 2012 176 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS APPENDIX A List of Input Sentences The table below lists sentences which can be received and processed by the ECDIS and devices producing the sentences Device Type Recommended sentences Position device GLL VTG RMC GGA ZDA DTM GLL VTG ZDA DTM SGD GNS
352. ume Setup To set up the volume go to the Config System panel and press the Volume button A standard Volume Control window will open where the system sound can be configured 3 3 4 System Check up While working with the ECDIS you need to be aware of the system current state The access to the system check up information is provided in the Info System Info tab The system check up includes checking databases status Databases status tab licenses status Licenses status tab disks status Disks status tab and talkers status Talkers status tab To perform the system check up at the ECDIS startup check the Perform check on startup checkbox To refresh the system check up information press the Refresh info button while the refreshing procedure is running the button label is Abort During the system check up the message indicating the process running appears in the Alarms indicator E OnBoard tests running Once acknowledged the message is removed from the current alarms list In case the Perform check on startup checkbox is not set the check up is carried out automatically every seven days The current onboard time is indicated in the Time and Date line of the Navigational panel The time value is calculated using the UTC time value received from the positioning device plus the time zone offset To see the UTC time left click on the Time and Date line and hold the button the time changes to the UTC time When you release the b
353. update December 11 2012 103 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Meteo Parameters Meteo Parameter Area Cont Symb Tex Measurement Units Pressure Pressure in hectoPascals Temperature w Temperature in Celsius LIENS NONE H dE Precipitation Speed in knots Swell waves Speed in miles hour Speed in meters sec Speed in Beaufort numbers Total waves Figure 129 Selecting measurement units for the wind speed 6 To set the time for which weather data should be displayed use the time setup tool You can find the time setup tool both in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab and in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather 4 m q x Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 15 02 2009 00 00 Sunday Go Today _ _ M 4 p DA Step iHour Meteo Parameters Meteo Parameter Area Cont Symb Text Measurement Units Pressure Pressure in hectoPascals V Temperature nh NE Temperature in Celsius Wind vectors Speed in knots Precipitation Precipitation in millimeters Swell waves Height in meters Total waves Height in meters Legend lt lt Figure 130 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab time tool To set the time enter the date and time value to the Date field and press the Go button or simply move
354. ur radar defined ranges exceed true range values by 0 2 nautical miles set the DistCorrection value to 0 2 Port direction finder bearing RMSE in degrees For example if your port direction finder bearing RMSE is 0 5 degrees set the BrgRMS value to d PG A Port direction finder bearing constant correction in degrees If the port direction finder dial is constantly turned anticlockwise the correction should be positive if the dial is turned clockwise the correction should be negative For example if your port direction finder dial is turned to 0 3 degrees anticlockwise set the BrgCorrection value to 0 3 122 SAY MARI Av vii User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Default Description Value DirFinder 2 BrgRMS Starboard direction finder bearing RMSE in degrees For example if your starboard direction finder bearing RMSE is 0 5 degrees set the BrgRMS value to 0 5 BrgCorrection Starboard direction finder bearing constant correction in degrees If the starboard direction finder dial is constantly turned anticlockwise the correction should be positive if the dial is turned clockwise the correction should be negative For example if your starboard direction finder dial is turned to 0 3 degrees anticlockwise set the BrgCorrection value to 0 3 4 After the file has been edited save it press the Save button and close it press the Close button 7 2 4 Position Correction In case the currently used positi
355. urrent DR position of the own ship are displayed in the Result pane of the Navi gt LOP Position fix tab Figure 155 Calculated position in the chart view and in the Result section 2 The coordinates of the manual position fix are displayed in the Position section of the Result pane The Discrepancy pane displays offset of the manual position fix from the current DR position of the own ship distance from the own ship to the manual fix in the Distance field bearing from the own ship to the manual fix in the Bearing field and the root mean square error of the position fix in the RMS field The RMS error is displayed in the chart view as an RMS error ellipse Figure 156 RMS error ellipse To accept the observed position do the following 1 To accept the position fix as a new DR position of the own ship press the Accept Position button The own ship symbol will be moved to the fix and the DR will resume positioning of the own ship from the fix If the dead reckoning is off the own ship is not moved to the manual fix 2 After the manual fix has been accepted the manual fix symbol is displayed in the chart view with the time and means of observation e V the fix was made using visual bearings e R the fix was made using radar ranges e VR the fix was made using both visual bearings and radar ranges Last update December 11 2012 120 in C NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 3 At the moment when the mana fix i
356. used specifically when ECDIS specifications are not met by the software hardware system Electronic Navigation Chart ENC An electronic data file containing information that could be used to display a chart The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart for example sailing directions which may be considered necessary for safe navigation EP See Estimated Position Estimated Position Position of own ship determined by the common intersection of two LOPs Estimated Time of Arrival ETA The calculated arrival time to an active waypoint assuming no change in present course and speed or weather conditions This time is based on computer clock time For greatest accuracy make sure computer clock is synchronized with real time Fish Finder See Sounder Fix Position of own ship determined without reference to any former position by the common intersection of three or more LOPs Flood Current Flood The movement of tidal current up the shore or up a tidal river or estuary Geo reference To establish the relationship between page coordinates on a planar map and real world coordinates Last update December 11 2012 User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Global Positioning System GPS A worldwide radio navigation system developed by the US Department of Defense In addition to military purposes
357. ute Planning panel select the route you intend to check in the Routes table switch to the edit mode the Edit button and in the Schedule tab change the ETD estimated time of departure value so that the time period scheduled for navigating along the route overlapped with the time period for which you have weather data Once this done a ship symbol will appear on the route Now you can view the results of operation of the Inspect Ship Position function If there are several routes and the time set in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab for the weather forecast display falls within the time period scheduled for navigating on the routes the own ship symbol will appear on these routes too To select an own ship symbol left click on it The active own ship symbol will become red Last update December 11 2012 110 CNAYMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS mm G Figure 137 Non Figure 138 Selected selected own ship own Ship symbol symbol 7 Open the Inspect Ship Position panel where the result of the analysis of the current own ship position for the weather conditions at the given time is displayed To open the Inspect Ship Position panel press the Inspect Ship Pos button in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab 8 To change the time for the evaluation of the own ship position move the time slider of the time setup tool in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab or drag the own ship symbol along
358. utters you can either use sliders or select a value from drop down lists For Sea and Gain clutters there is a possibility to set them to auto configuring to do so check the Auto checkboxes 9 To adjust the radar image orientation use the Orientation Adjustment scale 10 In case there are failures in transmission of one of radar pulses video synchro bearing or heading indicator of this pulse in the Radar Diagnostics section is colored red If there are no failures indicators are green To use the radar image overlay functionality the ECDIS has to be connected to a PCI radar processor board 8 5 Anti collision Display IMPORTANT Official anti collision tools that must be used for decision making are type approved Radar AHPA or ATA or EPA This anti collision tool may only be used as a supplementary tool IMPORTANT The Anti collision display module requires individual licensing The anti collision display functionality is implemented to make it easier for you to evaluate the danger of collision of the own ship with other vessels located with external input devices The functionality is also meant to help you to calculate and carry out maneuvers for passing the vessels at safe distances The anti collision display functionality has two functions 97 New feature in 5 0 84 program version Last update December 11 2012 149 r NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS e To indicate that the own ship has approached
359. utton the time changes back to the onboard time Last update December 11 2012 21 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor System ID C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Version 5 0 84 194 Copy User usr file Collect Diagnostic Info Save Diagnostic Info Databases status Licenses status Disks status Talkers status Database Integrity Signature Database ChartletsBase Issue 1 N A N A Database Professional Issue 561 OK 1296 Last check date 28 02 2013 08 17 UTC Perform check on startup Figure 14 Info gt System Info tab 3 3 5 System Information The Info gt System Info tab gives the user easy access to the System ID and the version of the CM 93 3 SDK installed The system ID is a unique ID required for all systems that use CM 93 3 chart databases and should be the same as the one written on the C MAP eToken dongle To save the system information to a file do the following 1 Press the Copy User usr file button The Copy User usr file dialog will open 2 n the Copy User usr file dialog select a folder where to save the file and press the Export button The file will be saved to the specified location 3 3 6 Color Differentiation Test The color generating capability of any type of display screen will deteriorate with age and the Color Differenti
360. vices used for positioning should be registered in the ECDIS see chapter 3 1 Inout Output e Dead reckoning see chapter 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning Several positioning devices can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time One of the devices is used as a primary position source and one as a secondary position source Both the own ship position defined with the primary positioning device and that defined with the secondary positioning device can be displayed in the chart view see chapter 7 1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track Using the display of both primary and secondary positions of the own ship you can monitor the reliability of various positioning devices To set a positioning device as a primary or a secondary position source do the following Make sure that the positioning device you want to set as a primary or secondary position source is connected to the ECIDS and registered in the Config gt Input Output tab see chapter 3 1 Input Output 1 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position sources are configured in the Position sources tab All positioning devices that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the Secondary position source drop down list dead reckoning DR is also on the list though it is not an external input device Navigation Own ship Dead LOP 5 Il x Data past track and vector Reckoning Position Fix Ship Motion Mode Manual Center Position Heading Position Correction Rela
361. vided into two parts by a red horizontal line In the top part the speed of the tidal stream in the flood state is shown and in the bottom part the speed of the tidal stream in the ebb state is shown Graph Speeds Directions 15 17 19 UTC 2009 10 03 10 52 Speed 0 0kn Direction 195 00 Direct Changes Flood Ebb Ebb Figure 96 Tidal stream information graph Not considering the stream state the button Direct Changes is outpressed The diagram displays absolute values of speed and direction without taking into account flood and ebb states Last update December 11 2012 83 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Graph Speeds Directions E LLILILLILIIL3Ij 2 5 ai 7 UTC 2009 10 0308 18 Speed 2 2kn Direction 195 00 Flood Ebb Ebb Figure 97 Tidal stream information graph absolute speed and direction values The direction of the tidal stream is graphically shown for every hour as green arrows The blue thin graph line is a graph of water height levels of the tidal High Low station related to the tidal stream in case the tidal stream is linked to any tidal station at all Please note that it is only a schematically drawn graph without any level marks In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram When you move the mouse pointer over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal stream direction and speed are shown below allowing you to obtain mo
362. waypoint to the next Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG Units and Time tab Distance Units section The parameter value is calculated automatically and is not editable e DTA xx Distance to Arrival distance from this waypoint to the last waypoint of the route destination Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG Units and Time tab Distance Units section e TTG Estimated time that will be spent for sailing from this waypoint to the next e BWW Bearing Between Waypoints bearing from one waypoint to the next Expressed in degrees e Name The name of the waypoint optional parameter 5 To save changes press the Save button All changes will be saved and the route edit mode will be switched off 6 4 5 Adding Critical Points You can specify a critical point on the route for the ECDIS to give an alarm if the own ship is going to reach the critical point within a specified time or distance To set a critical point do the following 1 Open the Route gt Route Planning tab select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route edit mode 2 n the route edit mode switch to the CP table Now you are in the control points edit mode and can add new and edit existing critical points Start Route m Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Rueiame From Pon P uc METNN NEN gt ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria panscp Charts
363. wn ship position received from the secondary positioning device Own ship symbol current position Primary past track Secondary past track Time label on the past track Figure 141 Own ship position and vectors and passed track presentation To configure the display of the own ship in the chart view do the following 1 Set the primary and secondary position sources in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab the Position Source section see chapter 7 2 Position Sources 2 Open the Navi Own Ship past track and vector tab In this tab you can configure the display of the own ship passed track and prediction vectors Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data past track and vector Reckoning Position Fix Own ship vector Past track Secondary past track iv Ground stabilized vector e Water stabilized vector v Past track Reset Vectorlength 6 min Display every 30 sec re Display every 30 sec Prediction vector Time labels Sight lines Figure 142 Config gt System tab Own Ship tab 3 To start drawing the own ship passed track the track based on positioning data from the primary position source tick the Past track checkbox in the Past track section The passed track will be displayed in the chart view The passed track is updated at the interval set in the Display every field To set an interval select a value in the Display every drop down list 4 To hide the passed track clear the
364. x select or enter the time at which you want to receive weather data every day 7 Press the Send Request button Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server 2 In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically 3 If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Press the Send Request button A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request_xxxxx xml 2 Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no 3 You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder 4 The ECDIS will load the data automatically e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server 2 A data
365. y problems have been identified in the course of the signature check contact the database provider to settle them 10 The integrity check may help identify problems with the updates data integrity In case any problems have been identified in the course of the integrity check procedure contact the updates provider to settle them Last update December 11 2012 28 NAVMARING User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results appears e To unregister a database select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Unregister database button The database will be unregistered IMPORTANT If you unregister a database it is deleted from the system hard disk To restore data you will need to obtain the database saved on a removable data storage device and install the database once more After the database has been installed it has to be added to view see chapter 4 1 2 Displaying Database and licensed see chapter 4 2 Licensing Data if licensing is necessary 4 1 2 Displaying Databases To display data from a database on the system screen the database should be added to the view If you have installed several databases you can hide databases you dont need at the moment and display those that you need To add a database to the view do the following 1 Open the Data gt Add Remove Database tab All registered but not added to the v
366. ydrographic Department Rt General 1500 000 500 000 Ministerio de Defensa Nacioi Coastal 500 000 150000 Ministry of Transport Maritim Coastal Approach 150000 50000 Hellenic Navy Hydrographic S Approach 50000 15000 amp Departm nt for Planning andi 4 gt Harbor 15000 5000 Plan 5 000 Apply Mark All Clear All Figure 68 Data gt Chart Catalogue tab Select a database in the databases drop down list The list of charts grouped by issuing organizations will be displayed in the pane under the databases drop down list To expand a group click on the plus sign next to the group name In the expanded list names of charts will be presented To collapse the group click on the minus sign next to the group name Select a chart to view information about it in the pane to the right from the charts list To scroll the chart view so that to display a specified chart double click on the chart name in the charts list Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic m fl x Catalogue Database Licensing Updating S57 Professional DataSet filename Z11E9600 C00 1 Chart Boundaries Source identification code 004 Ministerio de Defensa NacioL Source producing agency Ministerio de Defensa Overview 40 000 000 000 000 004 211E9600 Producing agency Jeppesen Italia S r l World 5 000 000 1500000 010 Z11E9610 Scale 600000 General 1500 000 500 000 011 Z11E9620 Leve
367. zetazfaz tixutesbekvatebic bak eu MEC dba t dd v RR aste Ei ERR AKENE 171 9 2 1 Man Ov rboard Functionally TERRE ON 171 9 2 2 Poston FI FUNCIONAR TE T EDITT 171 Te EOE ON oe E E O E 171 9 3 1 Viowing Log Book ENICS m E Tee 171 2a Log Dook Play DAOR MET TT T TNT 174 2 A O RR Tm 175 APPENDIX A List of Input SENTENCES cc cecccceeeecceececeeseeeeaeeeseeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeesaueesseeeessaeeeseeessaeeesees 177 APPENDIX B Werte UDUL cl qi Qe iaka niiair 189 APPENDIX C Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPS 190 lec MTM eL m 195 PDDISUISIDEE eee eee eae Pee Pena ESTE Lona etu MRNA UM NS EET M CMM UMEN MA MEN CddU au Meu NEM cer rrr Mid dUE 202 I Hge Inde peces HDI DIHENISIIENU spunea tdenaea bela MPH RE IHNEN NEMINEM MM beb PUR NEREEPMMME 204 Last update December 11 2012 5 C SAY MARINE User s Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 User Manual Structure The ECDIS User Manual contains detailed information about all functions of the ECDIS The user manual consists of eight chapters each containing a number of sub chapters Each chapter presents information on how to perform specific tasks using the ECDIS The order of chapters is determined by the order of tasks that the user faces when navigating at sea 1 2 Typographic Conventions The ECDIS User Manual is written under assumption that the user is familiar with the main principles of work in the MS Windows environment and has exp

Danelec Business System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents